Home

QX-830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual

1. Symbol Parse Parse symbols send and Save Insert Data Extract Range Insert YF Hide Parse Table Extract Build Sequence Test Insert Data Extract Range Insert SP SP Extract 3 5 Notice that Extract and Insert share the same Parse Table Add Step Remove Step Clear All Parsing Sample Symbol Parse Sample Symbol Parse Original micro Original ABCOEFGHWELMNOPORS TU 201 23456709 Output cro lt Output CDE Cancel QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 4 13 Output Format 4 14 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual EE 5 Scanner Parameters Contents COMMUNICATION ccc ec cece eececceececeeceeceeceeeeeeeeeueceeeneeeeeeeeaeeneeeueaeeaueaeeaeeaeeaeeaeeaeeueeaeenesaeeaesaneeneseeeness 5 2 REA CYCIE MERTE 5 43 SYMDOIOGICS MEE 5 70 VO Parame CS S Ra ee ee ee eee 5 107 MalCNCOOE Sener ne nn ne ae ee ee eee 5 168 LAIN SUNG Se ceca cc EE E a we tate EE pane da eect E A asa Dos eat peed E A ena uate 5 177 This section explains the function and purpose of the Parameters commands in ESP s tabbed tree controls Important Unless otherwise specified command settings shown in this section are the default settings QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Communication Communication Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display the _ tree control tabs App Mode Then click the Co
2. Macros listed on this bar Click on Macros arrow to Add Macro y Remove Macro or Edit Macro Type serial commands here BEH Y Click on desired Macro to run Next Row Read Rate percent Read Rate decodefsec End ReadRate Calibrate Savetonovram Default Scanner Reset For Help press Fi SRRESTEOU Point to Point COMI 115 2K N 8 1 4 The Terminal interface allows the user to send serial commands to the scanner by using macros by copying and pasting or by typing commands in the Send text field The Terminal also displays symbol data or information from the scanner Right clicking on the Terminal screen displays a menu of additional options 6 2 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Terminal Find The Find function allows the user to enter text strings to be searched for in the Terminal For example 1 Type ABC into the Find box P E E Find fasc 2 Press Enter The first instance of ABC will be highlighted in the Terminal window 3 Click the Find button to the left of the text field to locate additional instances of ABC QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 6 3 Send Send The Send function allows the user to enter serial commands and then send them to the scanner 1 Type the command into the Send box 5 amp Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities Send lt a gt 2 Press Enter
3. Welcome to Rockwell Automation s EDS Wizard The EDS Wizard allows you to register ED S based devices unregister a device change the graphic images associated with a device create an EDS file from an unknown device Upload EDS file s stored in a device To continue click Next CD oe A 118 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices e Make sure the Register an EDS file s radio button is selected then click Next Rockwell Automation s EDS Wizard Options What task do you want to complete Register an EDS file s This option will add a device s to our database C Unregister a device This option will remove a device that has been registered by an EDS file from our database Sse Create an EDS file sem This option creates a new EDS file that allows our software to recognize your device tf Upload EDS file s from the device EH This option uploads and registers the EDS file s stored tn the device Rockwell Automation s EDS Wizard Registration Hectronic Data Sheet file s will be added to your system for use in Rockwell Automation applications Register a single file Register a directory of EDS files Look im subfolders Named E Work EDS O 830 32 000002 10 eds i f there is an icon file ico with the same name as the file s you are registering then this image will be associated with the device To
4. iz a b E d x Enabled Check Character Output Status Check Character Output Status when added to the symbol provides additional data security When enabled the check character character is read and compared along with the symbol data When disabled symbol data is sent without the check character Check Character Qutpuk Status Disabled DO jsabled Enabled Note With Check Character Output Status enabled and an External Edge External Level or Serial Data trigger option enabled an invalid check character calculation will cause a No Read Message to be transmitted at the end of the read cycle Large Intercharacter Gap Large Intercharacter Gap is helpful for reading symbols that are printed out of specification When enabled the scanner can read symbols with gaps between symbol characters that exceed three times 3x the narrow element width Large Intercharacter Gap Disabled Disabled Enabled Important Do not use Large Intercharacter Gap with Narrow or Narrow Enhanced Quiet Zone enabled because a large intercharacter gap over 3x could cause a narrow quiet zone 5x to be interpreted as an intercharacter gap QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 71 Symbologies Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled the scanner will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered valid Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled
5. Firmware Verhication App Code Request Part No App Code Request Checksum Firmware Update Firmware Update is used to download application code to the scanner Application code versions are specific to the scanner Consult with a sales representative before downloading application code If needed application boot code in the form of a mot file can be requested To download application code 1 First be sure that the scanner is connected to the host computer 2 Apply power to the scanner 3 In the Firmware Update dropdown menu select App Code This will open a dialog that allows the user to browse for the application code file 4 Navigate to where the application code file a mot file is located on the host computer 5 Allow approximately a minute for firmware to download As the application code begins to download the scanner will be silent the LEDs will flash intermittently and a progress indicator at the bottom of the ESP window will show when the download is complete Caution Do not interrupt power or disconnect the host cable while download is in progress QxX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 7 17 Firmware Firmware Verification Request Part Number Send a request to the scanner for application code boot code or FPGA code part numbers 1 Click the Firmware tab 2 Select App Code Boot Code or FPGA Code from the dropdown menu to the left of the Request Part No button
6. The status of a specific serial command can be requested by entering the command followed by a question mark For example send lt K142 gt to request the status of Postamble Entering Control Characters in Serial Commands To enter control characters within a serial command hold down the Ctrl key while typing the desired character Example To enter a carriage return and line feed M J enter lt K141 1 CNTL m CNTL j gt A 22 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Serial Configuration Commands The following serial commands can be entered through ESP s Terminal to control QX 830 functions Detailed descriptions of command parameters are available in Chapter 5 Scanner Parameters Communication RS 232 A lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt RS 232 B lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt RS 422 lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Ethernet lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt Ethernet TCP Ports lt K127 7CP Port 1 TCP Port 2 gt EtherNet IP lt K129 status gt RS 232 A Data Type lt K130 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt RS 232 B Data Type lt K131 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt RS 422 Data Type lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic outpu
7. cccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeaaeeeeeesaaeeees 7 23 Embedded Menus eretia ee ae earl lar haa A 1 28 Appendices Appendix A General Specifications ccccccccseececseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeesseeeeees A 2 Appendix B Electrical Specifications cccccccecccceeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeeees A 6 Appendix C Ground and Shield Considerations cccccceeeeeeeeeees A 14 Appendix D Flying Lead Cordset PinOuts cccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaees A 16 Appendix E Serial COMMANAS ccccccecceseeeceeeeeceseeeseeeeessueeeesaaeees A 17 Appendix F Protocol COMMANGS ccccceeecesseeeeceeeceeceeeeeseeeesaeeees A 80 Appendix G ASCII Tabl yt2 cis s 21 2255 Foznsadcactoaiec ik stestuoech conatecedeetentaeace aire A 89 Appendix H Configuring Ethernet TCP IP cccccecceeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees A 90 Appendix Using EtherNet IP ccc ccccccescceceeseeseeeeeeseeeesseesesseeess A 93 Appendix J Operating EtherNet IP Serial Gateway Data Fields A 102 Appendix K Allen Bradley Version 16 PLC Setup ccccsseeeeees A 104 Appendix L Allen Bradley Version 20 PLC Setup cccceeeeeees A 118 Appendix M EIPScan Setup cccccccsccceseeecceseececeesccceeeeseeseessees A 125 Appendix N Interface Standards ccccccceeeccceneceeceeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeees A 131 Appendix O Glossary Of TermS ccccccceeccceeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeas A 132
8. Gukpuk On Mismatch Qutpuk State Normally Open Pulse width 500 Oukput Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Ho Read Number of Triggers aa 255 Number to Output On 0 Decodes per Trigger T Number to Output On Example If Number to Output On is set to 3 and Trend Analysis Mode is set to No Read then the output will not be activated until 3 No Reads have occurred Sets the number of Trend Analysis Mode events mismatches No Reads or reads trigger as configured by Trend Analysis Mode to occur within the trigger evaluation period before activating the associated output Output 3 Parameters Output On Mismatch Output State Normally Open Pulse width S00 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Mo Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On D U 255 Decodes per Trigger T 5 160 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Decodes per Trigger When set to this mode and when the appropriate output is set to output on trend analysis the scanner will function in a Decodes per Trigger mode during the read cycle and the trend analysis operation Output will be activated based on whether or not the symbol decode count at the end of the read cycle is less than the decodes per trigger threshold Note Although this setup causes the scanner to function in a Decodes per Trigger mode the decode count will only be appended to the symbol data if the status of the
9. Receive After Connect At startup loads the scanner s settings into ESP This is not recommended if ESP settings are needed for future use Skip EZ Mode At startup skips EZ Mode and opens directly in App Mode Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults At startup enables the Send and Save as Customer Defaults option in the Send Recv command 2 6 QxX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Using ESP Preferences gt Terminal Tab Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced V Show Non Printable Characters Default Format Fast Change Echo Font C Enhanced Format Slower Enable Echo Change Keyboard Macros Background Color Blue Vv Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus Default Settings OK Cancel Show Non Printable Characters When Show Non Printable Characters is enabled characters such as CRLF will be displayed in the Terminal window When Enhanced Format is checked the characters are displayed with more detailed formatting Change Keyboard Macros Clicking the Change Keyboard Macros button brings up the Function Keys dialog In this dialog select the desired function key and then enter the macro keystrokes in the associated key map For example to make Ctrl F2 the keystroke to send a trigger character select F2 then in the Ctrl row enter lt trigger character gt and click OK Then whenever the Ctrl F2 keystroke is pressed the trigger character
10. e eje o eesieu 830 G 870 MS 890 MS ee MS P Quads MINI MINI Hawk Q Hawk Velocity T P PD HS 20 MS O Mobile Hawk OQuadrus Verifier HE 4T Description 0 830 1 Show this dialog at startup C Skip EZ Mode 1 Click the button showing the QX 830 2 Click OK Note The QX 830 can also be selected by double clicking the button showing the QX 830 3 Click Yes when this dialog appears Would vou like bo connect to the 9 8307 Mo Note To select another model later click the Switch Model button near the top of the screen or use Model gt New Model in the menu toolbar 1 6 QxX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Quick Start Step 6 Connect Connection Wizard To connect using the Connection Wizard e Click Connect on the menu toolbar and then select Connection Wizard e Select RS 232 or Ethernet to activate the appropriate display e Configure RS 232 or Ethernet settings as required by the application and click Connect IP Address 162 148 88 51 RS 232 O RS 232 Ethemet one Ethemet TCP Pott 2001 EJ Eight COM C Force Connect RS 232 Connection Wizard Ethernet Connection Wizard e When a connection is established the green indicator in the status bar at the bottom right of the screen will be visible O 830 1 0 530 RRR ioz 165 0 2 TCP Important The scanner is in Continuous Read Mode by default For best
11. us SP Click Delete to remove characters QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 41 Communication Postamble Useful for identifying and controlling incoming data For example defining the postamble as a Carriage return and a line feed causes each decoded message to be displayed on its own line Preamble Disabled Preamble Characters CR Postamble Characters Allows the user to define up to four postamble characters that can be added to the end of the decoded data Postamble Enabled Postamble Characters Click Delete to remove characters 5 42 QxX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Read Cycle Y Sy Parameters y Scanner Parameters Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display the tree control tabs Then click the Read Cycle tab to display the Read Cycle tree control Parameters Read Cycle Multisymbal Trigger Mode Trigger Filter Duration Leading Edge Trailing Edge External Trigger State Serial Trigger Decodes Before Oukput End of Read Cycle Processing Timeout Reader Setup Laser Setup ESP Values Continuous Read 313 315 Active Closed The indicates Ache Clozed that the setting is the default 200 A To open nested options single click the To change a setting double click the setting and
12. 3 Click the Request Part No button to see the part number displayed in the text field to the right Firmware Yertication App Code Request Part Mo App Code Request Checksum Request Part Number by Serial Command e When lt gt a request for all product part numbers is sent the scanner returns lt b BOOT_P N gt lt a APP_P N gt lt p PROFILE_P N gt e When lt a gt a request for the application code part number is sent the scanner returns lt a APP_P N gt e When lt b gt a request for the boot code part number is sent the scanner returns lt b BOOT_P N gt e When lt f gt a request for the FPGA code part number is sent the scanner returns lt f FPGA_P N gt 7 18 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Utilities Request Checksum Send a request to the scanner for application code boot code or FPGA code checksums 1 Click the Firmware tab 2 Select App Code Boot Code or FPGA Code from the dropdown menu to the left of the Request Checksum button 3 Click the Request Checksum button to see the part number displayed in the text field to the right Firmware Yerticatior App Code Reguest Fart Mo App Code Request Checksum Request Checksum by Serial Command e When lt gt a request for all available firmware checksums is sent the scanner returns lt b BOOT_CHECKSUM gt lt a APP_CHECKSUM gt lt p PROFILE_CHECKSUM gt
13. Diagnostics Counts Read only Counts Read only Power on Resets Power on Saves Custom Default Saves oOo A Power On 16 bit counter that increments on scanner power on Used for detecting unwanted resets caused by power supply problems or ESD transients Returns the number of times the scanner has been re powered or a watchdog reset Occurs 0 to 65 535 power ons Resets 16 bit counter that increments every time the scanner is reset Value is reset on power on Used for detecting unwanted resets caused by power supply problems or ESD transients Resets include watchdog reset lt A gt lt Z gt lt Zd gt and hardware defaults A watchdog reset is a reset that is forced whenever the software locks up 0 to 65 535 resets Power On Saves 16 bit counter that increments every time a scanner setting is saved for power on Custom Default Saves 16 bit counter that increments every time a scanner setting is saved to the customer parameter section of flash memory 5 178 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Hours Since Reset Read only Used as a troubleshooting tool that can help pinpoint the cause of a reset Records the number of hours and minutes of operation since the last system reset Hours Since Reset Read only Hours T Minutes T Hours 16 bit counter that increments every 60 minutes Range 0 to 23 hours Minutes 16 bit counter that increme
14. Mismatch or Wo Read Normally Open ot Pulse Mo Read j T T Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled izabled Enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 153 I O Parameters Output 3 Parameters Output 3 has the same parameters and default settings as Output 1 and Output 2 Output 3 Parameters Mutou On Mutpuk State Pulse Width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Number of Triggers Number to Qukpuk On Decodes per Trigger Diagnostics High Temperature Service Unit Laser Current High Laser Current Low Low Temperature Mismatch Normally Open SU Pulse Ho Read T T T Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Output On Output On provides discrete signalling to host software to control external devices such as PLCs and relays It is useful for routing sorting and to prevent mis packaging and mis routing Sets the discrete output functions for specific user selected conditions Allows the user to set the conditions under which an output or outputs will be activated Note If Output On is set to Match or Mismatch a transition switching will not occur unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory Output 3 Parameters QUEpuUE On Mukpuk Stake Pulse Width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Number of Triggers Number to Output On Decodes per Trigger Diagnostics High
15. Output Or Mismatch or Wo Read Output State Normally Open Pulse width SO Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Read Number of Triggers T Number to Output Gr T Decodes per Trigger T Diagnostics High Temperature Disabled Service Unit Disabled Laser Current High Laser Current Low Disabled Low Temperature Disabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 151 I O Parameters Service Unit Allows the user to set up the output to toggle to active when the service timer has expired This condition will only be held for one service timer click Note This feature cannot be used if the scanner is in Continuous Read When Service Unit is enabled a message of up to 10 ASCII characters is sent whenever the system detects that the service timer s limit has been reached The service timer is reset at power on meaning that the service timer s limit is the amount of time since last reset Service timer increments can be set in seconds or minutes Output 2 Parameters Mukoue On Mukouk State Pulse Width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend 4nalysis Mode Number of Triggers Number to Gukpuk On Decodes per Trigger Diagnostics High Temperature Service Unit Laser Current High Laser Current Low Low Temperature Laser Current High Mismatch or Mo Read Normally Open 50 Pulse Mo Read 0 O Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Activates ou
16. This option is a combination of Point to Point with RTS CTS and Point to Point with XON XOFF ACK NAK see ACK NAK Options Polling Mode see Polling Mode Options QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 25 Communication Address The Protocol Address can be any number between 1 and 50 Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 50 Protocol Port R5232 A ACK f MAK Options RES MUL REQ NUL STX MUL ETS MUL ACK ACK MAK MAK Polling Mode Options RES EOT REQ ENG STX STs ETS ET ACK ALK HAK MAK Response Timeout 5 LEZ Status Disabled Protocol Port RS 232 A or RS 422 can be used as Protocol Ports Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Prokocol Port AS23924 ACK f MAK Options RES REG MUL STs MUL ETs MLL ALK ALE MAK HAK Polling Mode Options RES EOT REQ ENG STs ST ETs ETs ALK ALKE MAK MAK Response Timeout D LAC Status Disabled 5 26 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters ACK NAK Options These parameters take effect for ACK NAK on the main RS 232 or RS 422 ports not on the Auxiliary Port and are completely independent of the Polling Mode Options The scanner always follows the protocol in both directions to and from the host There is no option to disable it from either direction Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Protocol Port RS232 4 ACK PAK Options RES ALL REQ ALL ST ALL ETS MUL A
17. e When lt a gt a request for the application code checksum is sent the scanner returns lt a APP_CHECKSUM gt e When lt b gt a request for the boot code checksum is sent the scanner returns lt b BOOT_CHECKSUM gt e When lt f gt a request for the FPGA code checksum is sent the scanner returns lt f FPGA_CHECKSUM gt QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 7 19 Default Reset Save Default Reset Save Understanding and controlling the scanner s active saved and default settings is critical to its successful operation Serial Function Cmd ESP EZ Button Save to Reader 5 A Reset Will not save for power on lt A gt Send Noc ave No 3 S S Reset and Recall Power On Parameters lt Arp gt Send lt Arp gt from Terminal No N N amp Reset and Recall Customer Default es 9 S lt Arc gt Send lt Arc gt from Terminal No 6 Reset and Recall Mi Default O eset and Recall Microscan Defau aramee lt Ard gt Send lt Ard gt from Terminal No Save to Reader Save Current Settings for Power On lt Z gt Sand and Save No Save to Reader raan lt Ze gt Send and Save Customer No y Defaults for Power On Press and O Recall Customer Default Settings hold while ma and Save for Power On isi a om ewe powering on scanner Q Recall Microscan Default Settings and Save for Power On Will not lt Zrd gt Send lt Zrd gt from Terminal No N default
18. Disabled Enabled Note The extra character identifies the country of origin QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 83 Symbologies Supplementals Status Reads Supplementals typically used in publications and documentation A supplemental is a 2 to 5 digit symbol appended to the main symbol When set to Enabled or Required the scanner reads supplemental code data that has been appended to the standard UPC or EAN codes Supolementals Status Disabled l a5 b E d x Enabled Required Disabled UPC Supplementals will not be decoded Enabled When enabled the scanner will try to decode a main and a supplemental However if a supplemental is not decoded the main will be sent by itself at the end of the read cycle Required When set to Required both the main and the supplemental symbols must be read or a single No Read condition results For example if Supplementals is set to Required Separator is enabled and an asterisk is defined as the UPC separator character Then the data is displayed as MAIN SUPPLEMENTAL Note Under no circumstances will the supplemental symbol data be sent without a main symbol Note If additional symbols other than the main or supplemental will be read in the same read cycle Number of Symbols should be set accordingly Separator Status Allows users to distinguish between the main and Supplemental symbols A character can be inserted between the sta
19. K STRING lt gt Monitor Tags Edit Tags Ca a of Monitor atagcolettion 0 0000000000 OYO 20 Expand the QXHawk_IO_big_pt so that the IN and OUT structures and values are visible fa RSLuyix 5000 MscanLuvix3561 1756 161 Piugiau Tags MainPrugrani File Edit Wew Search Logic Communicatiors Tools Window Hep x CECECECECA Soltel ie viel lal Aem Aun O E punMode n aan Path AB_ETHIP 1510 10 5 233 Backplane S gt amp No Forces p E Contoller OK X E Battery OK AiE i r No Edits B E 1 0 0K aj iog D A r fi Fevoritee 3 Controller MscanLagix5561 Scope E8 MainProgram Shaw Show Al Controller Tags Redundancy A A ele 7 iti 4 Controller Fauk Handler Name amp Value Style Data Type Description E Pawer Up Handler amp qx_l0_biot ees Soran oe g _10_big udt d L 3 Tasks E qx_l0_big_pt IN fice MEL qx_IN_big_udt choose one CPS for IN and OUT sm lle gk_I0_big_pt IN OUT_echo feo J qx_OUT_udt echa of assembly ba Pl Bca MainProgram gx_I0_big_ptIN OUT_echo uzertag 0 Decimal DINT helpful for ider n and camr eee i D j qx_I0_big ptIN OUT_echo command t _gx_command echa of OUT assembly ba PLC _ _ Unscheduled Programs fa qx_l0_big_ptIN OUT_echo ext_out gx_external_oulputs discrete outp ntrol I Motion Groups o
20. No Read 0 0 T Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Activates output when the laser current drops below factory defined lower limits Output 3 Parameters MurpuE On Mutpuk State Pulse width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Number of Triggers Number bo Oukput On Decodes per Trigger Diagnostics High Temperature Service Unit Laser Current High Laser Current Low Low Temperature 5 164 Mismatch Normally Open ot Pulse Mo Read T T T Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Low Temperature Scanner Parameters Activates output when the temperature drops below factory defined lower limits Output 3 Parameters Output on Output State Pulse width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Number of Triggers Number to Output On Decodes per Trigger Diagnostics High Temperature Service Unit Laser Current High Laser Current Low Low Temperature Mismatch Normally Open 5 Pulse Mo Read 0 0 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled izabled Enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 165 I O Parameters Quality Output Quality Qutpuk Quality Output Separator f Decodes Trigger Status Disabled Decode Direction Output Disabled Quality Output Separator The separator character separates quality out
21. Pulse and Output 3 Pulse buttons activate the link between the and Disable Reader send Motor Oft of the host connector The buttons in the Extras section can Disable or Enable Reader cend Motor On Enable the reader or deactivate and reactivate the motor Device Control Serial Utility Commands Output 1 Pulse Sending lt L1 gt activates the link between Output 1 and Output 1 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 1 status Output 2 Pulse Sending lt L2 gt activates the link between Output 2 and Output 2 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 2 status Output 3 Pulse Sending lt L3 gt activates the link between Output 3 and Output 3 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 3 status Disable Reader sending lt I gt will turn the scanner OFF end the current read cycle and will not allow the scanner to enter another read cycle until turned ON This feature is useful during extended periods of time when no symbols are being decoded or the scanner is being configured Disabling the scanner will not affect any commands that have already been downloaded Enable Reader sending lt H gt will turn the scanner ON and allow it to enter read cycles 7 8 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Utilities Differences from Default Click the Utilities button and then the Differ
22. iv QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Introduction About the QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner The key features of the QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner are e X Mode symbol reconstruction and aggressive decode algorithm e Ethernet TCP IP and EtherNet IP e Ultra high performance processing e Real time decoding e Green Flash performance indicator e LED array for performance communication and I O user feedback e EZ Button for setup and testing e Compact size for easy integration into a wide variety of applications Scanner Communication There are three ways to configure and test the QX 830 e Microscan s Windows based ESP Software Easy Setup Program which offers point and click ease of use and visual responses to user adjustments e Serial commands such as lt K100 1 gt that can be sent from ESP s Terminal or another terminal program The EZ Button on the side of the scanner EtherNet IP is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendors Association QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual vV Warning and Caution Summary Warning and Caution Summary This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not
23. lt K220 timeout gt plus 20 milliseconds If sending a command that requests data like a read of the counters lt T gt lt V gt lt X gt lt N gt Populate the Receive Timeout with a value of 10 milliseconds or greater Populate the Receive Length field with a value set to the maximum length of data the PLC can handle in one transaction up to 470 If set too small the device will fragment the response over multiple transactions 4 Populate the Receive Request Flags with 0x1 if needed to delete all pending data from the device before it sends a response to the command 5 Initiate the transaction 6 When the transaction is complete check the Receive Length field e If Receive Length is 0 no data has been received A 102 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices e If Receive Length is non zero then new data has been received Process the Serial Data field up to the value of Receive Length and manage any fragmentation per standard programming technique Check the Receive Response Flags If the value is not 3 then the string sitting in the Serial Data field in not a complete message It is a fragment of a larger message To receive data from the QX 830 1 Populate the Send Length field with O 2 Populate the Receive Length field with a value set to the maximum length of data the PLC can handle in one transaction up to 470 If set too small the device will fragment the response over multiple t
24. sticky settings Recall Microscan Default Settings and Save for Power On Will also lt Zrdall gt Send lt Zrdall gt from Terminal No default sticky settings a When right clicking in a tree control to select Default Current Menu Settings or Default All ESP Settings it is important to note that only ESP settings are defaulted To save these defaults to the scanner itself follow up with a Save to Reader Send and Save command b Only available in ESP if enabled in Preferences General tab accessible from the Options dropdown menu Resets Resets A commands affect only the current settings active memory and are not saved for power on Saved for Power on Power on parameters Z commands are saved to NOVRAM and recalled and loaded into current parameters when power is cycled to the scanner or the lt Arp gt command is issued Defaults Defaults are Microscan firmware settings or saved customer settings that can be recalled either by software or hardware reset 7 20 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Utilities Customer Default Parameters Customer default parameters Saved by lt Zc gt are the same set of parameters as power on parameters but are saved in a different isolated section of NOVRAM This allows a user essentially to create a back up set of parameters that can be recalled in the event that the current parameters or power on parameters have been accidentally changed or a
25. to 1 Mo Is Pravseg N Sequence Yes Process IM DecodedData Clear OUT Command Trigger to 0 No Is IN CommandEcho Trigger 07 A 100 PrevSeq is a separate program tag Varlable used to delecti new read data IN Command Trigger will also change in response Wait for IN Sequence to change Optional Use a timeout mechanism to limit the time waiting for IN Sequence to change If a timeout occurs assume a MOREAD and initiate error handling Check for NOREAL Use the string length field to datennine the number of valid characters Wait for reader to recognize the falling tigger Optional Use a timeout mechanism to limit the time waiting for the echoed Trigger to fall Ifa timeout occurs initiate error handling QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual NET and MOD LED Indicators Appendices MOD Module Indicator State Summary Requirement EOR an Implementation If no power is supplied to the device the Steady OFF No power module status indicator will be steady Per requirement OFF Device lf the device is operating correctly the Steady GREEN l module status indicator will be steady Per requirement operational GREEN If the device has detected a non recoverable Safe Mode Basic Steady RED Major fault minor fault the module status indicator comm only Scanning will be steady RED system non functional While the device is performing i
26. 7 oz 200 g 5 19 1mm QX 1 Dimensions QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices General Specifications Read Ranges mm 200 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 200 a tee ee tt tr Lj 8 N a 3 mm 200 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 200 l T t T T 4 T T T 1 T L J in 5 0 te tf tt tp he yt et tt a Typical scan _ Pasi o o in Range 300 250 10 015 10 200 150 oL 0 Typical scan oL 0 mm in area gt 90 mm in Range Range Low Density Medium Density High Density Narrow Bar Width Read Range 0075 191 mm 10 to 12 254 mm to 305 mm 010 254 mm 7 to 16 178 mm to 406 mm Low Density 015 381 mm 6 to 19 152 mm to 483 mm 020 508 mm 5 to 22 127 mm to 559 mm 040 1 02 mm 4 to 30 102 mm to 762 mm 0075 191 mm 2 5 to 5 5 64 mm to 140 mm 010 254 mm 1 5 to 7 38 mm to 178 mm Medium Density 015 381 mm 1 5 to 8 5 38 mm to 216 mm 020 508 mm 1 5 to 11 38 mm to 279 mm 030 762 mm 1 to 12 25 mm to 305 mm 0033 084 mm Call Microscan 005 127 mm 4 to 5 102 mm to 127 mm High Density 0075 191 mm 3 5 to 6 75 89 mm to 171 mm 010 254 mm 3 25 to 8 83 mm to 203 mm 015 381 mm 3 25 to
27. Auto Connect Cancel Cancel RS 232 Connection Wizard Ethernet Connection Wizard e When a connection is established the green indicator in the status bar at the bottom right of the screen will be visible Ox 830 1 0 830 RRR ioz 165 0 2 TCP 2 12 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Using ESP Autoconnect e If the RS 232 connection attempt fails use Autoconnect to establish a connection between the scanner and the host Connecting Select the COM Part com Fress Skart to autoconnect se Select the COM Fort COM COM Other GF Autoconnect e If the communication port is not the default COM1 use the dropdown menu to change the port Connecting Select the COM Part com J600 N 7 1 e Once the correct port is chosen click Start to connect Stop e When a connection is established the green indicator in the status bar at the bottom right of the screen will be visible Q 830 1 O 830 ERRRIETERI Point to Point COM 115 2k N 8 1 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 2 13 Menu Toolbar View The View menu allows the user to move quickly between the Setup Terminal and Utilities interfaces without using the icon TIE buttons on the App Mode toolbar It also allows the user to EECC access the Bar Code Dialog shown below Setup Terminal Utilities Bar Code Dialog Symbols can be cre
28. De3 DC4 NAk SYN ETB CAN Em sue ESC FS GS RS Us SP Click Delete to remove characters Note Serial Data or Serial Data and Edge trigger mode must be enabled for Serial Trigger Character to function QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 51 Read Cycle Start Character Non Delimited Useful in applications where different characters are required to start a read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that starts the read cycle and is not enclosed by delimiters such as lt and gt Non delimited Start characters can be defined and will function according to the trigger event When defining Start trigger characters the following rules apply e In External Edge the scanner looks only for the Start trigger character and ignores any Stop trigger character that may be defined e In External Level the Start trigger character begins the read cycle and the Stop trigger character ends it Note that even after a symbol has been decoded and the symbol data transmitted the scanner remains in External Level trigger read cycle until a Stop character is received e In Serial Data and Edge trigger mode either a Start trigger character or a hardware trigger can start an edge trigger read cycle Serial Trigger Character Delimited SP Start Character Non Delimited Stop Character Won Delimited NUL NUL SOH ST ETX EOT ENG ACK BEL Bs HT LF vT Ea s0 _s1 DLE pcr De2 Dca
29. I O 1 1 0 2 gt Default 2 Input Active Options 0 Disabled 1 Output Active 2 Input Active Symbol Position Output Scan Status Serial Cmd lt K758 scan status separator gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Separator Serial Cmd lt K758 scan status separator gt Default Space 0x20 Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Database Identifier Output Serial Cmd lt K759 status separator gt Default 0 Disabed Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Separator Serial Cmd lt K759 status separator gt Default Space 0x20 Options Any 7 bit ASCII character QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 63 Serial Commands EZ Button Global Status Serial Cmd lt K770 global status default on power on gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Trigger 3 Unlatch Outputs 4 Parameter Switch Default on Power On Serial Cmd lt K770 global status default on power on gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EZ Button Modes Serial Cmd lt K771 single beep two beeps three beeps four beeps gt Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Single Beep Two Beeps Three Beeps Four Beeps 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 2 Auto Calibration 2 Auto Calibration 2 Auto Calibration 2 Auto Calibration 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On
30. Information Decodes Before Output Symbol Position Output etc Diagnostics Output and External Source Processing Mode Command or Data Ethernet can be configured for IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Mode Primary or Secondary TCP Port Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output and External Source Processing Mode QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Application Examples Application Examples The following examples demonstrate how the components described in previous pages can be deployed in industrial applications Daisy Chain Daisy chain configurations are used in applications such as product packaging where single items have multiple symbols For example a box with one symbol on the top and symbols on either side requires at least three scanners to ensure that all symbols will be decoded The highlighted areas below demonstrate how a daisy chain can be arranged One scanner is placed above the conveyor line and one scanner is placed on each side of the line The three scanners essentially function as a single scanner and data is sent from the primary scanner to the host or PLC Important Do not attempt to power more than four scanners with a single power supply in a daisy chain configuration Add a QX 1 and one power supply for every four additional scanners in the daisy chain lt ie To Power i Supply Qx 1 or PLC r E vat Er a
31. Minutes A 72 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Laser Current Warning Message High Current Status Serial Cmd lt K411 high current status high current message low current status low current message gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Message High Current Message Serial Cmd lt K411 high current status high current message ow current status low current message gt Default HIGH_LASER Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters Low Current Status Serial Cmd lt K411 high current status high current message low current status low current message gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Message Low Current Message Serial Cmd lt K411 high current status high current message low current status low current message gt Default LOW_LASER Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters User Defined Name Serial Cmd lt K412 user defined name gt Default QX 830 Options Any valid ASCII string up to 50 characters QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 73 Serial Commands Output Format Format Extract lt K740 output index start location length gt Format Insert lt K741 output index length hex string gt Format Assign lt K742 symbol number status gt Output Format Status lt K743 output format status gt lt K744 filter number symbology length wildcard placeholder nue e data decode direction database index gt
32. Mone Odd Stop Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Stop Bits 5 4 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Data Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Eight Eight Data Bits Symbol Data Output Enables or disables decoded symbol data output from the scanner Symbol Data Output Enabled Disabled Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enables or disables extra symbol information output from the scanner Extra Symbol Information E nabled Disabled Enabled Diagnostics Output Enables or disables diagnostics output from the scanner Eras Disabled Diagnostics Output Enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 5 Communication External Source Processing Mode Enables or disables processing of commands or data from sources external to the scanner External Source Processing Mode Command Disabled Command Command Command enables command processing in the scanner Note Command processing is always enabled for RS 232 A Data Data enables RS 232 A as a data source port Note The data path between in the source port and out the source port is always two way Data is copied from source data ports
33. Non Printable Characters Next but searches backward through Terminal text Default Settings Change Background Color Find Nex F3 Find Previous ShiFE F3 Keyboard Macros 6 6 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual E Utilities Contents Serial Utility COMMANAS cccccccseeceeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeeseeeeeessseeeeeesaeeeesseaeeseesees 1 2 Rea RAC ar re eee ee aS 1 4 COUMO ee een EO cane Oe eee ae ee 7 6 Device CONTON emer nee ee ane ee mn nT ne ene eee aS a om A ae ere ee eee 7 8 Differences from Default oo ccccccccecceeceecceeeeseeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeseeseeeeeeaesentes 7 9 Master Database ia cede cenit deeecidec vind cdedass teed epdest dactinatuesiiaus aun usbidats weed denawadiaadvuseniesbecataedagashaddasaaenece 7 10 Diora Ba COUE eee ene E eee E ee eee ee ere ee eee 7 16 Fe RII h E E AE PEENE E tw sate casi E A ASE AE N AAT EAAS AE EE AAE A A EE E E A 7 17 Default ReseiSaV E enei n E a ee ee ce ee ee eee 7 20 Scanner status FROGS SIS sieniin eee eae a oE E a e EREE 7 22 Other Serial Utility Commands cccccccseseeecceceeeeececeueeeeceuececcseueeeessesseeecsuaeeeessueeeesseageeeesaas 7 23 Embedded Menus osaeraren oes ae ee eee 1 28 This section explains the function and purpose of serial utility commands which are generally performed during scanner operation QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 7 1 Serial Utility Commands S
34. Options 1 to 74 MicroPDF417 Serial Cmd lt K485 status scan line limit fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Scan Line Limit MicroPDF417 Serial Cmd lt K485 status scan line limit fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 200 Options 1 to 65535 Fixed Symbol Length Status MicroPDF417 Serial Cmd lt K485 status scan line limit fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length MicroPDF417 Serial Cmd lt K485 status scan line limit fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 10 Options 1 to 366 A 56 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Symbol Reconstruction Symbol Reconstruction Redundancy Serial Cmd lt K496 symbol reconstruction redundancy symbol reconstruction effort gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Low 2 Medium 3 High Symbol Reconstruction Effort Serial Cmd lt K496 symbol reconstruction redundancy symbol reconstruction effort gt Default 0 Minimum Options 0 Minimum 1 Moderate 2 Maximum QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 57 Serial Commands I O Parameters Calibration Options lt K521 unused video scan speed laser power laser framing symbology gt Serial Verification lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep statu
35. Output Filter Enable lt K745 number of filters gt Format Extract Output Index Serial Cmd lt K740 output index start location length gt Options 1 to 100 Start Location Serial Cmd lt K740 output index start location length gt Default 0 Options 1 to n maximum number of characters in the symbol data Length Serial Cmd lt K740 output index start location length gt Default 0 Disabled end of format cell array Options 1 to n maximum number of characters in the symbol data Format Insert Output Index Output Index refers to the database entry to be modified with this command A formatted output is built by extracting data from a symbol s original data output and or inserting user defined characters It may be helpful to think of individual indexes as positions in the final formatted output Starting with index 1 enter either an extract or insert command to begin building the required output string Then with the next index number enter either an extract or insert command to continue building the output string Continue this process until the string is complete Serial Cmd lt K741 output index length hex string gt Options 1 to 100 A 4 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Length Specifies the length of the user defined character string that will be inserted This function is limited to 4 characters per output index so multiple indexes must be entered in order to insert lo
36. QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Note the following details with In Read Cycle and Actively Scanning signals 1 They may be very short lived It is possible for the reader to begin and end a read cycle without these signals being seen in active state 2 They are only valid for normal read cycle operation continuous serial and triggered They do not reflect operation during bar code configuration read rate auto calibration or ESP Setup mode Read Cycle Sequence Counter When this value changes it indicates a new read cycle report is present Read cycle report data is only valid when Sequence is not 0 Read cycle reports are only output during normal read cycles continuous serial and triggered Read cycle reports are not output during bar code configuration read rate auto calibration or ESP Setup mode Read Cycle Report Trigger Decode Match Mismatch No Read Count These are the historical read cycle result counters By comparing the values to a previous report the number of decodes mismatches and noreads in the current read cycle can be determined Read Cycle Report Decode Data This string has the same format that would be output a serial port or tcp connection with one difference preamble and postamble are not added QX 830 OUT Assembly 0xC6 198 decimal Command OUT PLC gt QX 830 Size of Data A Field Data Type Type Ele
37. Se Tna O gt D W ep ME Co m r _ HI TL J T ua To Power Supply z q To Power A QX 1 g i I E E Supply psi AR Host or PLC 3 10 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Hardware Installation Multidrop Multidrop networks are used in applications where it is necessary to decode symbols at multiple locations within an industrial process Scanners are placed at stations located between manufacturing steps and data from those scanners is directed to a multidrop concentrator before being sent to a host An example of this type of application is food packaging in which part number data is collected and tracked throughout the packaging process The highlighted areas below demonstrate how a multidrop network can be arranged Ar Power Supply ox 1l QX 1 uira gt Ea i i oxi pnt Ia PL Xt To Power Supply To Power d QX 1 Multidrop Supply Concentrator Host or PLC QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 3 11 Application Examples Ethernet TCP IP and EtherNet IP Ethernet TCP IP is the standard Ethernet interface used to connect multiple locations in a network such as computers in an office network It can also be used to network other communications devices such as scanners and PLCs on a factory floor EtherNet IP is a protocol developed and governed by ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendors Association It is based on the Common Industrial Protocol CIP The CIP layer is an additional l
38. Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 None Options 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd Stop Bits RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 One Options 0 One 1 Two Data Bits RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 1 Eight Options 0 Seven 1 Eight RS 232 B Status RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Baud Rate RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 8 115 2K Options 0 600 1 1200 2 2400 3 4800 4 9600 5 19 2K 6 38 4K 7 57 6K 8 115 2K 9 230K Parity RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 None Options 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd Stop Bits RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 One Options 0 One 1 Two A 24 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Data Bits RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 1 Eight Options 0 Seven 1 Eight RS 422 Status RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Baud Rate RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bit
39. corresponding to the first and last bar of the symbol for most symbologies separated by a colon The scan position values correspond to the configurable Laser On Off position values in the Laser Setup command Example Assume a symbol with the data HELLO is read when its first bar is at 20 of the scan width The width of the symbol is 13 of the scan line The data output would be HELLO SP020 013 assuming that no other outputs or formatting were enabled Symbol Position Output Scan Status Disabled Separator Disabled Enabled Separator This character separates all other symbol information from the Scan Status data field Symbol Position Output Scan Status Disabled Separator oP NUL 50H STX ETX EOT Eng ACK BEL _es HT LE f vT K cR sof si Dle oct De2 DC3j Dca NAK SYN ETB tan Em sue ESC FS GS AS us SP Click Delete to remove characters QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 167 Matchcode Matchcode Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display the tree control tabs 4pp Mode Then click the Matchcode tab to display the Matchcode tree control r Parameters l Communication Read Cycle Symbologies ro Matchcode Diagnostics Parameters ESP Values Mabchcode Makchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Stark Position T Match Length 1
40. gx_I0_big_pt OUT qx_OUT_udt gx_ 0_big_pt OUT usertag 643 Decimal DINT qx_l0_big_pt QUT command TER gx_command __ gx_l0_big_pt OUT command tigger O Decimal BOOL __ gx_ 0_big_pt OUT command new_master 0 Decimal BOOL qx_l0_big_pt OUT command tes2 0 Decimal BOOL qx_l0_big_ptOUT command res3 0 Decimal BOOL qs_0_big_pt 0UT command es4 0 Decimal BOOL qx_l0_big_pt 0UT command res5 0 Decimal BOOL gx_I0_big_pt OUT command res6 0 Decimal BOOL gx_ 0_big_pt OUT command res 0 Decimal BOOL __ gx_I0_big_pt OUT command disable_scan 0 Decimal BOOL X 4 gt Monitor Tags AEditTags 4 Me This confirms that two way communication with QX 830 is successful It is left to the programmer to move or modify the CPS instructions in the Main Program according to the application s requirements Operation of the data fields within the assemblies is described in the object model documentation QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 117 Allen Bradley Version 20 PLC Setup Appendix L Allen Bradley Version 20 PLC Setup e To add a new EDS file to RSLogix 5000 Version 20 select the EDS Hardware Installation Tool from the menu item under Tools A RSlogis 5000 Basic Tester 1756 L61 2 11 Bat ve aa E a Bae a oe 4 aes Wo ew a ga EDS Hardware Installaton Too TT ff 0 1796461 Basic Tester eA 3 17S6 EneT BE e Click the Next button Rockwell Automation s EDS Wizard a x
41. is the same as that achieved by sending the lt Arc gt and lt Arp gt commands consecutively Default on Power On When enabled if the EZ Button is held down on power on the scanner will default to customer defaults and save for power on This is the same as sending a lt Zrc gt command from ESP s Terminal Default On Power on Enabled Disabled Enabled 5 120 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters EZ Button Modes Useful for performing multiple repetitive tasks at the work site Allows the user to program each of the EZ Button s 4 positions from a selection of 8 modes Single Beep Hold down button until a single beep is heard and the 20 LED illuminates EZ Button Enabled Default On Power on Enabled Single Beep Read Rate Two Beeps Disabled Three Beeps Read Rate Four Beeps Calibration Auto Framing Options Laser Framing Bar Code Configuration Disabled When set to Disabled the associated button position will have no function associated with it and the position will be skipped over Read Rate Read Rate is initiated when the associated button position is selected Read Rate will perform decodes second and is the same as sending a lt C gt from ESP s Terminal To exit Read Rate quickly press and release the EZ Button Calibration Calibration is initiated when the associated button position is selected To cancel Calibration quickly press and relea
42. lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Output 2 Parameters lt K811 outout on output state pulse width output mode gt Output 3 Parameters QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual lt K812 output on output state pulse width output mode gt A 19 Serial Commands Matchcode Matchcode lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card sequence on no read sequence on mismatch gt Master Symbol Database Size lt K224 number of master symbols gt New Master Pin lt K225 status gt Sequence Step lt K228 sequence step gt Master Symbol lt K231 index master symbol data gt Match Replace lt K735 status replacement string gt Mismatch Replace lt K736 status replacement string gt Diagnostics l High Temperature Threshold lt K402 status message gt Low Temperature Threshold lt K403 status message gt Counts Read only lt K406 gt returns power on resets power on saves custom default saves Hours Since Reset Read only lt K407 gt returns hours minutes Service Message lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Laser Current Warning Message lt K411 aser high status laser high message laser low status laser low message gt User Defined Name lt K412 user defined name gt Output Format l Format Extract Format Insert lt K740 o
43. 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Separator Character UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default comma Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Supplemental Type UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 0 Both Options 0 Both 1 2 characters only 2 5 characters only A 50 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Format UPC E as UPC A UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge Options 0 Disabled 1 Standard 2 Edge to Edge 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status applic
44. 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length PDF417 Serial Cmd lt K476 status scan line limit fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused decode at end of read cycle gt Default 10 Options 1 to 2710 Decode at End of Read Cycle PDF417 Serial Cmd lt K476 status scan line limit fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused decode at end of read cycle gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 10 Options 1 to 16 A 54 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Minimum Bars Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 4 Options 1 to 16 Bar Width Status Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbo
45. 003 abc 004 sequence on mismatch 004 004 005 005 def 006 sequence on mismatch 006 ghi 007 sequence on mismatch 007 007 008 Consider the following decodes as an example of Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 abc 004 sequenced because of previous match 004 004 005 005 def 006 sequenced because of previous match 006 ghi 006 not sequenced 006 006 007 5 174 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Sequence Step When the master symbol is sequenced incremented decremented Sequence Step defines the magnitude of change Matchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position T Match Length 1 Wild Card Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step i 1 32768 New Master Pin Disabled New Master Pin lf Matchcode and New Master Pin are enabled and the new master pin is momentarily connected to ground must be held low for a minimum of 10 ms master symbol information will be loaded into the database based on the next read cycle that achieves a Good Read starting with Index 1 The Master Database will be loaded with all symbols decoded in the read cycle as long as it does not exceed the Master Symbol Database Size parameter Matchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Positi
46. 100 100 or more decodes No output Fewer than 100 decodes Output fires QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 139 I O Parameters Diagnostics Note Output On under Output 1 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Under Output 1 Parameters expand the Diagnostics tree When Diagnostic Warning is enabled the Output On configuration has no effect The output will remain active as long as one of the diagnostic warning conditions is met The output will become inactive once it detects that there are no diagnostic warning conditions High Temperature Activates output when the temperature exceeds factory defined upper limits Output 1 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Mo Read Output State Mormally Open Pulse width SO Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Mo Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On 0 Decodes per Trigger T Diagnostics High Temperature Disabled Service Unit Disabled Laser Current High Laser Current Lowy Disabled Low Temperature Disabled 5 140 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Service Unit Allows the user to set up the output to toggle to active when the service timer has expired This condition will only be held for one service timer click Note This feature cannot be used if the scanner is in Continuous Read When Service Unit is enabled a message of up to 10 ASCII characters is sen
47. 15 Autoconfiguration Daisy Chain Serial Cmd lt K150DAISY gt A 32 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices ASCII Character Entry Modifier Commands that require ASCII text fields such as Preamble and Postamble commands can be sent to the scanner as hex pairs see Appendix F ASCII Table for conversions Serial Cmd Format lt Knnnh 00 FF gt To enter ASCII fields as hex values 00 to FF add a lower case h directly after the command s K number and then enter the hex value that corresponds with the desired ASCII character Example Serial Cmd lt K142 status postamble character s gt The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs So to make gt the postamble in the symbol decode output enter the Postamble command as follows lt K142h 3E gt Note that the status field contains only a This is because the only field that is being changed is the postamble character s field See Serial Configuration Command Conventions for a more detailed explanation of this command shortcut Protocol Selection Protocol Serial Cmd lt K160 protocol address protocol port gt Options 0 Point to Point 1 Point to Point with RTS CTS 2 Point to Point with XON XOFF 3 Point to Point with RTS CTS and XON XOFF 4 ACK NAK 5 Polling Mode QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 33 Serial Commands Address Serial Cmd Default Options Protocol P
48. 3000 changes to the Master Symbol Database Size will re allocate the number of characters available for each master symbol and could cause existing master symbols to be deleted except master symbol 1 unless it also exceeds the size limitation The table below specifies the maximum number of characters available to each symbol according the number of master symbols defined from 1 to 10 Master Symbol Maximum Number Characters 1 3000 2 1500 3 1000 4 750 5 600 6 500 7 428 8 375 9 333 10 300 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 7 11 Master Database Enter Master Symbol Data Allows the user to enter master symbol data for any enabled master symbol index number 1 to 10 provided the total number of characters does not exceed the maximum allowed Enter data for 1 to 10 master symbols Caution If no data is entered the existing data will be deleted 1 Open the Utilities menu 2 Set the number of master symbols to be created in Master Symbol Database Size 3 Double click on each master symbol number in the table type master symbol data in the popup dialog that appears and click OK 4 When all master symbol data has been entered click the Send Database to the Reader button Master Symbol Database Size i Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index 5 Recenve Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Master Symbol Data Master Symbol 1 Ma
49. 39 large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt lt K471 status start stop match status start stop output status Codabar large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length check character type check character output status gt Interleaved 2 of 5 lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar range mode status gt UPC EAN Code 128 EAN 128 lt K473 mode EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplementals type UPC E as UPC A gt lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Code 93 lt K475 mode fixed symbol length status symbol length gt PDF417 lt K476 status scan line limit fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length decode at end of read cycle gt Pharmacode lt K477 status fixed bar count status fixed bar count minimum bar count bar width mode direction fixed threshold value gt DataBar Omnidirectional RSS 14 lt K482 status gt DataBar Limited RSS Limited lt K483 status gt DataBar Expanded RSS Expanded lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt lt K485 status scan line limit fixed symbol
50. 6 OQUPUCF Orma ha ee cache ee ence E a et ee cence ade anen suet 4 10 Chapter 5 Scanner Parameters COMMUN CANON s iae E 5 2 Read Cyclen a ese a a 5 43 SVIMDOOGICS einna E E E N ee eed ee 5 70 VO Parameters rores r A e eed cto od 5 107 WalCNCOOC cossicdt aioe nti eek N E eed 5 168 Diagnos CS eames oredenc us win een N E E tesa eouaeceenes 5 177 Chapter 6 Terminal Terminal Window cccccccccseeccsccccnccceuceceueeceseeceeessasesueessueesseeessesesseeens 6 2 EA eee waren A meen eater nea etree nan Oe ete mee ET TEE eee eer ae re meee 6 3 NG ERA T PELIE ESEE AET E TEE AEE SEEE AEAEE E te eee acide ae eens eee eee 6 4 VCO S oae a eee ae EAC Ree eee Shee ect We ene Santee tee men nee MER 6 5 Terminal Window Menus ccccecceseeceeeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaneeeaees 6 6 ii Table of Contents Chapter 7 Utilities Serial Utility Commands sc cct ee ee al i A Oia a ah at ods 7 2 FSO AG RAC secs shes os eis saa es ieee ae ative a ticle seein See 7 4 COUMES ceea a el a ee Sea ease 7 6 Device CORIO cssgrnl estes aadceiecos a a agente 7 8 Differences from Defaullt ccccccccccccsseceeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeesseeeeesseeeeseeeeeees 7 9 Master Database lt csacistc tte eee eed eee ee eee 7 10 DigitaliB al C Ode simane ected aed Saeed ees eee 7 16 FIRMWARES eee 1 17 Default Ressel S AVC ceca sect a ea i cas Sees Sot Ea 7 20 Scanner Status REQUCSIS icie c ceo eed ee ade 7 22 Other Serial Utility COMMANAS
51. Both Standard or Edge Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 10 EAN Status Enabled Output Format Standard Application Record Separator Status Disabled Application Record Separator Chara Application Record Brackets Disabled Application Record Padding Disabled Separation Factor Mormal Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled the scanner will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered a valid symbol Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled DO jsabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted This specifies the exact number of characters that the scanner will recognize this does not include start stop and check character characters The scanner ignores any symbol not having the specified length Fixed Symbol Length i 0 1 128 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 73 Symbologies EAN Status When this field is disabled the scanner will not check any Code 128 labels for conformance to EAN requirements or perform any special formatting When enabled the scanner can read symbols with or without a function 1 character in the first position If a symbol has a function 1 character in the first position it must conform to EAN format Symbols that conform to EAN format will also be subject to the sp
52. CR will result in matches for variable symbol lengths such as CR1 CR23 CR358 etc Wild Card Character allows a user to define a wild card character as part of the master symbol Mabchcode Makchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment 5 172 Match Start Position Match Length Wild Card ee J Sequence on Mo Read canal NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENG Hew Master Fin ACK BEL BS HT LF vT FF cR sof sij ea Dc oc peal peal NAK SYN ETB FS as Click Delete to remove characters QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Sequence on No Read Scanner Parameters Sequence on No Read is useful when the scanner needs to stay in sequence even if no decode occurs When Sequence on No Read is Enabled and Matchcode Type is set to Sequential the scanner sequences the master symbol on every match or No Read When disabled it does not sequence on a No Read Matchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position T Match Length 1 Wild Card i Sequence on Mo Read Sequence on Mismatch Mew Master Pin Disabled Enabled Disabled Sequence Step EE Consider the following decodes as an example of Sequence on No Read Enabled Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 No Read 004 sequence on No Read 004 004 005 005 No Read 006 sequence on No Read 006 No Read 007 sequ
53. Command 003 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command 5 19 Communication IP Address Mode Determines how the scanner s IP address will be defined Ethernet IP Address Subnet Gateway IP Address Mode TCP Port 1 Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode TEF Port 2 Symbol Data Gubpuk Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Gutput External Source Processing Mode Static Enabled 192 168 0 100 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 DHCP Enabled Enabled Command OOS Enabled Enabled Enabled Command In Static Mode the scanner uses the user defined IP address entered in ESP DHCP In DHCP Mode the scanner automatically acquires the IP address Subnet and Gateway addresses from a DHCP or BOOTP server 5 20 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters TCP Port 1 One of two TCP ports for Ethernet communication with the scanner The default setting is 2001 Ethernet Enabled IP Address 192 166 0 100 Subnet foo 2c 0 0 hateway 1 0 0 0 IP Address Mode DHCP SE TCF Port 1 2001 1024 65535 Symbol Data Qukput Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Oukput Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command TCP Port 2 OOS Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Oukput Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command Symbol Data Output Enables or disables decoded symbol data outpu
54. Customer Parameter Calibrate without Menu lt gt Calibrate with Menu lt BCCFG gt Enter Bar Code Configuration Other Serial Utility Commands QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 79 Protocol Commands Appendix F Protocol Commands Communication Protocol Command Table Control Characters fancenic displayed on menu Serial coninanay os Value Effect of Command RES D 04 Reset REQ TE 05 Request EOT D 04 Reset STX B 02 Start of Text ETX AC 03 End of Text ACK a 06 Acknowledge NAK AU 15 Negative Acknowledge XON Q 11 Begin Transmission XOFF S 13 Stop Transmission A 80 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual ACK NAK Data Flow Examples Setup 1 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK LRC Transfer 1 HOST TX disabled disabled disabled disabled 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x06 0x15 disabled SS ON lt K141 0 gt SCANNER_TX ACK Transfer 2 HOST TX lt K141 gt SCANNER_TX ACK SCANNER_TX lt K141 0 gt HOST_TX ACK Error Condition Transfer 1 SCANNER_TX symbol data HOST_TX NAK host rejects SCANNER_TX symbol data resend data HOST_TX Transfer 2 HOST _TX ACK transaction complete lt K141 gt SCANNER_TX ACK SCANNER_TX lt K141 0 gt timeout reached timeout reached timeout reached Timeout Reached QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual transaction a
55. DC4 NAK svn ETB can Em Suef ESC FS GS Bau sp esi Click Delete to remove characters 5 52 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Stop Character Non Delimited Useful in applications where different characters are required to end a read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that ends the read cycle and is not enclosed by delimiters such as lt and gt Non delimited Stop characters can be defined and will function according to the trigger event When defining Stop trigger characters the following rules apply e In External Edge the scanner looks only for the Start trigger character and ignores any Stop trigger character that may be defined e In External Level the Start trigger character begins the read cycle and the Stop trigger character ends it Note that even after a symbol has been decoded and the symbol data transmitted the scanner remains in External Level trigger read cycle until a Stop character is received e In Serial Data and Edge trigger mode either a Start trigger character or a hardware trigger can start an edge trigger read cycle Serial Trigger Character Delimited SP Start Character Mon Delirmited 0x00 NUL Stop Character Won Delirmited NUL NUL SOH STX ETx EOT Eng ACK BEL es HT LE f vT FF cn s0 s1 DLE Der Dc2 Dca Dca NAK SYN ETB can Em sue ESC Fs GS Eue Click Delete to remove characte
56. Database Cycles to determine how many times the active indexes will be repeated Use the Switch Timing field to determine the amount of time between active indexes 4 4 QxX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Setup Configuration Database Settings Double clicking an Index will bring up the Configuration Database Settings dialog for that database index Database 1 Eg Lain AGC Mode Tracking 40 0 255 Continuous ad 40 a 5 127 Framing Status Laser Un Position Laser Off Position Disabled i 0 10 30 g5 15 35 Laser Power Background Color Medium Wwhite The settings shown above can be configured differently for every active index Once all active database indexes are configured the index can be concatenated and cycled for the Lancel number of times specified in Number of Database Cycles QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 4 5 Ordered Output Ordered Output Click the Setup button and then the Ordered Output tab to display the Ordered Output view Output filtering is a method of providing a set of good read qualifiers and also providing ordered output There is a filter for up to the first 10 positions in a multisymbol output The first filter corresponds to the first symbol output at the end of the read cycle Each filter has settings for the following six parameters Filter Number Symbology Type Length Wildca
57. Decodes per Trigger command is enabled Output 3 Parameters Gutpuk On Mismatch Output State Normally Open Pulse width S00 Gutput Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On 0 Decodes per Trigger D 0 65535 Example Decodes per Trigger threshold 100 100 or more decodes No output Fewer than 100 decodes Output fires QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 161 I O Parameters Diagnostics Note Output On under Output 3 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Under Output 3 Parameters expand the Diagnostics tree When Diagnostic Warning is enabled the Output On configuration has no effect The output will remain active as long as one of the diagnostic warning conditions is met The output will become inactive once it detects that there are no diagnostic warning conditions High Temperature Activates output when the temperature exceeds factory defined upper limits Output 3 Parameters Gukpuk On Mismatch Gutpuk State Normally Open Pulse Width s Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Ho Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On 0 Decodes per Trigger T Diagnostics High Temperature Disabled Service Unit Disabled Laser Current High Laser Current Low Disabled Low Temperature Disabled 5 162 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Ser
58. E qx_ 0_big_pt IN ext_in eee gx_external_inputs I status of discrete input ae Ungrouped Axes fal qx_JO_big_ptINextout eee _gs_external_oulputs F statu a Add on Instructions E is qx_IO_big_pt IN device_status TE qx_device_status I choase ane CI N and f fm User Defired E gx_10_big_ptIN sequence 3 Decimal DINT A When this changes tigger i J A gx_command fa qx_10_big_pt IN trigger_cnt 3 Decimal DINT on t if qx_device_status m q _10_big_pt IN decode_malch_cnt 3 Decmal DINT Good read match counte a qx_extemal_inputs ta H qx10_big_pt IN mismatch_ent Ol Decimal DINT IH 84 qx_extemal_outputs i H qx_lO_big_pt IN noread_cnt 0 Decimal DINT Nore ter lt t 5 i E qe mE dd lal ee i a a a gk JO_big_ptIN symb_st 123456789012vF000v 0118 tr128 barcode data string iq gx_IN_small_u aE f i qx_10_big_udt O i 9 _10_bia_pt OUT EPER AE SE _ qx _OUT_udt x10 smal udt a 10 bia pt OUT wsertag Decimal DINT a fo identification ond comm ver MA qx OUT udt B qx_l0_big_pt OUT command Te FA qx_command I ings qs_I0_big_pi command tigger ecimal Rising edge starts reading Stri i 10_big_pt OUT d t ofp BOOL qx_I0_big_ptOUT command new_master ecimal Rising edge req next E striZ8 E qx _10_big ptOUT d t O Decimal BOOL Rising edge requests code to ii stret i qx_l0_big_ptOUT command res2 0 Decimal BOOL it STRING E qx_l0_big_ptOUT command tes3 0 D
59. Filter data 123 A This will match 1234AB and 123BAT but not 1234A or 123BATS e Filter data 12 This will match 1234 123456 and 123ABC but not 12 or 123 e Filter data 123 A This will match 1234A 123BA and 123BATS but not 1234 or 12340 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 4 7 Ordered Output Ordered Output Filter Settings Ordered Output Filter Settings Filter 1 Criteria Symbalogy Type Any Type 7 0 Lanen Double clicking on a row in the Ordered Output table brings up the Enter Match String Ordered Output Filter Settings l dialog Matching String Use these settings to determine Symbology Type Length of the ASCII Lookup CF Addto Match Sting Suing ASCII Lookup Wildcard Character and Placeholder Character Click Apply to save the Match Sting Detinables settings to the corresponding filter Wildcard Character i Placeholder Character E ea 4 8 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Setup Rules for Output Filter Configuration Output Filter Configuration Rule 1 Each symbol that is decoded must match one of the filters before it can be saved to a read cycle record There is an exception to this rule however when the number of symbols required for a read cycle exceeds the number of active filters In such a case unfiltered sy
60. Gp User Defined i a mE Strings Delete Del p Add On Defined J a h Predefined CY verify El E Module Defined Cross Reference Cbi E GD Trends 5 6 1 0 Configuration Browse Logic Cl L 1756 Backplane 17 fa 0 1756 161 Ms Print 3 3 1756 ENBT Sy Ethernet Properties Alt Enter f 1756 ENeTSerep ETHERNET MODLILE qx 4 Monitor Tags AEditTags la Ladder Diagram Main lt my Open the selected component or callection A 108 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices 9 Right click on the top rung and select Import Rung f RSLogix 5000 MscanLogix5561 1756 161 File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help alsa S see olf d gelle PIB IQ Offline J RUN cay Path AB_ETHIP 1510 10 5 233 Backplane wf No Forces gt ae a ie i j No Edits BS m0 al HH teat b del o gt ae no D A Favorites Add On K Alarms X Bt K Timericounter KI Controller MscanLogix5561 Controller Tags MscanLogix5561 controller Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler Scope fa MscanLogixS561 gt Show Show All Power Up Handler Tasks El MainProgram MainRoutine SQ MainTask G3 MainProgram Program Tags EA MainRoutine Unscheduled Programs Motion Groups Ungrouped Axes Cut Rung Ctrl x 7 Add On Instructions End Go amp Data Types p User Defined i ea oe Strings i Add On Defined peeta Rung Del Ep Pr
61. Handler m qx_10_bin_ pt 9x_10_big_udt 2 6 Tasks fi gx_IO_big_pt IN gx_IN_big_udt choose one CPS for IN and OUT _sm E f MainTask Ez qx_10_big_pt IN OUT_echo lae qx_OUT_udt echa of OUT assembly back to PLC B amp MainProgram fA gt qx_l0_big_ptIN OUT_echo usertag 0 Decimal DINT helpful for identification and camm veri Eisen Teds B qx_l0_big_ptIN OUT_echo command dies gx_command echa of OUT assembly back to PLC T Fa MainRoutire nee e Unscheduled Programs m Eira 10 big pHIN OU T echo est cout gx_external_oulputs discrete output contral reserved H 6 Motion Groups a qx 10_big_pt IN ext_in qx_external_inputs tatus of discrete inputs i Ungrouped Axes i qx_1O_big_pt IN ext_out oooi ooo qx_external_oulputs tatus of discrete outputs Add On Instructions qx_IO_big_pt IN device_status diecast le qx_device_status choase ane CPS for IN and OUT _sm ji jor tides fined E gs 0_big_pt IN sequence 3 Decimal DINT F When this changes tigger decode T By gi conus E qx_10_big_ptIN trigget_cnt 3 Decimal DINT Trigger counter lt T gt lEt gx_device_status i qx_10_big_pt IN decode_malch_cnt 3 Decmal DINT Good read match counter lt gt Ey MA qr_extemal inputs E gx_IO_big_pt IN miematch_ent o Decimal DINT Mismatch counter lt 3 RY q _extemal_outputs _ E 10_big_ pt INnoread_ent ol Decimal DINT Noread courter lt N 1 i jl ia sper F ax JO big ptIN symb_st 123456789012vF000v
62. Instance 1 Max Recy Delay 11 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 5535 Sent pkts 7012 Connection dosed with Instance 1 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay amp 3 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 164265 Sent pks 208195 Connection dosed with Instance 1 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay 8 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 24216 Sent pkts 30683 Connection dosed with Instance 1 Error Request falled Target Is nat responding Error Request failed Target is nat responding Open Connection Failed for Instance 1 Invalid Segnert Type or Segment Value in Path Connection dosed with Instance 1 Onan Connection Failad Far Tretance 1 Tnvalid Sarment Tuna ce Samant Valiiain Path 2 Set the IP Address to match the QX 830 dd New Device ie S IP Address l Host Mame Cancel QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 125 EIPScan Setup The QX 830 will show up in the main window Ba ElIPScan ElPscan yx viplesti asm1029big cfg File view Request I O Stack Device JO Modue Help Dah Target Network Path 10 10 5 234 Adapter fi 0 10 4 130 m Request fall fields are in hex Predefined None Service hex je Class hex je Instance hex jor Attribute hex Bo Merbeko Symbol Tag Po Request Data Each byte is a 2 cha
63. Interface Standards Interface Standards established by the Electronic Industries Association EIA specify such things as the signaling voltage levels maximum cable lengths and number of drivers In the QX 830 selection of interface is made by pin assignment and in the case of host communication by software switching between RS 232 and RS 422 RS 485 RS 232 RS 232 defines an interface between two devices such as for example the scanner and host It differs from the other interfaces by dedicating individual pins to specific functions and by requiring both devices to share a common ground line Since both device chassis are connected to a common ground a ground loop potential and the possibility of noise interference exists Therefore cable lengths are limited to a maximum of 50 feet 19 7m Despite being the most limited this interface is used frequently because of the large installed base of RS 232 equipment RS 422 RS 485 RS 422 unlike RS 232 measures signals deferentially that is the receiver looks at the potentials between the two receive or transmit wires rather than the potential between signal and ground As a result cables if shielded can be up to 4000 feet 1219m in length Like RS 232 RS 422 communication is designed for only two devices on a single line and must have a common ground It can be used wherever RS 232 is used Ethernet TCP IP and EtherNet IP TCP IP and EtherNet IP protocols are supported over Eth
64. K700 laser on off status laser framing status aser on position laser off position laser power gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Laser On Position Serial Cmd lt K700 aser on off status laser framing status laser on position laser off position laser power gt Default 10 Options 10 to 90 Laser Off Position Serial Cmd lt K700 aser on off status laser framing status laser on position laser off position laser power gt Default 95 Options 15 to 95 Laser Power Serial Cmd lt K700 aser on off status laser framing status laser on position laser off position laser power gt Default 1 Medium Options 0 Low 1 Medium 2 High QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 41 Serial Commands Configuration Database Number of Active Indexes lt K252 number of active indexes number of database cycles gt lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking unused unused unused framing Configuration Database Status laser on position laser off position laser power background color gt Switch Timing lt K254 switch mode time gt Number of Active Indexes Number of Active Indexes Serial Cmd lt K252 number of active indexes number of database cycles gt Default 0 Disabled Options O to 10 Number of Database Cycles Serial Cmd lt K252 number of active indexes number of database cycles gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 to 255 Configuration Database Index Serial Cmd lt K2
65. Last Frame Last Frame or Mew Trigger Timeout Typically used with Continuous Read 1 Output and Serial Data and Edge It is effective in highly controlled applications when the maximum length of time between objects can be predicted It assures that a read cycle ends before the next symbol appears giving the system extra time to decode and transmit the data to the host Timeout ends the read cycle causing the scanner to stop reading symbols and send the symbol data or No Read message when the time set in Timeout elapses times out if When to Output Symbol Data is set to End of Read Cycle If in Continuous Read 1 Output a timeout initiates a new read cycle and allows the same symbol to be read again With External Edge Serial Data or Serial Data and Edge enabled a timeout ends the read cycle and symbol data or a No Read message is sent to the host With External Level enabled the read cycle does not end until the falling edge trigger occurs or a timeout occurs The next read cycle does not begin until the next rising edge trigger QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 55 Read Cycle New Trigger New Trigger is an effective way to end a read cycle when objects move past the scanner at irregular intervals not timing dependent New Trigger ends the current read cycle and initiates a new one when a new trigger occurs New Trigger refers only to a rising edge trigger With External Edge Serial Data or Serial Data a
66. OO OO 00 00 00 00 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 32 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0O 00 00 00 O00 00 00 Noread 12 13 50 983 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recv 12 16 15 33 Connection closed with Instance 1 12 49 11 174 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recv Delay 83 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec R 13 58 38 950 Connection closed with Instance 1 14 02 38 790 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recv Delay 8 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rey API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 24216 Sent pkts 30683 14 12 56 270 Connection closed with Instance 1 14 22 18 610 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recv Delay 102 msec Max Send Delay 6 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 119098 Sent pkts 150917 12 13 31 755 Error Request failed Target is not responding 12 13 41 750 Error Request failed Target is not responding 15 20 39 187 Open Connection failed for Instance 1 Invalid Segment Type or Segment Value in Path 18 29 45 53A Connection rinsed with Instance 1 1 Classi connections active Max Recv Delay 102 msec Max Send Delay 6 msec Max Recy API 25 35 Max Send API 20 01 Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 5535 Sent pkts 7012 Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 164265 Sent pkts 208135 A 130 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Appendix N
67. OUT Dest gx Length 1 H E Strings ig striza i strag 1 Ds ind STRING x al gt MainRoutine MainProgram a gt MonitorTags Edit Tags 4 lof Rung 1 of 2 APP per ja QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices 19 To open the Program Tags right click on Program Tags and select Monitor Tags fa RSLuyix 5000 MsvanLuvix3561 1756 161 File Edit Yew Search Logic Communications Tools Window Hep alsel a tele olf z Adie lt v alal bnan BL Eos ERIE hs o A icra Ta Contioller OK Battery OK srp er No Edite a al SIL Redundancy iD ee j l gt fi Favorites Controller MscanLagix5561 Controller Tags Controller Fauk Handler Pawer Up Handler 3 8 Tasks fa MainTask B E MainProgram BA MainRoutine A NewTag Ctrl w Unscheduled Progra amp Motion Groups Monkor Tags Cue Controller Tags MscanLogix5561 controller DEAR Scope fa MscanLogivs561 X Show Show 4ill Alias Far ABETHERNET MODULE CO AB ETHERNET_MODULE_DINT_176Bytes L0 AB ETHERNET_MODULE_DINT_12Bytes 0 0 Ungrouped Axes Edit Tags Add On Instructions verify amp Data Types Si User Defined Expart Tags E qx_command 5 E qx_device Print li q _extemal_inpit E qx_extemal_outputs 1 qx_IN_big_udt Ls te qx_IN_small_udt A qx_1O_big_udt gx_IO_small_udt A qx_OUT_udt i Strings E strize i stre4
68. Parameter Menu The user then selects B to configure the Fixed Symbol Length Status parameter CODE 128 S S S 353555555 5555555555 A Code 128 Status DISABLE B Fixed Symbol Length Status DISABLE C Symbol Length 10 D EAN 128 Status DISABLE E Output Format Standard F Application Record Separator Status DISABLE G Application Record Separator Character H Application Record Brackets DISABLE I Application Record Padding DISABLE PLEASE PRESS A I TO EDIT 1 MAIN MENU 2 PREVIOUS MENU ESC TO EXIT Parameter Options Menu At this level the current setting and system default are both shown The user can select the desired option and go back to the previous menu or press Enter or ESC to return to the previous menu without any change to the parameter Fixed Symbol Length Status A DISABLE CURRENT DEFAULT B ENABLE PLEASE PRESS A B TO CHANGE THE PARAMENTER ESC TO CANCEL Another example of a Parameter Options level menu is the Symbol Length shown below In this menu the user is prompted to enter a desired value in a range from 1 to 128 and the menu shows a system default of 10 After a desired value has been entered the user must press Enter to confirm that the value is valid and return to the previous menu or press ESC to return to the previous menu without any change to the parameter The user could also return to the previous menu by pr
69. RES Terminate Transfer 1 The protocol makes 3 retry attempts before data is flushed and transfer is aborted A 88 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Appendix G ASCII Table Dec Hex Mne Dec Hex Ch Dec Hex Ch Dec Hex Ch 00 00 NUL 64 40 96 60 01 01 SOH 65 41 A 97 61 a 02 02 STX 66 42 B 98 62 b 03 03 ETX 67 43 C 99 63 C 04 04 EOT 68 44 D 100 64 d 05 05 ENQ 69 45 E 101 65 e 06 06 ACK 70 46 F 102 66 f 07 07 BEL 71 47 G 103 67 g 08 08 BS 72 48 H 104 68 h 09 09 HT 105 69 i 10 OA LF J 106 6A j 11 0B VT K 107 6B k 12 OC FF L 108 6C 13 OD CR M 109 6D m 14 OE SO N 110 6E n 15 OF SI O 111 6F O 16 10 DLE 0 P 112 70 p 17 11 DC1 1 Q 113 71 q 18 12 DC2 2 R 114 72 r 19 13 DC3 3 S 115 13 S 20 14 DC4 4 T 116 14 t 21 15 NAK 5 U 117 15 u 22 16 SYN 6 V 118 76 V 23 17 ETB T W 119 TT W 24 18 CAN 8 X 120 78 X 25 19 EM 9 yY 121 19 y 26 1A SUB Z 122 TA Z 27 1B ESC 123 7B 28 1C FS 124 TC 29 1D GS 125 7D 30 1E RS 4 126 TE 31 1F US 127 TF D QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 89 Configuring Ethernet TCP IP Appendix H Configuring Ethernet TCP IP When using Ethernet to depl
70. Rate Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode R5422 Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode Ethernet IP Address Subnet Gateway IP Address Mode TCP Port 1 Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode TCP Port 2 Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode EtherNet IP Protocol Selection External Data Routing Array Communication Modes Preamble Postamble ESP Values 115 2K None One Eight Enabled Enabled Enabled Command Enabled 115 2K None One Eight Enabled Enabled Enabled Command Disabled 115 2K None One Eight Disabled Disabled Disabled Command Enabled 192 168 0 100 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 DHCP 2001 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command 2003 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command Enabled Point to Point Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled RS 232 A RS 232 B and RS 422 are serial RS 232 A is always enabled RS 232 B and RS 422 can be enabled or disabled to match the physical requirements of the application Ethernet can also be enabled or disabled as required RS 232 A RS 232 B and RS 422 can be configured for Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol
71. Read Message lt K714 status message gt Bad Symbol Message lt K715 status message gt No Symbol Message Input 1 lt K716 status message gt lt K730 input mode active state gt Green Flash LED lt K750 green flash mode unused green flash duration gt Status Indicators lt K751 status bar graph l O 1 1 O 2 gt Symbol Position Output lt K758 scan status separator gt Database Identifier Output lt K759 status separator character gt EZ Button EZ Button Modes Auto Framing Options Trend Analysis Output 1 lt K770 status default on power on gt lt K771 single beep two beeps three beeps four beeps gt lt K773 laser framing gt lt K780 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on decodes per trigger gt Trend Analysis Output 2 lt K781 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on decodes per trigger gt Trend Analysis Output 3 lt K782 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on decodes per trigger gt Diagnostics Output 1 lt K790 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Diagnostics Output 2 lt K791 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Diagnostics Output 3 lt K792 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Output 1 Parameters
72. Secondary Secondary Scanner Scanner Scanner S S S Host Send the lt K150DAISY gt command from ESP s Terminal If necessary set the primary scanner to External Edge After Autoconfigure the primary scanner can be set to External Edge E but the other scanners must remain in Serial S Primary Secondary Secondary Scanner Scanner Scanner E S S Host Important If the scanner is Ethernet enabled first check to determine if RS 232 B is available If it is available set RS 232 B as the Source port in Array Communication Modes Otherwise set RS 232 A as the Source port Port Routing for Symbol Data Output and Extra Symbol Information will be disabled on the Source port QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Preamble Scanner Parameters Useful for identifying and controlling incoming data For example defining the preamble as a carriage return and a line feed causes each decoded message to be displayed on its own line Preamble Disabled Preamble Characters CR Preamble Characters Allows the user to define up to four postamble characters that can be added to the end of the decoded data Preamble Disabled Preamble Characters C SOH Tx ETX EOT Ena Ack BEL B5 HT _LF vT FF CR 50 si DLE oct pc2 De3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB Can EM SUB ESC FS GS AS
73. Segnert Type or Segment Value in Path lt 15 70 4 amp S53A 9 Connection dosed with Instance 1 1 Class1 connections active Max Recv Delay 32 msec Max Send Delay 6 msec Max Recy API 25 35 Max Send API 20 01 All bytes in the green OUT area will be echoed back in the blue IN area at the same location relative to the beginning of the assemblies Each byte and bit has a unique purpose Please consult the object model for a description Note that all data is displayed in little endian order RBZ EIPScan ElPscan qx eiptest1 asm1025big cfg File View Request IJO Stack Device IO Module Help Og ElPScan Test Tool B Host 10 10 4 130 Connection Instance 1 RPIs et g PPPPPPREEFEE PEPE Target Network Path 10 10 5 234 Adapter 10 10 4 130 Request all fields are in hex Predefined None X Service hex e Classthex 4 Instance hex 301 Attibute hex 3 Member hen SymbolTa9 Request Data Each byte is a 2 char hex value separated by a space ie Oa 26 f9 ine Response Response Size decimal 260 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 a 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ge enon ees Oy 0 See eiaa 10 10 5 234 Output control Device status Trigger count Sequence 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO OO 01 OO OO OO 01 00 OO OO 01 OO OO OO
74. Select All text in the Terminal window Select All e Save brings up a Save As dialog Save e Change Font of text in Terminal brings up a Font dialog e Change Echo Font to change typed text brings up a Font Change Font dialog Change Echo Font e Enable Echo enables Echo text typed by user Enable Echo e Change Background Color of Terminal window e Non Printable Characters allows the user to hide non printable b S aoi a characters or to show them in Standard or Enhanced format e Default Settings returns all the above settings to default e Keyboard Macros allows the user to create new keyboard macro commands that can be sent from function keys F2 F4 F5 etc Mon Printable Charackers Default Settings keyboard Macros Terminal Dropdown Menu The dropdown Terminal menu has Capture Text Save Current Text Send File Find Next and Find Previous functions as well as the same functions defined above Terminal Capture Text e Capture Text allows the user to append data in real time to a text file While in operation the text file Save Current Text cannot be opened Pause interrupts the capture flow and Stop ends the flow and opens the file Change Font e Save Current Text saves all text in the Terminal Change Echo Font window to a text file Disable Echa e Find Next searches for a user defined section of text in the Terminal Find Previous operates in the same way as Find
75. Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 164265 Sent pkts 208195 15 20 39 187 Open Connection Falled for Instance 1 Invalid Segment Type or Segment Value In Path 15 21 34 567 Open Connection Failed for Instance 1 Invalid Segnerk Type or Segment Value in Path QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices 4 When the Add Class1 Connection dialog appears select Data Size 5 Populate Originator gt Target OUT with 12 and Target gt Originator Big IN with 176 hdd Classi Connection Type Data Size Rate Trigger Destination Priority Cont e Originator gt T arget Data Size 12 W Aunldle Header T arget gt Originator Data Size 174 Rundle Header Cancel Alternately Target gt Originator could be set to 84 for the Small IN assembly 6 Select Rate and set packet rate to 20 milliseconds in both directions hdd Classi Connection Packet Rate in milliseconds Originator Target Target Originator Originator Target Target Originator QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 127 EIPScan Setup 7 Select Destination 8 Populate Originator gt Target OUT with 198 and Target gt Originator Big IN with 101 hdd Class Connection Type Data Size Rate Trigger Destination Priority Cont H Configuration Connection Instance fi Originator gt Target Specify Connection Point or Tag Connection Connection Paint 136
76. Sequential or if Trigger is set to Continuous Read 1 Output the scanner will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration Multisymbal Number af Symbols 1 Multisymbol Separator i Number of Symbols Number of Symbols is the number of different symbols that can be read in a single read cycle Multisymbal Number of Symbols 1 100 Multisymbol Separator i Multisymbol Separator Multisymbol Separator is used to delimit or separate data fields with a user defined character The Multisymbol Separator can be any valid ASCII character inserted between each symbol read when Number of Symbols is set to any number greater than 1 Multisymbol Number of Symbols Multisymbol Separator DC3 DC4 Nak SYN ETB CAN EM SUB Esc _F5 Gs AS us sP Click Delete to remove characters QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 45 Read Cycle Trigger The Trigger is the event that initiates a read cycle Note When calibrating the scanner or testing read rate the current trigger setting will be disregarded Trigger Mode Continuous Read Trigger Filter Duration Leading Edge 313 Trailing Edge 313 External Trigger State Active Closed Trigger Mode Continuous Read Continuous Read is useful in testing symbol readability or scanner functions It is not recommended for normal operations In Continuous Read
77. Setup Gain Level 40 Tracking 40 Scan Speed 50 Automatic Gain Control 467 AGC Sampling Mode Continuous AGC Minimum T AGC Maximum 259 Symbol Detect Status Disabled Transition Counter Maximum Element Scan Width Enhance mo a 6 255 400 Disabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 63 Read Cycle Maximum Element Maximum Element is the maximum bar element size before a reset Value is in increments of 0 01 of the scanner s full scan width not increments of the framed scan width Reader Setup Gain Level 40 Tracking 40 Scan Speed 50 Automatic Gain Control AGC AGC Sampling Mode Continuous AGC Minimum T AGC Maximum 255 Symbol Detect Status Disabled Transition Counter 14 Maximum Element 400 AO 5000 x 0 012 of scan Scan Width Enhance Disabled Scan Width Enhance The scanner can adjust for Gain differences across the entire scan width This is a useful feature for long symbols that use most of the scan width available Note This command is intended for applications in which symbols are three inches or more from the scanner Reader Setup Gain Level 40 Tracking 40 Scan Speed 50 Automatic Sain Control 467 AGC Sampling Mode Continuous AGC Minimum T AGC Maximum 255 Symbol Detect Status Disabled Transition Counter 14 Maximum Element 400 Scan Width Enhance Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled The scanner will not adjust for scan width var
78. Single Range Status Request This request will return the value range and storage type description of all fields in the requested K command lt Knnnd gt Default Customer Parameter This request will default a single K command if the command has customer defined parameters rather than factory defined parameters 7 22 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Utilities Other Serial Utility Commands Calibration without Menu Sending the lt CAL gt command from ESP s Terminal initiates auto calibration without entering the auto calibration menu The calibrated parameters are determined by the settings of the Calibration Options command Calibration with Menu Sending the lt gt command from ESP s Terminal enters the auto calibration menu The initial state of the menu is determined by the settings of the Calibration Options command a eS ie CE e 0 1 CONFIGURATION INCR DECR Motor Speed M WN Cokie F AGC Mode 5 LEADING EDGE Laser Power L MED 16 17 Motor Speed U YES Laser Power I NO Rate Motor Gain Track Value Read Rate p4 500 500 57 45 99 100 20 MIL When the Auto Calibration menu is entered or when calibration is beginning all NOVRAM settings that will be calibrated manipulated during the calibration process or configured by the calibration menu are saved to an initial settings buffer e AGC Mode e Gain e Tracking e Motor Speed e Laser On
79. Tag Target gt Oniginator Specify Connection Point or Tag Connection 1m Connection rT Paint Tag Alternately Target gt Originator could be set to 100 for the Small IN assembly 9 Click OK and the IO data windows will appear in the main area 10 In the I O menu select Run mode so that there is a check mark next to it Elzan EPen gs mplrmli anil robe ci be s Fed Dusia Targi Ceriana Busby trot Pat fE a setae I i cymr ad Seth are bee beate e ame ff karepe 0 a ElPScmn Tart Teo Piesi 1 140 Connection inptaace LPs SS 20 Gydic ee oy ee Cree W105 24 Meska haa miary Panra Daa Each iben caich hr yi reei by a ame joe la 26ra MM 0 hh OO Om MW Ob Go E Oo oD oo oo on 01l OF a J0 gl Go w oo oO Go Or wa Oo Ob oo MOG dc Oo Goo Ji 22 I J 32 36 FF Jd 38 30 24 J 0J OO Ob OD oo d D 02 w c oo oo gt 00 oo b oe DDH Don Do Da oe MMe Mo tno em Wo eo ono eo oon eo gi O ee on oo p0 oo oo oo p COC S00 OOOO ed oe 900 00 Wd w 00 00 00 Wd OO 00 b W d 08 OD 0 g w d d di eo d Oo Oo on oo w 5 Mh 00 po w Oo 00 00 Bo Oo On po w on oO Oo Daa ETI Tarkin prai AiE Lorca d Ha fy Cease J1 rene Paa Saree Dabry lrer Ae AR 2 et ri PT 2d me Fv pi SE Sak piia PZ Pee vac donen heed path rie LEILA Conner ugenied val b beater Bae Pee Geb Bl pee le Soret Derery peered eee ord PD L ee Bed pis EAC er hs SS OMH Coren cee th irea ie Sa Cacere
80. Three Beeps Hold down button until three quick beeps are heard and the 20 40 and 60 LEDs illuminate EZ Button Enabled Default On Power on Enabled Single Beep Read Rate Two Beeps Calibration e Save for Power on Four Beeps j Auto Framing Options Laser Framing Calibration Save for Power on Bar Code Configuration Disabled When set to Disabled the associated button position will have no function associated with it and the position will be skipped over Read Rate Read Rate is initiated when the associated button position is selected Read Rate will perform decodes second and is the same as sending a lt C gt from ESP s Terminal To exit Read Rate quickly press and release the EZ Button Calibration Calibration is initiated when the associated button position is selected To cancel Calibration quickly press and release the EZ Button Save for Power On All scanner settings will be saved to non volatile memory to be recalled on power on whenever the associated button position is selected This is the same as sending a lt Z gt from ESP s Terminal Auto Framing Auto Framing is initiated when this button position is selected To cancel Auto Framing quickly press and release the EZ Button Load New Master Functions in the same way as New Master Pin input whenever the associated button position is selected Sleep Mode When Sleep Mode is selected the scanner will shut the motor and laser
81. To end a Read Rate test click the Stop Read Rate information is displayed in button the Start button becomes a Stop the lower portion of the Utilities view button during an active Read Rate test Serial commands can also be sent to the scanner from this screen For Help press F1 ONNESTEON Point to Point COMI Important When Read Rate is enabled the Configuration Database is not active regardless of how the scanner is configured 7 4 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Utilities Read Rate Serial Utility Commands Enter Decodes Second Test Sending lt C gt instructs the scanner to transmit the decodes per second and symbol data if any The decode rate can vary dramatically due to the angle and location of the symbol in relation to the field of view This test is very useful in aligning and positioning the scanner during setup Enter Decode Percent Test Sending lt Cp gt instructs the scanner to transmit the percentage of decodes and any decoded symbol data End Decodes Second and Decode Percent Tests sending lt J gt ends both the Percent test and the Decodes Second test PDF417 Information Sending lt a1 gt causes PDF417 data that is decoded in a triggered read cycle to be prefaced with information about the symbol s level of error correction error correction level n number of rows n rows number of columns n columns number of informative code words n code words and nu
82. U32 1 Read cycle report Noread count lt N gt Read cycle report Decoded Data 11 STRING 32 U32 U8 128 UP to 128 8 bit chars The first U32 is the length of the bar code data in the U8 128 field Total 176 U8 or 44 U32 This contains more status information and a longer bar code string than the Small IN Assembly 0x64 This gives the PLC visibility of the device s discrete io current operational status and read cycle counters QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 95 Using EtherNet IP User Defined Tag Echo Command Echo Output Control Echo These are a direct echo of the equivalent fields in the OUT assembly They provide the PLC programmer with a method of verifying that the OUT data has been received by QX 830 External Input Status Physical Pin State Bit Pin Name 0 Trigger 1 New Master 2 31 Reserved O no current sensed on input 1 current sensed on input External Output Status Physical Pin State Bit Pin Name 0 Out 1 2 Out2 Out3 3 31 Reserved 0 output contact is open 1 output contact is closed Device Status Field Bit Name State 0 Reserved 1 Lea 1 New Master Requested 2 Reserved 8 Scanning Disabled 1 Scanning Disabled 9 15 Reserved 16 iln Read Cycle 1 In Read Cycle 17 Actively Scanning 1 Active Scanning A 96
83. Wild Card i Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step 1 Hew Master Pin Disabled Match Replace Disabled Replacement String MATCH The indicates Se Mismatch Replace Disabled ka ot te Seting is the default Replacement String pe To open nested options To change a setting double click single click the the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options Note Matchcode settings can also be sent to the scanner from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format Refer to the Matchcode section of Appendix E 5 168 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Overview of Matchcode Matchcode allows the user to store master symbol data in the scanner s memory compare that data against other symbol data and define how symbol data and or discrete signal output will be directed A master symbol database can be set up for up to 10 master symbols Note Matchcode will function with multiple symbols however if Matchcode Type is set to Sequential or if Trigger Mode is set to Continuous Read 1 Output the scanner will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration Matchcode is used in applications to sort route or verify data based on matching the specific symbol in a variety of ways as defined in this section For example a manufacturer might sort a product based on dates that are embedded in the symbol Step
84. algorithm has a higher tolerance for leading edge noise and is particularly useful for high density symbols This setting is the Default because it overcomes many symbol quality issues such as printing and placement inconsistencies QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 97 Symbologies Symbology Identifier Symbology Identifier is a standard prefix set of characters that identifies the symbol type When enabled the scanner analyzes and identifies the symbology and adds a three character identifying prefix to the data e closed bracket character indicating the presence of a symbology identifier e A C E F G I L e orp e A Code 39 C Code 128 E UPC EAN F Codabar G Code 93 Interleaved 2 of 5 L PDF417 and MicroPDF417 e GS1 DataBar RSS p Pharmacode e Modifier Example C indicates a Code 128 symbol Symbalogy Identifier Disabled Disabled Enabled AlM ID Enabled Readable ID Disabled When set to Disabled symbol data output does not contain Symbology Identifier information Enabled AIM ID When set to Enabled AIM ID symbol data output contains a three character AIM Symbology Identifier sequence Enabled Readable ID When set to Enabled Readable ID symbol data output contains a human readable description of the decoded symbology Examples JCODE39 CODE128 JUPCA JUPCEAN13 5 98 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Expla
85. an EAN conforming symbol is decoded and EAN formatting applies this feature places bracket characters around the application identifiers in the formatted output Application Record Brackets Disabled Disabled Enabled Application Record Padding This feature causes the scanner to pad variable length application fields with leading zeroes This is not done for the last field of a symbol Application Record Padding Disabled D i 2g b E d x Enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 75 Symbologies Separation Factor Separation Factor Normal Normal High Highest Normal No limits are placed on bar ratio accuracy High The scanner will enforce a higher level of accuracy on bar ratios If the symbol falls outside this limit it will be rejected Highest The scanner will enforce the highest level of accuracy on bar ratios If the symbol falls outside this limit it will be rejected 5 76 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Interleaved 2 of 5 Interleaved 2 of 5 has been popular because it is the most dense symbology for printing numeric characters less than 10 characters in length however Microscan does not recommend this symbology for any new applications because of inherent problems such as symbol truncation A dense contimuous self checking numeric symbology Characters are paired together so that each character has five elements two
86. and all those source ports data is transmitted to the destination port and from the destination port to the source port 5 6 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters RS 232 B The following settings define the basic transmission speeds and digital standards that ensure common RS 232 formatting R5232 B Enabled Baud Rate 115 2K Parity Hone Stop Bits One Data Bits Eight Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Qutput Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command Baud Rate Can be used to transfer data faster or to match host port settings The rate at which the scanner and host transfer data back and forth Baud Rate 115 2K Parity Only changed if necessary to match host setting An error detection routine in which one data bit per character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of bits in the data field is either even or odd Hone Mone Even Odd Stop Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Stop Bits Une ne QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 7 Communication Data Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Eight Seven Eight Data Bits Symbol Data Output Enables o
87. application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Application Record Separator Character Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default Comma Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Application Record Brackets Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Application Record Padding Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 52 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Separation Factor Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length stat
88. connection results be sure that no decodable symbols are within the scanner s field of view while attempting to connect QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 1 7 Connect cont Step 6 Connect cont Ethernet TCP IP Once the QX 830 is connected incoming symbol data can be displayed in the Terminal as shown below ESP ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect View Terminal Help SF ar 9 yj 3 EZ Mode Autoconnect Send Recy Switch Model Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities 9 h Bd Find z Send 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 Next Row Master Request Counter Clear Counter Request Next Decode New Master Auto Daisy Chain Auto Discriminate Send Trigger Character Enable Serial Trigger For Help press F1 ea 62 148 88 51 TCP 1 8 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Quick Start Step 7 Test Read Rate Read
89. created Insert up to 250 characters to describe this model Type model epecific information here Options Preferences Document Memo iirc emo Type model specific information here Note Memos must be saved in a esp file to make them available in the next session If the current session is not saved any memos that have been entered during the session will be discarded and will be unavailable in the next session QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 2 11 Menu Toolbar Connect The Connect dropdown menu allows the user to access the Connection Wizard as well as the Autoconnect and Configure Multidrop dialogs Connect and Disconnect can also be performed directly from the dropdown menu without opening a dialog Connect Connection Wizard Auroconnecek Connect Disconnect Configure Multidrop Connection Wizard To connect using the Connection Wizard e Click Connect on ESP s menu toolbar and then select Connection Wizard e Select RS 232 or Ethernet to activate the appropriate display e Configure RS 232 or Ethernet settings as required by the application and click Connect Baud 115 2K z IP Address 162 148 88 51 Parity Non Stop Bits One m Data Bits Eight z Port com xl F Aux Port In Use e RS 232 t RS 232 Ethemet TCP Port 1 2001 Ethernet Click the Search button to locate __Seach fl scanners on the network l Force Connect
90. date time and time zone for your computer Change the appearance of your desktop such as the background screen saver colors Font sizes and screen resolution Customize the display of files and folders change file associations and make network files available offline Add change and manage Fonts on your computer Add remove and configure game controller hardware such as joysticks and gamepads Configure your Internet display and connection settings Customize your keyboard settings such as the cursor blink rate and the character repeat rate Microsoft Office Outlook Profiles Customize your mouse settings such as the button configuration double click speed mouse pointers and motion speed Specify the CD DYD burn rights For the Nero Family of products Connects to other computers networks and the Internet Configure your NYIDI4 nview Desktop Manager settings Configure your telephone dialing rules and modem settings Configure energy saving settings for your computer Shows installed printers and Fax printers and helps you add new ones Customize settings for the display of languages numbers times and dates Add remove and configure scanners and cameras Schedule computer tasks to run automatically View your current security status and access important settings SoundMA4 Control Panel Change the sound scheme for your computer or configure the settings for your speakers and recording devices Change settings for te
91. end OUT _stmall_pt or _big_pt Synchronous Copy File Source gxil Dest gx JO_big_pt in Length Rung 1 of 2 APP VER 18 Once the program has downloaded make sure the PLC is in Run Mode fo RSLupix 5000 MscanLuvix3561 1756 161 File Edit Yew Search Logic Cammunicatiors Tools Window Hep else 6 ielelolo l ldlalle oisl lal Fomfun Puntos Fale Enesa a No Forces Go Offline oem unload 4 Hfj a4 4 of wo gt Redundancy Download w 2b A Fworitoe Adta Bit TimeriCounter I Controller Program Mode Ra Controller Tags MscanLogix5561 controller i Contr Run Mode Contr 2 Unscheduled Progra Motion Groups _ 00 Ungrouped Axes Add On Instructions Data Types User Defined E gx_command i Ei qs _devi _status 8 qs_extemal_inputs M9 gx_extemal_outputs E qx_IN_big_udt A gs_IN_small_udt K gx_1O_big_udt A qx_10_small_udt KA qx_OUT_udt Ub Change cantraller mode to Remote Run A 114 a i n Mainha Pawe Test Mode i a MainProgram MainRoutine E E Tasks Clear Faults AIRA IEE e aje x tv x s wit Samant SHE sf saele neal ni salsa YI id ool B amp M GoTo Faults i i eee choose one CPS for Contraler Properties IN and OUT _small_pt or _big_pt Synchronous Copy File Source gel Dest gx JO_big_pt in Length 1 PS Synchronous Copy File Source gx_lO_big_pt
92. end product to measure for these substances The information provided in this certification notice is correct to the best of Microscan s knowledge at the date of publication This notice is not to be considered a warranty or quality specification Users are responsible for determining the applicability of any ROHS legislation or regulations based on their individual use of the product In regards to ROHS Directive 2011_65 EU Microscan produces Monitoring and Control Instruments as well as Industrial Monitoring amp Control Instruments as defined within the directive Microscan has developed and is implementing a ROHS2 compliance plan with the intention of bringing all active products listed in our current marketing literature within full compliance as per the directive deadlines Key milestones for the transition plan are as follows e Complete internal product audit by July 2014 e Initial Monitoring and Control Instruments ROHS2 compliant products available by December 2014 e Initial Industrial Monitoring amp Control Instruments ROHS2 compliant products available by July 2015 e All new products introduced in 2015 are expected to be WEEE amp RoHS2 compliant Microscan will mark the products with the CE marking that complies with the ROHS2 process to acquire CE certification per the example given Example gt gt Machinery directive EMC directive ROHS2 Declaration of Conformity X QX 830 Compact Industria
93. end the read cycle The read cycle ends with a good read output or depending on the End of Read Cycle Mode setting a timeout or new trigger occurs 5 48 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Serial Data Serial Data is effective in a highly controlled environment where the host knows precisely when the object is in the field of view It is also useful in determining if a No Read has occurred In Serial Data the scanner accepts an ASCII character from the host or controlling device as a trigger to start a read cycle A Serial Data trigger behaves the same as an External Edge trigger Serial commands are entered inside angle brackets as shown here lt n gt Note In Serial Data sending a non delimited start serial character will start a read cycle however a non delimited stop serial character has no effect Serial Data and Edge Serial Data and Edge is seldom used but can be useful in an application that primarily uses an external sensing device but occasionally needs to be triggered manually An auxiliary terminal can be connected to the auxiliary port so the user can send the serial trigger character through the scanner to the host In this mode the scanner accepts either a serial ASCII character or an external trigger pulse to start the read cycle Note In Serial Data sending a non delimited start serial character will start a read cycle however a non delimited stop serial character has no effec
94. has limited or no connectivity 6 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog will appear Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address Select Use the following IP address to set the IP Address Subnet and Gateway 192 168 0 Subnet mask 255 i 255 0 0 Default gateway Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Altemate DNS server QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 15 Communication Ethernet Status Enables or disables Ethernet connectivity in the scanner Ethernet Enabled IF Address 192 1668 0 100 Subnet oo Zoe 0 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 IP Address Mode DHCP TLF Port 1 001 Symbol Data Qukput Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Oukput Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command TLP Port 2 2003 Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Oukput Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command 5 16 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual IP Address Enter the IP address of the scanner in this field Ethernet IP Address Subnet atewiay IP Address Mode TEF Port
95. ie nat racnandina Appendices and displays the content of the IN blue and OUT green EX ElPScan Test Tool gt Host 10 10 4 130 Connection Instance 1 RPls 20 20 Cyclic PEPRRRRRRERERRERE ceccoccececeaececedEe 10 10 5 234 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recv Delay 11 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rcv API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 5535 Sent pkts 7012 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recv Delay 7 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 30 msec Sent API 20 00 msec Revd pkts 278 Sent pkts 352 1 Class1 connections active Max Recy Delay 7 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Max Recv API 25 30 Max Send API 20 00 The order of data displayed in each assembly block corresponds to the object model documentation For a quick test we can simulate the PLC setting the User Tag with the QX 830 echoing it back 11 Click on the first byte User Tag in the green area OUT im EIPScan ElPscan yx viplest asn1025big cly File View Request I O Stack Device JO Modue Help Dad Target Network Path 10 10 5 234 10 10 4 130 Request all fields are in hex Predefined Adapter None v Service hex e Class hex js Instance hex 1301 Attribute hex 3 Member hex Request Data Each byte is a 2 char hex value sepaiated by a space i e 0a 26 f9 Symbol Tag Response Response Size decimal 260 og oa oa oa oo oo oo oo ao ao ao D1 00 0000 D1 00 00
96. may be passing CAUTION LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT 655nm 1 75mW 40 186uS DANGER Invisible Laser Radiation when open and interlock defeated AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM vi QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Introduction Warning and Caution Summary cont ANAO DE DAON 0 nt LASER RADIATION IS EMITTED FROM THIS APERTURE CAUTION CLASS 2 LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040 10 AND 1040 11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO 50 DATED JUNE 24 2007 e Wavelength 655 nm e Beam Divergence 0 4mrad typ e Pulse Duration 40 186us e Maximum Power 1 75mW e Location of the QX 830 s laser aperture __ Laser Aperture AVOID EXPOSURE Laser Radiation is emitted from this aperture CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure IMPORTANT The QX 830 is intended for connection to a UL listed direct plug in power unit marked Class 2 and rated 5 VDC at 3 5 Watts or greater if using electrical accessories European models must use a similarly rated Class 1 or Class 2 power supply that is certified to comply with standard for safety EN 60950 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual vil Warning and Caution Summary Warning and Caution Summary cont Warning Label Placement Th
97. of the selected pulse width Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the Input 1 Pin Note Input 1 must be set to Unlatch Output for Latch Mode 1 to function Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the opposite condition selected under Output On has been met For example if No Read is enabled under Output On the programmable output will go active on a No Read and remain active until the opposite condition a good read occurs Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re enter Read Cycle The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until a new read cycle begins Note All of the Output On modes are inhibited when any Diagnostic Warning is active for Output 2 5 146 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Trend Analysis Note Output On under Output 2 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Under Output 2 Parameters expand the Trend Analysis tree Useful in cases where the user doesn t want to shut down for one condition but wants to monitor quality and read conditions Applies Trend Analysis settings to Output 2 With Trend Analysis the user can track the occurrences and frequency of mismatches No Reads and the number of reads
98. off when this button position is selected To cancel Sleep Mode quickly press and release the EZ Button Bar Code Configuration Enables Bar Code Configuration Mode whenever the associated button position is selected When enabled the scanner can accept configuration commands from symbols To disable quickly press and release the EZ Button QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 123 I O Parameters Four Beeps Hold down button until four quick beeps are heard and the 20 40 60 and 80 LEDs illuminate EZ Button Enabled Default On Power on Enabled Single Beep Read Rate Two Beeps Calibration Three Beeps Save for Power on Auto Framing Auto Framing Options i Laser Framing Disabled When set to Disabled the associated button position will have no function associated with it and the position will be skipped over Read Rate Read Rate is initiated when the associated button position is selected Read Rate will perform decodes second and is the same as sending a lt C gt from ESP s Terminal To exit Read Rate quickly press and release the EZ Button Calibration Calibration is initiated when the associated button position is selected To cancel Calibration quickly press and release the EZ Button Save for Power On All scanner settings will be saved to non volatile memory to be recalled on power on whenever the associated button position is selected This is the same as sending a lt Z gt f
99. option enabled In Read Cycle Activates a discrete output when the scanner is in a read cycle QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 133 I O Parameters Output State Sets the active electrical state of the discrete output Output 1 Parameters Mutouek On Mukouk State Pulse Width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Number of Triggers Humber to Qutpuk Or Decodes per Trigger Diagnostics High Temperature Service Unit Laser Current High Laser Current Low Low Temperature Pulse Width Mismatch or Wo Read Normally Opern Normally Open Normally Closed Mo Read j j j Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Sets the time in 10 ms increments that the discrete output remains active Output 1 Parameters Mutpur On Mutpuk State Pulse width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Number of Triggers Number to Output On Decodes per Trigger Diagnostics High Temperature Service Unit Laser Current High Laser Current Low Low Temperature 5 134 Mismatch or Mo Read Normally Open 0 050 Pulse Mo Read T T 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Seconds QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Output Mode Sets the condition in which the discrete output is de activated Output 1 Parameters Qutpuk On Mismatch or Wo Read Qutput State Normally Open Pulse Width 50 Outp
100. per trigger and output the results to any of three outputs Trend Analysis Mode No Read Trigger Evaluation Period 25 triggers read cycles Number to Output On 4 In this example the scanner will activate an output when 4 No Reads occur within a period of 25 triggers read cycles QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 147 I O Parameters Trend Analysis Mode Sets the trend condition Mismatch No Read Decodes per Trigger Bad Symbol or No Symbol that will activate the output Output 2 Parameters Qukpuk On Mismatch or Wo Read Qutpuk State Normally Open Pulse Width S00 Gutput Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Read O aa Number to Qutput On Ho Read Decodes per Trigger Decodes per Trigger Mismatch Output will be activated when the number of mismatches equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers No Read Output will be activated when the number of No Reads equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Decodes per Trigger Output will be activated when the number of decodes equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Bad Symbol Output will be activated when the number of Bad Symbol occurrences equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected
101. sequence on mismatch gt Default asterisk Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Sequence on No Read Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Master Symbol Database Size Serial Cmd lt K224 number of master symbols gt Default 1 Options 1 to 10 New Master Pin Serial Cmd lt K225 status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Sequence Step Serial Cmd lt K228 sequence step gt Default 1 Options 1 to 32768 Master Symbol Index Serial Cmd lt K231 index master symbol data gt Options 1 to 32768 Master Symbol Data Serial Cmd lt K231 ndex master symbol data gt Options Any valid ASCII string QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 69 Serial Commands Match Replace Serial Cmd lt K735 status replacement string gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Replacement String Serial Cmd lt K735 status replacement string gt Default MATCH Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters Mismatch Replace Serial Cmd lt K736 status replaceme
102. service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Diagnostics Output 2 lt K791 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Diagnostics Output 3 lt K792 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Output 1 Parameters lt K810 output on output state oulse width output mode gt Output 2 Parameters lt K811 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Output 3 Parameters Calibration Options lt K812 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Serial Cmd lt K521 unused video scan speed laser powerlaser framing symbology gt Video Default 1 Calibrate Options 0 Don t Calibrate A 58 1 Calibrate QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Scan Speed Serial Cmd lt K521 unused video scan speed laser power laser framing symbology gt Default 1 Calibrate Options 0 Don t Calibrate 1 Calibrate Laser Power Serial Cmd lt K521 unused video scan speed laser power laser framing symbology gt Default 1 Calibrate Options 0 Don t Calibrate 1 Calibrate Laser Framing Serial Cmd lt K521 unused video scan speed laser power laser framing symbology gt Default 0 Don t Calibrate Options 0 Don t Calibrate 1 Calibrate Symbology Serial Cmd lt K521 unused video scan speed laser power laser framing symbo
103. set gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 10 Options 1 to 128 Full ASCII Set Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Start Stop Match Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QxX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 47 Serial Commands Start Stop Output Codabar Serial Cm
104. setting However as aspect ratio decreases and line speed increases High may not provide enough decodes to be useful The Effort level may also require more time in some cases QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 103 Symbologies Symbol Reconstruction Effort Symbol Reconstruction Redundancy Disabled Effort Ml inimurn Minimum Maimun Minimum When Symbol Reconstruction Effort is set to Minimum the scanner will attempt to reconstruct symbols across multiple scan lines However the required processing time will be limited to a minimum level so candidate symbols that are not valid will be rejected quickly Moderate When Symbol Reconstruction Effort is set to Moderate the scanner will attempt to reconstruct symbols across multiple scan lines The required processing time will be limited to a level that is expected to work optimally for most applications Moderate is the appropriate setting for most symbol reconstruction scenarios Moderate can still reject candidate symbols but there may be a noticeable pause in throughput Usually candidate symbols will either decode or self eliminate before the effort level is reached Maximum When Symbol Reconstruction Effort is set to Maximum the scanner will attempt to reconstruct symbols across multiple scan lines However if a large amount of processing is required reconstruction is allowed to attempt all decode possibilities This Effort level may cause the sys
105. the scanner Diagnostics Output Enables or disables diagnostics output from the scanner External Source Processing Mode Enables or disables processing of commands or data from sources external to the scanner Command Command enables command processing in the scanner Data Data enables Ethernet TCP Port 2 as a data source port Note The data path between in the source port and out the source port is always two way Data is copied from source data ports and all those source ports data is transmitted to the destination port and from the destination port to the source port 5 22 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters EtherNet IP Enables or disables EtherNet IP operation in the scanner Ethernet Enabled IP Address 192 166 0 100 Subnet foo coo LO gateway 0 0 0 0 IF Address Mode DHCP TEF Port 1 O01 Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Qutput Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command TCP Port 2 O03 Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Output Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command Sp EtherMet IF Enabled Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Oukput Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command Symbol Data Output Enables or disables decoded symbol data output from the scanner Extra Symbol Information Enables or disables extra symbol information output fr
106. the symbology being used No Symbol Message Disabled Message NO SYMBOL Message Any combination of ASCII characters can be defined as the No Symbol Message No Symbol Message Disabled Message N oO S amp S HM EB 0 L 5 112 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Read Duration Output Useful in evaluating actual read cycle timing results especially when initially setting up an application to determine maximum line speed obtainable based on spacing between symbols When enabled the duration of the read cycle in milliseconds is appended to the symbol data The read duration is the time from the beginning of the read cycle until data is output Important To measure the entire read cycle when in External Level trigger mode set When to Output Symbol Data to End of Read Cycle This output can measure over 49 days worth of duration if exceeded the OVERFLOW message will be output in place of the duration Read Duration Gutput Disabled Separator i Separator User defined character that separates the symbol information from the Read Duration Output Read Duration Output Separator NUL S0H STX ETX EOT ENG ack BeL Bs HT LF vt rE s0 _s pue pen Click Delete to remove characters QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 113 I O Parameters Output Indicators Output Indicators Green Flash Mode On Good
107. total number of No Reads that have occurred since the last reset No Read Counter Reset sending lt O gt sets the No Read Counter to 00000 Trigger Counter Sending lt T gt displays the total number of triggers since the last reset Trigger Counter Reset Sending lt U gt sets the trigger counter to 00000 Good Read Match Counter or Good Read Counter Sending lt V gt displays the total number of good reads matching the master symbol or if Master Symbol is not enabled the number of good reads since the last reset This counter is always enabled but will only work as a match count when Master Symbol is enabled If Master Symbol is not enabled this counter records the number of good reads This count can be requested at any time Good Read Match Counter Reset Sending lt W gt sets the Match Counter to 00000 Mismatch Counter sending lt X gt displays the number of decoded symbols since the last reset that do not match the master symbol Mismatch Counter Reset Sending lt Y gt sets the Mismatch Counter to zero QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 7 1 Device Control Device Control Click the Utilities button and then the Device Control tab Utilities to display the Device Control view Read Fiate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Digital Bar Code Firmware Outputs Output 1 Pulse Output 2 Pulse Output 3 Pulse Extras The Output 1 Pulse Output 2
108. value 35 0 indicates that brightness has been reduced by 35 dB The symbol used in this example was very close to the scanner using high laser power As the laser power is lowered and or the symbol is moved farther from the scanner the attenuation brightness reduction value becomes lower The user does nothing to adjust the gain in order to keep the scanner decoding AGC performs the task of raising gain to accommodate the greater distance The actual attenuation factor is determined by the return light from the symbol and the SETPOINT value that the control system is attempting to hold SETPOINT is an abstracted number range that has to do with the feedback system s dynamic range A very low SETPOINT value of 0 20 would tend to keep the symbol amplitude low A very high SETPOINT value of 150 255 would tend to keep the symbol amplitude high The gain will change to hold the feedback value equal to the user SETPOINT setting of amplitude Gain Level at all times Disabled Fixed Gain Fixed Gain is a gain mode in which there are no changes in the gain system The system takes the total gain range and divides it into 255 steps Then the value of the Gain Level setting is converted directly into the gain value Nothing will change this value unless the user changes the Gain Level setting QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 65 Read Cycle When To Use Fixed Gain vs AGC The AGC settings Leading Edge or Continuous are
109. when a trend analysis condition is met depending on the trend analysis option enabled Diagnostic Warning Typically used when a discrete indication of a diagnostic condition is needed Activates discrete output when a diagnostic warning condition is met depending on the diagnostic option enabled In Read Cycle Activates a discrete output when the scanner is in a read cycle 5 144 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Output State Sets the active electrical state of the discrete output Output 2 Parameters Gutpuk On Mismatch or Wo Read Output Stake Normally Upen Pulse Width Normally Open Gutput Mode Pulse Width Sets the time in 10 ms increments that the discrete output remains active Output 2 Parameters Qutpuk On Mismatch or Wo Read Output Stabe Hormally Open Pulse Width 0 500 Seconds Qutput Mode Pulse QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 145 I O Parameters Output Mode Sets the condition in which the discrete output is de activated Output 2 Parameters Gukpuk On Mismatch or Wo Read Output State Normally Open Pulse Width S00 Output Mode Pus sss Pulse Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re Enter Read Cycle Pulse This is the default mode of operation in which the programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active for the duration
110. 0 scans are decoded Perform motor and laser calibration if enabled If motor speed calibration is enabled motor speed starts at 300 sps and is increased by 50 sps until 500 sps After 500 sps motor speed is increased by 100 sps until 1 000 sps Motor speed calibration is limited to a maximum of 1000 sps or motor speed is not changed If laser power calibration is enabled at each motor speed increment laser power is cycled between low medium and high power settings or laser power is not changed If video calibration is enabled and AGC is enabled not in Fixed Gain operation several gain and tracking pairs are used at each motor speed and laser power combination or video settings are unchanged A best ever read rate value is initialized to 0 to start the calibration process At each motor speed laser power video combination a new read rate is acquired The settings used to acquire the new read rate are recorded as the new best if The new read rate is better than 95 Go to the next motor speed The new read rate is greater than the best read rate Go to the next laser power The new read rate is equal to the best read rate and the motor speed is greater Go to the next laser power The new read rate is equal to the best read rate and the laser power is less Go to the next laser power Set LEDs to display 60 LED on all others off Restore user configured video gain and tracking settings Perform video
111. 00 DO 00 0000 D ao 12 13 50 9873 12 16 15 33 Connection dosed with Instance 1 12 49 11 174 13 58 38 950 Connection dosed with Instance 1 14 02 30 7930 14 12 56 270 Connection dosed with Instance 1 14 22 18 610 12 15 31 755 Error Request falled Target Is nat responding 12 13 41 750 Error Request Failed Target is nat responding 15 20 39 187 W7Ml 4S 53A Connerctinn dosed with tostanre 1 1 Class1 connections active Max Recv Delay 9 msec Max Send Delay 6 msec Max Recy 4PI25 35 Max Send API 20 01 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Host 10 10 4 130 DO DO bo DO Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay 11 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 5535 Sent pkts 7012 ElPScan Test Tool g Connection Instance 1 APIs 20 20 Cyclic Matas _ ccceocecececccececaaE 10 10 5 234 oo oo oD oD a0 go ao ao DO oo bo DO oo 31 00 oo og 32 oa oa oo 33 oo oD a0 34 ao ao DO 35 oo bo oo 36 oo oo od 37 oa oa oo 3B oD oD a0 39 ao ao D0 30 DO DO oo 31 oo oo og 32 oa oa oo oo oo oo a0 ao ao ao DO 01 00 oo oo 00 D0 00 oa oo 00 od oo oo oD oo a0 a0 ao ao 01 00 00 OD 01 DO OO OO OD 00 DO DO 0O OO OD OO DO OO OO OD 00 DO DO oO 0O OD a0 DO OO OO OD 00 DO oo oo oo oo oa Oc oa oa DO 00 00 OD OO DO OO OQ OD OO DO Connection opened wi
112. 0118 r128 barcode data string til N et z EA q I0 big udt a0 bia otouT Ladd KOUT utt A qx_IO_stmall_udt l gs 10_big_pt OUT usertag AOOO Decimal DINT helpful for identification and camm veri __ i qx_OUT_udt E qx 10_big_pt DUT command TA A qx_command Strings gx_I0_big_ptOUT command tigger 0 Decmal BOOL Rising edge starts reading aa a str128 E gx_I0_big_ptOUT command new_master 0 Decimal BOOL Rising edge requests next decode to i A m E qx_ 0_big_ptOUT command res2 0 Decmal BOOL reserved E qx_l0_big_ptOUT command tes3 0 Decimal BOOL reserved IRE qx_l0_big_ptOUT command tes4 0 Decimal BOOL reserved ge 10_big_ptOUT command tes5 0 Decimal BOOL reserved E E q _10_big_pt OUT command es6 O Decimal BOOL reserved qx_l0_big_pt OUT command tes 0 Decimal BOOL reserved _ ee qx_l0_big_pt QUT command disable_scan 0 Decimal BOOL Rising edge disables reading X 4 Monitor Tags A EditTags 4 gt Ready a QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices The IN usertag_echo will change to match the same value as the OUT usertag fa RSLuyix 5000 MscauLuvixn561 1756 L61 Piugian Tags MainPrugran File Edit Mew Search Logic Communications Tools Window Hep alsa S selel geleli v Ale Path AB_ETHIP 1 10105 253 Backplanc di l Rem Aun i E AunMode No Forces b E Contioller OK E Battery OK 1 0 0K No Edits a amp Controller Ms
113. 0253big clg File View Request I O Stack Device JO Modue Help DSHS m Target Network Path 10 10 5 234 Adapter f 0 10 4 130 X m Request all fields are in hex Predefined None m Service hex f Class hex i Instance hex 301 Attribute hex E Member hex Symbol Tag Request Data Each byte is a 2 char hex value sepaiated by a space i e Oa 26 f9 O Response Response Size decimal 260 DO 00 0000 DO 00 0000 DO 00 00000 0 00 00 00 0000 DO 00 0000 DO 00 01 00 DO 00 01 00 0000 01 CO 0000 00 CO 0000 00 00 A v 12 13 50 969 12 16 15 33 Connection dosed with Instance 1 13 58 38 950 Connection dosed with Instance 1 12 13 31 755 Error Request Failed Target is nat responding 12 13 41 750 Error Request Failed Target is nat responding 15 20 45 536 Connection dosed with Instance 1 15 22 20 654 Connection dosed with Instance 1 A 126 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay 11 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 5535 Sent pkts 7012 15 24 27 9044 Onan Cennartion Failad For Tnebance 1 Invalid Sarmark Tuna ce Seanment Valiiain Path ElPScan Test Tool Host 10 10 4 130 E Add Device IO Module Remove Device Add Zlass1 Connecticn Add Class3 Connection t th Start Class1 Auta Test Start Classi Output Test 12 49 11 174 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay amp 3 msec Max
114. 1 Symbol Data Oukput Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode TEF Port 2 Symbol Data Cubpuk Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Foahlerd 192 168 0 100 feo fet LL 0 0 0 0 DHiLP z001 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command z003 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command 5 17 Communication Subnet Enter the Subnet address of the scanner in this field Ethernet Enabled IP Address 197 168 0100 Subnet 255 2556 O O Gateway TATRTAT IP Address Mode DHCP TCP Port 1 00i Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Oukput Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command TCP Port 2 z003 Symbol Data Gukput Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Output Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command 5 18 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Gateway Scanner Parameters Enter the Gateway address of the scanner in this field Ethernet IP Address Subnet IP Address Mode TCP Port 1 Symbol Data Gukpuk Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode TCP Port 2 Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Enabled 192 165 0 100 FES Foe 0 0 0 0 LIAL 001 Enabled Enabled Enabled
115. 28V 2 Trig NM Input 1 Common 3 Ground 4 Trigger All three connectors can be assigned to bus power and data as required by the application The two switches at the center of the device allow the user to route signals as needed QX 1 Trigger Connector 4 pin Socket COMM 0 POWER This simple diagram shown on the base of the QX 1 illustrates how power communications I O and trigger signal can be routed through the QX 1 device depending on the needs of the application The switches greatly increase signal routing flexibility TRIGGER QX 1 Communications I O QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Power Trigger 3 7 Power and Trigger Switching Power and Trigger Switching Power can be bussed between scanners and interface devices At each location on a network where a new power supply is added the Power switch on the QX 1 can be used to break power between Connector 2 and Connectors 1 3 and T The Trigger signal between Connector 2 and Connectors 1 3 and T can be broken using the Trigger switch This isolates trigger signals as required by the application Qx 1 m g Eh cz Cj gt _j gt vA eT v ma T m BE To Power l Supply lt US HL H To Power QX 1 Multidrop Supply Concentrator Host or PLC 3 8 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Port Routing Hardware Installation The physical advantages created by flexible s
116. 3 Save for Power On 4 Auto Framing 4 Auto Framing 4 Auto Framing 4 Auto Framing 5 Load New Master 5 Load New Master 5 Load New Master 5 Load New Master 6 Sleep Mode 6 Sleep Mode 6 Sleep Mode 6 Sleep Mode 7 Unused 7 Unused 7 Unused 7 Unused 8 Unused 8 Unused 8 Unused 8 Unused 9 Bar Code Config 9 Bar Code Config 9 Bar Code Config 9 Bar Code Config Auto Framing Options Laser Status Serial Cmd lt K773 unused laser status gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 64 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Trend Analysis Output 1 Trend Analysis Mode Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold gt Default 1 No Read Options 0 Mismatch 1 No Read 2 Decodes per Trigger 3 Bad Symbol 4 No Symbol Trigger Evaluation Period Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold gt Default 0 Options 0 to 255 Number to Output On Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold gt Default 0 Options 0 to 255 Decodes per Trigger Threshold Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold gt Default 0 Op
117. 3 Click the Send button to the left of the text field to send the command additional times 6 4 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Terminal Macros Macros can be stored in a macro selection bar edited in a separate window and executed by clicking on the macro name DeFaulk Macros Add Macro git Humber Checksum Disable Scanning Enable Scanning Exit Read Cycle For Help press F1 Click on the first arrow here to see Add Click on Next Macro or Default Macros Click on subsequent Row to see the When macros are defaulted the entire arrows to edit macros next row of macro set is restored to the original macros macro commands Click a macro button to execute it in the Terminal If the macro is a command it is sent to the scanner at the same time that it is displayed Editing a Macro Click the arrow next to any macro and select Edit to display the following dialog Macro Entry Macro Mane Read Rate percent Macro Value C p gt Cancel Edit the macro value or type a new Macro Name in the text field provided and define it in the Macro Value field Click OK to save the entry QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Terminal Window Menus Terminal Window Menus Right click on the Terminal window to display the following menu e Copy selected text to clipboard Copy pisces e Paste from Terminal or other text e Clear all text in Terminal window Clear e
118. 33 34 35 36 37 3B 39 30 31 32 OD OO DO OO OO OD OO DO OO OO OD OO DO OO OO OD 00 DO 00 OD OO DO OO OQ OD OO DO OO OQ OD OO DO OO OO OD 0O DO OO OO OD 0O DO OO OO OD AO DO OO OO OD 0O DO OO OO OD AO DO oo OD 00 DO OO OQ OD OO DO OO OQ OD OO DO OO OQ OD 00O DO OO OQ OD 0O DO OO OQ OD 0O DO OO OO OD 0O DO OO OO OD AO DO 00 OD OO DO OO OO OD OO DO OO OO OD OO DO OO 0O OD OO DO OO aS D 00 DO 00 00 OD 00O DO OO OO OD Se D uemm fs Sse ag WA ig et same eee ce eee 12 13 50 9873 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay 11 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkks 5535 Sent pkts 7012 E 12 16 15 33 Connection dosed with Instance 1 12 49 11 174 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay amp 3 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 164265 Sent pks 208135 13 58 38 950 Connection dosed with Instance 1 14 02 36 790 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay O msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 24216 Sent pkts 30603 14 12 56 270 Connection dosed with Instance 1 14 22 18 610 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay 32 msec Max Send Delay 6 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 10825 Sent pkts 13715 12 15 51 755 Error Request Falled Target Is nat responding 12 13 41 750 Error Request Failed Target is nat responding 15 20 39 187 Open Connection Failed For Instance 1 Invalid
119. 53 index gain AGC mode tracking unused unused unused framing status laser on position laser off position laser power background color gt Options 1 to 10 database index number Gain Serial Cmd lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking unused unused unused framing status laser on position laser off position laser power background color gt Default 40 Options 0 to 255 AGC Mode Serial Cmd lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking unused unused unused framing status laser on position laser off position laser power background color gt Default 2 Continuous Options 0 Disabled 1 Leading Edge 2 Continuous Tracking Serial Cmd lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking unused unused unused framing status laser on position laser off position laser power background color gt Default 40 Options 5 to 127 A 42 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Framing Status Serial Cmd lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking unused unused unused framing status laser on position laser off position laser power background color gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Laser On Position Serial Cmd lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking unused unused unused framing status laser on position laser off position laser power background color gt Default 10 Options 10 to 90 Laser Off Position Serial Cmd lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking unused unused unused framing s
120. 65535 TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K127 7CP Port 1 TCP Port 2 gt Default 2003 Options 1024 65535 EtherNet IP Serial Cmd lt K129 status gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 26 Appendices RS 232 A Data Type Symbol Data Output RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K130 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Extra Symbol Information RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K130 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Diagnostic Output RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K130 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Source Processing Mode RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K130 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Command Options 0 Disabled 1 Command 2 Data RS 232 B Data Type Symbol Data Output RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K131 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 27 Serial Commands E
121. 9 83 mm to 229 mm Read Ranges based on a Grade A Code 39 label running at 500 scans per second A 4 QxX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual FIS Options Appendices QX 830 FIS 0830 0001G Compact Industrial Scanner Single Line Low Density Serial FIS 0830 0002G Compact Industrial Scanner Single Line Medium Density Serial FIS 0830 0003G Compact Industrial Scanner Single Line High Density Serial FIS 0830 0004G Compact Industrial Scanner Raster Line Low Density Serial FIS 0830 0005G Compact Industrial Scanner Raster Line Medium Density Serial FIS 0830 0006G Compact Industrial Scanner Raster Line High Density Serial FIS 0830 1001G Compact Industrial Scanner Single Line Low Density Serial Ethernet FIS 0830 1002G Compact Industrial Scanner Single Line Medium Density Serial Ethernet FIS 0830 1003G Compact Industrial Scanner Single Line High Density Serial Ethernet FIS 0830 1004G Compact Industrial Scanner Raster Line Low Density Serial Ethernet FIS 0830 1005G Compact Industrial Scanner Raster Line Medium Density Serial Ethernet FIS 0830 1006G Compact Industrial Scanner Raster Line High Density Serial Ethernet Safety Certifications CDRH FCC UL cUL CE CB BSMI ROHS WEEE FC CE RoHS WEEE Compliant 2015 Microscan Systems Inc All rights reserved Specifications subjec
122. CE ALK MAF MAK Polling Mode Options RES EOT REQ ENG STX STX ETX ETX ACE ACK MAK MAK Response Timeout J LEC Status Disabled RES NAK Defaults RES Reset NUL 0x00 REQ Request NUL 0x00 STX Start of Text NUL 0x00 ETX End of Text NUL 0x00 ACK Acknowledge ACK 0x06 NAK Negative Acknowledge NAK 0x15 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 27 Communication ACK NAK Protocol The following are general outlines of the ACK NAK protocol Items that are framed by brackets can either be disabled or enabled LRC does not include STX but it does include preamble postamble and ETX Symbol Data Output TX to host STX preamble SYMBOL DATA postamble ETX LRC Response from host ACK NAK Sent when LRC ETX postamble or timeout waiting for more data are detected if REQ is disabled depending on what is enabled Commands from Host to Scanner TX to Scanner STX lt command gt ETX LRC Response from Scanner ACK NAK Sent when LRC ETX or command ending angle bracket gt are received depending on what is enabled Command Response from Scanner to Host TX to host STX preamble COMMAND RESPONSE DATA postamble ETX LRC Response from host ACK NAK Sent when LRC ETX postamble command ending angle bracket gt or timeout waiting for more data are detected depending on what is enabled As with Polling Mode lt K140 5 gt the scanner can opt
123. D i ia b E d x Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Specifies the exact number of characters that the scanner will recognize this does not include start and stop and check character characters The scanner ignores any symbology that does not match the specified length Fixed Symbol Length i 0 1 125 Full ASCII Set Must be enabled when reading characters outside the standard character set 0 9 A Z etc The user must know in advance whether or not to use the Full ASCII Set option Since Full ASCII Set requires two code words to encode one character it is less efficient Standard Code 39 encodes 43 characters zero through nine capital A through capital Z minus symbol plus symbol forward slash space decimal point dollar sign and percent symbol When Full ASCII Set is enabled the scanner can read the full ASCII character set from 0 to 255 Full ASCII Set Disabled D i ee b e d x Enabled 5 72 QxX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Code 128 Code 128 is a smaller symbology useful in applications with limited space and high security requirements A very dense alphanumeric symbology It encodes all 128 ASCII characters it is continuous has variable length and uses multiple element widths measured edge to edge Code 128
124. Disabled Destination Port AS23532 4 Ambles to Source Disabled Echo to Source Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Mutpuk at ETA Mutpue at Timeout z0 Echo to Source Enables or Disables the ability to send an Echo to the Source port External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port AS se Ambles to Source Disabled Echo to Source Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Disabled Output ak ETH Enabled Qukoue ab Timeout 00 Output at End of Read Cycle Enables or Disables the ability to output data at the end of read cycle External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port RSZ 4 Armbles to Source Disabled Echo to Source Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Disabled QUEBUE at ET Disabled Output at Timeout Enabled 5 36 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Output at ETX Determines the output at ETX External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port R5232 A Armbles to Source Disabled Echo to Source Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Disabled MIUEBUE at ETH Output ak Timeout PCR NUL 50H STx ETS EOT ENG ACK BEL BS HT LF vT FF cA so s DE oct Dc2 Dea Dca Nak SYN ETB caN EM sue Esc _Fs GS AS us SP Click Delete to remove characters Output at Timeout Determines the Timeout value for output External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port RS2s2 A 4ribles to Source Disabled E
125. Enabled No Symbol Message Serial Cmd lt K716 no symbol message status message gt Default NO SYMBOL Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 61 Serial Commands Input 1 Serial Cmd lt K730 status active state gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Reset Counts 2 Unlatch Output Active State Serial Cmd lt K730 status active state gt Default 0 Active Open Options 0 Active Open 1 Active Closed Green Flash LED Green Flash Mode Serial Cmd lt K750 green flash mode unused green flash duration gt Default 1 Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 Static Presentation 3 Match 4 Mismatch 5 Strobe Green Flash Duration Serial Cmd lt K750 green flash mode unused green flash duration gt Default 100 1 second Options 0 to 65535 in 10 ms increments Status Indicators Serial Cmd lt K751 status bar graph O 1 1 O 2 gt Default 1 PHY Activity Options 0 Disabled 1 PHY Activity 2 Protocol Activity Bar Graph Serial Cmd lt K751 status bar graph l O 1 I O 2 gt Default 1 Read Rate Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Read Rate Good Read A 62 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices I O 1 Serial Cmd lt K751 status bar graph l O 1 1 O 2 gt Default 1 Output Active Options 0 Disabled 1 Output Active 2 Input Active I O 2 Serial Cmd lt K751 status bar graph
126. Flash Duration 100 On Good Read Disabled On Good Read On No Read 5 116 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Serial Verification Allows the user to verify configuration command status Serial Verification Serial Command Echo Status Disabled Serial Command Beep Status Disabled ControlfHes Qubpuk Contral Serial Command Echo Status This command is useful in removing any doubt about the scanner s interpretation of any configuration command For example if the current preamble is SOM and lt K701 1 START gt is entered the scanner will echo back lt K701 SOM gt since the attempted entry START exceeds the four character limit for that command Therefore it is rejected and the existing SOM message is echoed back and remains the preamble message When enabled a configuration command received from the host is echoed back to the host with the resultant settings Host Banner lf a command with multiple fields is processed some of the fields may have been processed properly while others were not The changes will appear in the string echoed back so that the user will know which fields did or did not change Serial Verification Serial Command Echo Status Disabled Serial Command Beep Status Disabled ControlfHes Output Enabled Serial Command Beep Status Used to audibly verify the acceptance and validity of a command Causes the scan
127. I NOOO anemeeen ee orate tee een E A ee ee ee ee eee 2 3 Kenn FOOD eei E E A E E E E A 2 4 Navigaungin ESP sirere nee A EAA EAE S 2 15 Send Receive Options a cceccacascaccecasanccssenccaneedesconamsosasic ens neceeed sneedagascacnneds anancacanteesubosepeoseesdacseesacce 2 16 This section explains the basic structure and elements of ESP Easy Setup Program When ESP is opened unless otherwise specified in ESP Preferences the EZ Mode view will appear App Mode contains several configuration menus Communication Read Cycle Symbologies I O Parameters Matchcode and Diagnostics a Setup interface a Terminal interface and a Utilities interface ESP can be used to configure the QX 830 in three different ways e Graphic User Interfaces Scanner settings can be configured using such point and click tools as buttons spin boxes check boxes and drag and drop functions e Tree Controls Each configuration menu contains a list of all option settings that pertain to that specific area of scanner operation For example the Read Cycle menu shows a Laser Setup command and then a list of the parameters Laser On Off Laser Framing Status Laser On Position Laser Off Position and Laser Power Each parameter can be configured using dropdown menus or fields where characters can be entered e Terminal ESP s Terminal allows the user to send serial configuration and utility commands directly to the scanner by typing them in the provided field In
128. ID is 1095 Product Code The Product Code is 830 QX 830 EtherNet IP Object Model The QX 830 uses Class 1 connected messaging to communicate most data in three different io assemblies The user chooses one of two input assemblies plus the output assembly to create a Class 1 connection Connection properties supported Class 1 Trigger Mode Cyclic and Change of State Cyclic Rate Greater than 20 ms recommended 10 ms minimum Size Fixed Type Point to Point PLC OUT O gt T Point to Point and Multicast PLC IN T gt O Priority Low High and Scheduled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 93 Using EtherNet IP Data Types Microscan Data Type AB PLC ODVA CIP EDS Description U8 SINT USINT Unsigned 8 bit U32 DINT UDINT Unsigned 32 bit A 32 bit length field followed by STRING32 STRING UDINT and BYTE 8 bit ASCII characters QX 830 Small IN Assembly 0x64 100 decimal IN QX 830 gt PLC Size of Data 32 bit flags Field Data Type Type Elements Field Name User Defined Tag Echo ee Echo from asm OUT OxC6 U32 Command Echo Echo from asm OUT OxC6 U32 32 bit flags Output Control Echo Echo from asm OUT 0xC6 U32 Read Cycle Sequence Counter When this value changes it indicates the following read cycle report fields have changed 0 Read cycle report has been reset to empty Read cycle report data is only valid when Seq
129. If Output On is set to Match or Mismatch a transition switching will not occur unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory output 2 Parameters kpt Gm Qukpuk State Pulse Width Output Mode lt Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Number of Triggers Number to Gukpuk On Decodes per Trigger Diagnostics High Temperature Service Unit Laser Current High Laser Current Low Low Temperature QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Mismatch orNoaAead Mismatch or Wo Read Good Read Match Mismatch No Read Trend Analysis Diagnostic Warming ln Read Cycle Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 5 143 I O Parameters Mismatch or No Read Activates discrete output when the data does not match that of the master symbol or the symbol has not been decoded before the end of the read cycle Good Read Match Activates a discrete output when the symbol data matches the master symbol Note To output on Good Read when Matchcode is not enabled enable any output for Match Mismatch Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data does not match that of the master symbol No Read Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data is not decoded before the end of the read cycle Trend Analysis Typically used when successful decodes are occurring but a discrete output is needed to flag a trend in quality issues Activates discrete output
130. K504 AGC leve AGC mode minimum gain maximum gain gt Default 2 Continuous Options 0 Disabled 1 Leading Edge 2 Continuous QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 39 Serial Commands Minimum Gain Serial Cmd lt K504 AGC level AGC mode minimum gain maximum gain gt Default 0 QX 830 model dependent see Microscan Product Pricing Catalog Options 0 to 255 Maximum Gain Serial Cmd lt K504 AGC level AGC mode minimum gain maximum gain gt Default 255 QX 830 model dependent see Microscan Product Pricing Catalog Options 0 to 255 Symbol Detect Status Transition Counter Symbol Detect Status Serial Cmd lt K505 symbol detect status transition counter gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Transition Counter Serial Cmd lt K505 symbol detect status transition counter gt Default 14 Options 1 to 255 Scan Width Enhance Serial Cmd lt K511 status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled AGC Tracking Serial Cmd lt K520 tracking value gt Default 40 QX 830 model dependent see Microscan Product Pricing Catalog Options 5 to 127 Laser Setup Laser On Off Status Serial Cmd lt K700 laser on off status laser framing status laser on position laser off position laser power gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 40 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Laser Framing Status Serial Cmd lt
131. MICROSCAN QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual P N 84 000830 Rev C Copyright and Disclaimer fi Copyright 2015 Microscan Systems Inc Tel 1 425 226 5700 800 762 1149 Fax 1 425 226 8250 All rights reserved The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and or service Microscan manufactured equipment and is not to be released reproduced or used for any other purpose without written permission of Microscan Throughout this manual trademarked names might be used We state herein that we are using the names to the benefit of the trademark owner with no intention of infringement Disclaimer The information and specifications described in this manual are subject to change without notice Latest Manual Version For the latest version of this manual see the Download Center on our web site at www microscan com Technical Support For technical support e mail helpdesk microscan com Warranty For current warranty information see www microscan com warranty Microscan Systems Inc United States Corporate Headquarters 1 425 226 5700 800 762 1149 United States Northeast Technology Center 1 603 598 8400 800 468 9503 European Headquarters 31 172 423360 Asia Pacific Headquarters 65 6846 1214 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Introduction Table of Contents QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner U
132. Menus Embedded Menus The QX 830 contains Embedded Menus to provide easy configuration in situations where a ESP Software may not be available or applicable The Embedded Menus consist of a Main Menu and a sub menu for every group of commands The following example shows how a user can operate the QX 830 s Embedded Menus Main Menu For the purpose of this example assume the user wants to navigate to the Symbologies menu The user would select C from the list SSS SSS SSS SSS SSeS SSS MAIN MENU S S S SSS SSS SS SS SSS SSSS A COMMUNICATION B SCANNER SETUP C SYMBOLOGIES D SCANNER I O SETUP E DIAGNOSTICS SETUP F CONFIG IP DATABASE G OUTPUT ORDER FILTER H MATCHCODE PLEASE PRESS A H TO EDIT ESC TO EXIT Command Menu The user then selects B to navigate to the Code 128 menu SS SS SSS SSS SSS SSS SS SYMBOLOGIES SS SS SSS SSS 5 gt gt Ode Type 2 gt 32 9423 3 gt 26 gt Status 44 5 A CODE 39 ENABLE B CODE 128 DISABLE C CODE I 2 OF 5 DISABLE D CODABAR DISABLE E UPC DISABLE F CODE 93 DISABLE G PHARMA CODE DISABLE H PDF417 DISABLE SSeS Global Parameter T Quiet Zone Status DISABLE J Symbology Identifier Status DISABLE K Background Color White PLEASE PRESS A K TO EDIT 1 MAIN MENU 2 PREVIOUS MENU ESC TO EXIT 7 28 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Utilities
133. Output Format W Enable Output Format i Auto Sune with Reader Set Humber of Symbols i Output Phrase Preamble Symbol 1 Postarnble ce i C3 lt ie W Enable Ww Parse iv Enable Parse Symbols Send and Save Recenve P Show Parse Table 4 10 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Set Number of Symbols Number of Symbols determines the number of symbols to which output formatting will apply Output Phrase Scanner Setup Output Phrase refers to the user defined Preamble selected symbols and Postamble sequence in the read cycle result W Enable Output Format Set Number of Symbols 5 E Output Phrase Use the Set Number of Symbols spin box to determine the number of symbols to be included in the output phrase bal Sym Preamble Symbol 1 Separato W Enable W Parse ro Symbol 2 Symbol 3 mO mmo W Fare i Parse Symbol 4 Symbol 5 Postamble eR LF Parse Parse i Enable Enter Postamble characters by double clicking in the text field and then using the Postamble calculator Check the Parse boxes beneath the symbols to SoH sTx ETX E0T ENO ACK BEL es HT F EEEE s1 De1 Dc2 Deaf Deal NAK SYN ETB CAN EM sue Esc FS Gs RS US SP Click Delete to remove characters Cancel be formatted QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Enter Postamble cha
134. Output at ETX Fixed to Disabled with user defined characters Default character will be used if this setting is set to Disabled Output at Timeout Fixed to Disabled with user defined timeout Default time will be used if this setting is set to Disabled Mode of Operation e Source Port data is not echoed back to itself e Source Port data is ignored when the Destination Port is in Polling Mode e Source Port data or symbol data is sent to the Destination Port whenever it is received e Source Port data is always sent to the Destination Port without a Preamble or Postamble e Symbol data is not sent to the Source Port e Destination port data is echoed to the source port in an un polled mode Scanner External Data System Data Destination Data Unpolled mode Ambles needed Custom Mode Custom allows for user defined communication Ambles to Source Echo to Source Output at End of Read Cycle Output at ETX Output at Timeout QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 35 Communication Destination Port Determines the port to which data will be sent External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port AS232 A Ambles bo Source Echo to Source AS232 B Output at End of Read Cycle IELAS Output at ETY Ui iiss l Oukput at Timeout Ether etl P Ambles to Source Enables or Disables the ability to send Preambles and Postambles to the Source port External Data Routing
135. P 35 336301 10 cone EIPVID 1095 Q 830 192 168 0 1 onee QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 91 Configuring Ethernet TCP IP Configuring Ethernet TCP IP cont 5 To change the host computer s connection settings click Properties on the General tab To change TCP IP settings On the General tab click the Properties button to bring up a list of items being used by the current connection On the Local Area Connection Properties dialog double click Internet Protocol TCP IP Local Area Connection Status Support Connection Broadcom 440x 10 100 Integrated 1 day 07 29 28 100 0 Mbps This connection uses the following items A E Fie and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks _ A JZ QoS Packet Scheduler M Intemet Protocol TCP IP Description Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks C Show icon in notification area when connected V Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address x IP address Select Use the following IP a
136. Point to Point Sana E menu items External Data Routing Disabled default 2 Double click the desired Array Communication Modes Disabled parameter and single click Preamble Disabled in the selection box to view Preamble Characters options Postamble A 3 Place the cursor in the selection box scroll down 4 Left click again on the open screen to complete the to the desired setting and selection single click the setting _ 5 Right click on the open screen and select Save to Reader to implement the command in the scanner The command can be sent without saving or sent and saved simultaneously Receive Reader Settings Send and Save Send and Save as Customer Defaults Default Current Menu Settings Default all ESP Settings Advanced Options d QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 2 15 Send Receive Options Send Receive Options To access Receive Save and Default options click the Send Recv button These options can also be reached by right clicking in any of the configuration views my Lap Send Recs Receiving From the Send Recv menu select Receive Reader Settings Caution Selecting this option will upload the scanner s settings If the ESP file has a number of custom settings that must be maintained and downloaded into the scanner these settings will be lost This function is useful for receiving uploading the scanner s settings and saving them
137. Position e Laser Off Position e Laser Framing Status e Laser Power e Laser On Off Status Note Calibration Options and symbology status are not backed up Any changes made to Calibration Options or any new symbologies detected can only be restored by cycling power or sending a Recall command lt Arp gt lt Arc gt lt Zrd gt or lt Zrc gt QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 7 23 Other Serial Utility Commands Calibration Progress Indicators The calibration process occurs in five phases Quick Focus Search Pass Focus Pass Medium Pass and Fine Tune Pass The scanner quickly locates the configuration setup defines a calibration range for the parameters and then tunes the parameters for optimal performance During the calibration process the scanner has a number of ways to communicate its progress to the user The following three types of feedback are the primary ways that the scanner communicates calibration progress LEDs Calibration Progress 20 Search Pass in progress 20 40 Locate Center Focus in progress 20 40 60 Medium Pass in progress 20 40 60 80 Fine Tune Pass in progress 20 40 60 80 100 Calibrated Successfully holds for green flash duration Beeper Green Flash The beeper and green LED flash are used to indicate calibration status as shown in the table below Indicator Status 2 quick beeps Ca
138. QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Example For Big IN Instance 101 Size 44 E Module Properties eip ENHERNET MODULE 1 1 General Connection Module Info Type ETHERNET MODULE Generic Ethernet Module Vendor Allen Bradley Parent Eip Connection Parameters Name Assembly Description Instance Size laput f 01 as a 32 bit Output fiss f 32 bit Comm Format Data DINT ao R eae Configuration f jo E 8 bit Address Host Hame IF Address Status Input C Host Name Status Output Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 6 Configure the Required Packet Interval RPI and click OK 20 ms or slower is strongly recommended 10 ms is the minimum allowed by QX 830 fa RSLugix 5000 MsvauLuvix3561 1756 161 File Edit Yew Search Logic Communications Tools Window Hep allel 2 8lelol T alalalle viel alal Offline J E AUN y Path AB_ETHIP1510 10 5 2535 ackplne y No Forces No Edits al H her test it x sae gt Redundanc 5 4 gt K Favorites AdcOn Alarms it 1er Counte jE amp Controller MscanLagix5561 A Controller Tags E Controller Fauk Handler E Pawer Up Handler d Tasks GSA MainTask H amp MainProgram E unscheduled Programs a Motion Groups 9 Ungrouped Axes Add On Instructions a Data Types Gp User Defined ER Strings Oi Add On Defined Ep Predefi
139. Rate indicates the number or percentage of successful decodes per second achieved by the scanner 1 Click the Test button in ESP s EZ Mode to start the Read Rate test Symbol data and read rate percentage information should appear in the Symbol Information table in the bottom portion of the view The Read Rate LEDs on the side of the QX 830 will indicate the percentage of successful decodes per second 2 Click Stop to end the Read Rate test Note Read Rate can also be tested using the Read Rate interface in Utilities Test Calibrate Decodes per Second Stop Save QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 1 9 Configure the Scanner Step 8 Configure the Scanner Click the App Mode button to make configuration changes to the scanner 4p Mode The following modes are accessible by clicking the buttons at the top of the screen Sf v Q y 7 G6 Ez Mode Autoconnect Send Recy Switch Model Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities e Click the EZ Mode button to return to EZ Mode e Click the Autoconnect button to establish communication e Click the Send Recv button to send or receive commands e Click the Switch Model button to open the model menu or to return to a previous model e Click the Parameters button to show the tabbed tree control views e Click the Setup button to show the tabbed interface views e Click the Terminal button to display decoded symbol data and to
140. Read Green Flash Duration 100 Beeper On Good Read The QX 830 has a beeper and two LED arrays as follows 1 An array of green LEDs projected from the front of the scanner that can be programmed to flash in response to user defined conditions 2 An array of status LEDs on the side of the scanner Green Flash Mode Output Indicators Green Flash Mode On Good Read Green Flash Duration cabled Beeper On Good Read Static Presentation Used as a visual verification that a good read has occurred An array of green LEDs in the front of the scanner can be programmed to flash in response to user defined conditions Disabled Green flash LEDs are disabled On Good Read Green flash LEDs will flash when a good read condition is met or when Matchcode is enabled and a match occurs 5 114 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Static Presentation Static Presentation Mode is used in conjunction with Continuous Read mode When operating in Static Presentation Mode the red LEDs will illuminate while the scanner is searching for a symbol in Continuous Read mode When a symbol is placed in the field of view and a good read occurs the green LEDs will illuminate and stay on for the duration of time set in Green Flash Duration Only one read will occur during that time unless more than one symbol is enabled in Number of Symbols Note If Static Presentation Mode is selected but the scanner
141. Rung Oof 3 app Wer A 111 Allen Bradley Version 16 PLC Setup 15 A 112 Select one CPS instruction per rung the _small_ pt on the left or the _big_pt on the right Keep the one that corresponds to the assembly sizes configured for the module and delete the other fo RSLuyix 5000 MsvauLuvix3561 1756 L61 File Edit Yew Search Logic Communications Tools Window Hep alsm S sale A E a BI TE I aal Offline fi E AUN No Forces b m me No Edits amp E vo Redundancy ig E EA Path A8 _ETHIP 1510 10 5 2335Backplane C v amp 3 4 Htotfic ajja 4 gt Fevoritee A AddOn X Alarms X Bit X Timer Counter A l i Unscheduled Programs amp Motion Groups Ungrouped Axes E Add On Instructions 4 Data Types Gi User Defined A qx_IN_big_udt A qx_IN_small_ude A qx_IO_big_udt i i gx_IO_small_udt A gx_OUT_udt Ap Add On Defined l G Predefined i Module Defined i Trends 1 0 Configuration 1756 Backplane 1756 44 fla 0 1756 L61 MscanLogx5561 f 3 1756 ENBT A ep H a Ethernet H 1756 ENBT A ep ETHERNET MODULE gx I Enter non BOOL fil source oparand Program Tags MainProgram Scope O3MainProgram Show Show All El Main rogram Mainfoutine tei S 3 a MainRoutine Mair jram an Ee Proar choose one CPS for IN and OLT _smal_pt or _big_pt Synchr
142. Serial Cmd lt K221 decodes before output mode gt Default 0 Non Consecutive Options 0 Non Consecutive 1 Consecutive Multisymbol Number of Symbols Serial Cmd lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Default 1 Options 1 to 100 A 38 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Multisymbol Separator Serial Cmd lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Default Comma Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Start Trigger Start Character Non Delimited Serial Cmd lt K229 start character gt Default NULL 0x00 Options Two hex digits representing any ASCII character except lt gt XON and XOFF Stop Trigger Stop Character Non Delimited Serial Cmd lt K230 stop character gt Default NULL 0x00 Options Two hex digits representing any ASCII character except lt gt XON and XOFF Processing Timeout Serial Cmd lt K245 processing timeout gt Default 200 0 2 seconds Options 1 to 65535 Scan Speed Serial Cmd lt K500 scan speed gt Default 30 300 scans per second Options 30 to 140 x10 scans per second Maximum Element Serial Cmd lt K502 maximum element gt Default 400 x 0 01 of scan Options 50 to 5000 Automatic Gain Control AGC Level Serial Cmd lt K504 AGC level AGC mode minimum gain maximum gain gt Default 40 QX 830 model dependent see Microscan Product Pricing Catalog Options 0 to 255 AGC Mode Serial Cmd lt
143. Serial or SAS i Ethernet 6 8 Power Supply Photo Sensor Standalone with QX 1 Standalone without QX 1 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 1 3 Position Scanner and Symbol Step 3 Position Scanner and Symbol e Place a test symbol in a location with as little ambient light as possible e Position the scanner at the focal distance used in the application e Align the test symbol with the scanner s field of view e Tip the scanner relative to the test symbol to avoid glare from specular reflection pe Skew T eo Maximum pitch 50 Symbol aia Maximum skew 40 ar Pitch Scanner 1 4 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Quick Start Step 4 Install ESP ESP Software can be found on the Microscan Tools Drive that is packaged with the QX 830 1 Follow the prompts to install ESP from the Tools Drive 2 Click on the ESP icon to run the program Note ESP can also be installed from the Download Center at www microscan com ESP System Requirements e 233 MHz Pentium PC e Windows 8 7 Vista or XP operating system 32 bit or 64 bit e Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher e 128 MB RAM or greater e 160 MB free disk space 800 x 600 256 color display 1024 x 768 32 bit color recommended QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 1 5 Select Model Step 5 Select Model When ESP is opened the following menu will appear Select a Model Curent Curent Legacy
144. State Disabled Reset Counts Unlateh Output When set to Disabled the Input pin has no impact on operation Disabled Reset Counts When set to Reset Counts a transition to the active state of the Input will cause the scanner to reset the internal counters Unlatch Output This setting is used in combination with any of the three outputs in Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin A transition to the active state will clear any of the three outputs that were previously latched Active State Input 1 Disabled Active pen Active Open Active Closed Active Open Input function is activated when input state is de energized Active Closed Input function is activated when input state is energized QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 131 I O Parameters Output 1 Parameters Output On Output On provides discrete signalling to host software to control external devices such as PLCs and relays It is useful for routing sorting and to prevent mis packaging and mis routing Sets the discrete output functions for specific user selected conditions Allows the user to set the conditions under which an output or outputs will be activated Note If Output On is set to Match or Mismatch a transition Switching will not occur unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory Mismatch or Ho Read Output 1 Parameters Gutput State Mismatch or Wo Read Pul
145. Temperature Service Unit Laser Current High Laser Current Low Low Temperature 5 154 Mismatch Good Read Match Mismatch No Read Trend Analysis Diagnostic Warming In Read Cycle Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Mismatch or No Read Activates discrete output when the data does not match that of the master symbol or the symbol has not been decoded before the end of the read cycle Good Read Match Activates a discrete output when the symbol data matches the master symbol Note To output on Good Read when Matchcode is not enabled enable any output for Match Mismatch Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data does not match that of the master symbol No Read Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data is not decoded before the end of the read cycle Trend Analysis Typically used when successful decodes are occurring but a discrete output is needed to flag a trend in quality issues Activates discrete output when a trend analysis condition is met depending on the trend analysis option enabled Diagnostic Warning Typically used when a discrete indication of a diagnostic condition is needed Activates discrete output when a diagnostic warning condition is met depending on the diagnostic option enabled In Read Cycle Activates a discrete output when the scanner is in a read cycle QX 830 Comp
146. Z Status Disabled 5 24 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Protocol Options S Protocol Selection Point to Point Address Point to Point Protocol Port Point to Point with ATSZCTS Point to Point with sO s 0OFF Point to Point with ATS CTS and SON 0FF ACK ALE Pollina Point to Point Standard Used only with RS 232 or RS 422 Standard Point to Point requires no address and sends the data to the host whenever it is available without a request or handshake from the host Point to Point with RTS CTS A scanner initiates a data transfer with an RTS request to send transmission The host when ready responds with a CTS clear to send and the data is transmitted RTS and CTS signals are transmitted over two dedicated wires as defined in the RS 232 standard Used only with RS 232 Point to Point with RTS CTS request to send clear to send is a simple hardware handshake protocol that allows a scanner to initiate data transfers to the host Point to Point with XON XOFF If an XOFF has been received from the host data will not be sent to the host until the host sends an XON During the XOFF phase the host is free to carry on other chores and accept data from other devices Used only with RS 232 This option enables the host to send the XON and XOFF command as a single byte transmission command of start Q or stop 4S Point to Point with RTS CTS and XON XOFF Used only with RS 232
147. a a 3 10 This section introduces the details of QX 830 hardware and explains how that hardware can be integrated in an application QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 3 1 Cordsets Cordsets The terms cordset and cable are both applicable to industrial connectivity but they are not synonymous Cordsets enable communications and power between scanners and interface devices Cordsets have an M12 connector at one or both ends Examples of cordsets are shown below M12 to M12 Cordset M12 to RJ45 Ethernet Cordset M12 to Photo Sensor Cordset Cables do not have M12 connectors at either end An example of a cable is shown below Cable with flying leads 3 2 QxX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Hardware Installation QX 830 and QX 1 Connectors and Pinouts When deploying a network of scanners and interface devices in an industrial setting it is important to use components whose pin assignments are arranged in a way that avoids communication errors and equipment damage This can be achieved with components that are designed in a logical consistent and easy to implement way The QX 830 has a very simple pin assignment methodology The clearly identified connectors at the back of the unit can be used to receive and bus power and also to send and receive data and commands Connector A on the back of the QX 830 is a 12 pin plug on both Serial and Ethernet models QX 830 Co
148. abled Disabled Enabled Click here to open the Terminal view KEk Read Rate gt lt Counters Device Terminal Utilities Control Differences from Default Master Database Digital Bar Tabbed tree controls Point to Point Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled OMMESTEDNI Point to Point COM1 115 2K M 8 1 Menu Toolbar Menu Toolbar File New Whenever New is selected the default configuration of ESP is loaded Open Save When Save or Save As is selected the ESP configuration is saved to the host computer s hard drive and available wnenever the same file is selected under Open Important When configuration changes are saved to the hard drive these changes are not automatically saved to the scanner The illustration below shows how settings can be saved and received between ESP and the scanner and ESP and the host hard drive Yv 7 os ee Save to Scanner Receive Scanner Be i Settings Import Export Mew Ctrl M Open Chrl 0 Save Chril 5 Save S Frint Ctrl F Import Export Recent File Exit Import converts the ASCII settings from a text file to ESP configuration settings Export converts the active ESP configuration settings to an ASCII text file 2 4 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Using ESP Model The Model dropdown menu shows a list of recent scanners that have been used with ESP When a diffe
149. abled Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 form a range into which the length of the symbol must fall to be considered valid Symbal Length 1 i E 0 128 Symbol Length 2 Useful in applications where Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols of a specific length are required The Symbol Length 2 field is one of two fields against which the decoded symbol is compared before accepting it as valid or rejecting it Important If Range Mode Status is set to Disabled the length of the symbol must match either Symbol Length 2 or Symbol Length 1 to be considered a valid symbol lf Range Mode Status is set to Enabled Symbol Length 2 and Symbol Length 1 form a range into which the length of the symbol must fall to be considered valid Symbol Length 2 E 0 128 Guard Bar Note Whenever Guard Bar is enabled the presence of guard bars is required for decoding to take place Useful when Interleaved 2 of 5 multisymbols are enabled to prevent false data output This typically occurs with highly tilted or skewed symbols A guard bar is a heavy bar at least twice the width of the wide bar surrounding the printed Interleaved 2 of 5 symbol and helping to prevent false reads Disabled izabled Enabled 5 78 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Range Mode Status Important Unless Range Mode is enabled Symbol Length must be set to decode Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols Useful in applications wh
150. act Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 155 I O Parameters Output State Sets the active electrical state of the discrete output Output 3 Parameters Dukput On Mismatch Output State Normally Oper Pulse Width Normally Open Output Mode Normally Closed Pulse Width Sets the time in 10 ms increments that the discrete output remains active Output 3 Parameters 5 156 Gukput On Mismatch Output State Normally Open Pulse width o J00 Seconds QGutput Mode Pulse QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Output Mode Sets the condition in which the discrete output is de activated Output 3 Parameters Gukput On Mismatch Oukput State Normally Open Pulse width S00 Output Mode Pus sisi Pulse Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pir Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re Enter Read Cycle Pulse This is the default mode of operation in which the programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active for the duration of the selected pulse width Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the Input 1 Pin Note Input 1 must be set to Unlatch Output for Latch Mode 1 to function Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and h
151. acters in a transmission are cumulatively added in a column and each resulting odd integer is assigned a 1 and each even integer a 0 two 1s 0 two Os 0 a 1 and a 0 1 The extra LRC character is then appended to the transmission and the receiver usually the host performs the same addition and compares the results Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Protocol Port RS232 A ACK f MAK Options RES MUL REQ MUL STX MUL ETX MUL ACK ACK MAK MAK Polling Mode Options RES EGT REG ENG STA STA ETH ETK ACK ACK MAK MAK Response Timeout LRC Status Disabled D Sa b E d x Enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 31 Communication External Data Routing External Data Routing settings configure the global operation of all external data port settings External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port RS232 4 mbles to Source Disabled Echo to Source Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Disabled Qutouk ak ETA CR Qukoue ab Timeout 20 External Data Routing Options Se External Data Routing 5 32 Disabled Destination Port Disabled Ambles to Source Transparent Echo to Source Half Duplex Output at End of Read Cycle ie Duplex ustom Oukput at ETA R Oukput at Timeout 200 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Transparent Mode When Transparent Mode is enabled the following conditions apply Symbol Data to Source Fixe
152. ameters Depth of Field Enhance The Default Depth of Field Enhance setting of Medium will be ideal for 75 of all depth of field issues Low and High account for the other 25 Note Any setting other than Disabled will increase processing requirements Depth of Field Enhance Medium Disabled Low Medium High Disabled No extra processing of elements is performed to extend depth of field Low Minimal additional processing of elements is performed to extend depth of field The Low setting is not recommended for most applications that require Depth of Field Enhance However some focus and printing issues may make this the optimal setting Medium Some additional processing of elements is performed to extend depth of field The Medium setting is the most likely to be useful in applications that require Depth of Field Enhance High Additional processing of elements is performed to extend depth of field The High setting is not recommended for most applications that require Depth of Field Enhance However some focus and printing issues may make this the optimal setting QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 101 Symbologies Symbol Reconstruction Industrial environments present many data capture challenges some of which are damaged symbols partially covered symbols poorly printed symbols and variation of label placement Symbol quality location and orientation cannot always be controlled Labels c
153. aming Auto Framing Options Laser Framing Enabled The EZ Button has four positions Single Beep Two Beeps Three Beeps and Four Beeps selectable by the length of time the button is held down and indicated by one two three and four beeps in succession Each position can be programmed for any of eight EZ Button Modes QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 119 I O Parameters EZ Button Status ARE Button Enabled Disabled Enabled Trigger Unlatch Outputs Parameter switch Disabled When set to Disabled the EZ Button does not function Enabled When selected the EZ Button is enabled and the function of each button position is selected by the EZ Button Modes command Trigger When selected the EZ Button acts as a trigger for the scanner to start and end read cycles All other button operations are inactive In External The read cycle endures for as long as the EZ Button is pressed unless a Level timeout occurs and End of Read Cycle Mode is set to Timeout In External As with External Level External Edge allows a read cycle to be initiated Edge by pressing the EZ Button but unlike External Level the read cycle ends with a good read output a timeout or a new trigger Unlatch Outputs In this configuration the EZ Button will unlatch any logic outputs that have been latched Parameter Switch The parameter switch toggles between custom defaults and power on settings The condition
154. an be torn partially obscured overprinted or underprinted due to variations in print mechanisms For industrial tracking and traceability to be reliable symbols must be decoded regardless of damage label tilt or any other discontinuities The QX 830 features X Mode technology which allows the scanner to reconstruct data from damaged or poorly positioned symbols by stepping though the elements bars in multiple stages and then combining the successfully decoded regions into completed symbol data output as shown in the simplified example below Note Symbol Reconstruction functions with Code 39 Code 128 Interleaved 2 of 5 and UPC EAN symbols Scan Line 1 Scan Line 14 Yili KANAA 123456 7 8 9 10 1112 1314 segments 1 m 2 z 3 mm 4 m8 5 mm eel 6 nel 7 ees 8 oo E 9 E m E 10 E 5 11 lo 12 lO 13 E E 14 n Result mm mm mm 5 102 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Symbol Reconstruction Redundancy Symbol Reconstruction Redundancy Disabled a Disabled Low Medium High Disabled When Symbol Reconstruction Redundancy is Disabled the scanner will not attempt to reconstruct symbols across multiple scan lines Low When Symbol Reconstruction Redundancy is set to Low the scanner will attempt to reconstruct symbols across multiple scan lines Only the minimum amount of redundancy checking will be appli
155. anguage Options S Scanners and Cameras EI Scheduled Tasks D Security Center Dlsoundmax Sounds and Audio Devices g Speech 43 System bl Taskbar and Start Menu 83 User Accounts Windows Firewall i sua Wireless Network Setup Wizard lt Comments Adjust your computer settings for vision hearing and mobility Installs and troubleshoots hardware Install or remove programs and Windows components Configure administrative settings for your computer Calibrate monitor for consistent color create ICC profile Set up Windows to automatically deliver important updates Set the date time and time zone for your computer Change the appearance of your desktop such as the background screen saver colors font sizes and screen resolution Customize the display of files and Folders change file associations and make network files available offline Add change and manage fonts on your computer Add remove and configure game controller hardware such as joysticks and gamepads Configure your Internet display and connection settings Customize your keyboard settings such as the cursor blink rate and the character repeat rate Microsoft Office Outlook Profiles Customize your mouse settings such as the button configuration double click speed mouse pointers and motion speed Specify the CD DYD burn rights for the Nero Family of products Connects to other computers networks and the Internet Configure your NVIDIA nVview De
156. anner User Manual Appendices Configuring Ethernet TCP IP cont 3 The Local Area Connection Status dialog will appear To check the host computer s connection settings click Details on the Support tab To verify connection status _ Local Area Connection Status eee On the Support tab click the Details General Support button to bring up a list of Network Connection Details Connection status ZAN Address Type Assigned by DHCP IP Address 162 148 88 35 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Network Connection Details Network Connection Details Property Value Default Gateway 162 148 26 1 Physical Address 00 0C F1 EC 61 D5 IP Address 162 148 88 35 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Default Gateway 162 148 26 1 DHCP Server 162 148 25 71 Lease Obtained 11 3 2008 10 53 03 AM Lease Expires 2 1 2009 10 53 03 AM Windows did not detect problems with this connection If you cannot connect click Repair DNS Servers 162 148 25 71 162 148 25 70 198 6 1 3 WINS Server 4 A connected QX 830 s default address information can be verified in ESP by clicking the Search button in the Connection Wizard Compare the imager s IP address to the host s IP address to determine whether or not they are in the same subnet range this can be determined by your I T department if you are unsure IP Address 192 168 0 100 C RS 232 Ethernet TCP Port 1 2001 00 0B 43 05 F4 D4 MODEL Qx 830 DESCRIPTION QX 830 for SQE AP
157. anner User Manual 3 5 QX 830 and QX 1 Connectors and Pinouts Expected Power and Ground Connections for Proper Operation SCANNER INTERFACE In Line Filtering SF Shunt Filtering POWER 3 TERMINAL POWER RETURN POWER EARTH SUPPLY Q 7e POWER GHD Q POWER 2 TERMINAL POWER SUPPLY RETURN EARTH local to power source connected to RETURN at main power panel COMM SGHLS SIGHAL GHD IF CONDUCTIVE MOUNTING BRACKET IS GROUNDED TO EARTH POTENTIAL THEN POTENTIAL MUST BE SAME AS EARTH AT POWER SOURCE MOUNTING BRACKET Notes e Ensure that mounting bracket Earth is at the same potential as power source Earth e Supply Return and Earth ground must be stable low impedance reference points e 2 Terminal Power Supply must still provide an Earth connection to the scanner e Signal Ground can be used for communications and or discrete signal ground reference It must not be used as Power Ground or Earth Ground 3 6 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Hardware Installation QX 1 Interface Device The QX 1 Interface Device s receptacles are physically the same as those on the QX 830 but they do not have explicit pin assignments The QX 1 allows users to bus power and communications as required by the application QX 1 Interface Device Pin Assignment 1 10
158. applicable specifications and instructions QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Ix Statement of ROHS Compliance Statement of ROHS Compliance All Microscan readers with a G suffix in the FIS number are ROHS Compliant All compliant readers were converted prior to March 1 2007 All standard accessories in the Microscan Product Pricing Catalog are ROHS Compliant except 20 500013 01 and 98 000039 02 These products meet all the requirements of Directive 2002 95 EC European Parliament and the Council of the European Union for ROHS compliance In accordance with the latest requirements our ROHS Compliant products and packaging do not contain intentionally added Deca BDE Perfluorooctanes PFOS or Perfluorooctanic Acid PFOA compounds above the maximum trace levels To view the document stating these requirements please visit http eur lex europa eu LexUriServ LexUriServ do uri CELEX 32002L0095 EN HTML and http eur lex europa eu LexUriServ LexUriServ do uri OJ L 2006 372 0032 0034 EN PDF Please contact your sales manager for a complete list of Microscan s ROHS Compliant products This declaration is based upon information obtained from sources which Microscan believes to be reliable and from random sample testing however the information is provided without any representation of warranty expressed or implied regarding accuracy or correctness Microscan does not specifically run any analysis on our raw materials or
159. as a file for future use For example if the scanner has settings that must not change Receive Reader Settings would load those settings to ESP and save them in an ESP file for later retrieval Receiving the scanner s settings will also assure that any unwanted subsequent changes in ESP will not be saved Saving Send No Save lt A gt Saves ESP settings to current memory Receive Reader Settings Save to Reader Send Mo Save Send and Save Send and Save lt Z gt DE BUE creen wend serena Send and Save as Customer Defaults f Default all ESP Settings Activates all changes in current memory and saves to the scanner Advanced Options i for power on Send and Save as Customer Defaults lt Zc gt Saves default settings for quick retrieval This option will be visible only if Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults is checked in ESP Preferences 2 16 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Using ESP Defaulting When Default Current Menu Settings or Default all ESP Settings are selected only the ESP settings are defaulted Advanced Options Send Current View This is the same as Save to Reader gt Send No Save except that only the commands in the current configuration Save to Reader tree are sent Receive Reader Settings Default Current Menu Settings Default all Settings Send Current Command This is the same as Send Current View except that it saves only the command that is current
160. as one combined LED as do NET and LNK Status Indicators PHY Activity Bar Graph Tit 1 PHY Activity ioe Protocol Activit Disabled When set to Disabled the MOD ACT and NET LNK LEDs are always off Note All green and red LEDs will turn on briefly during power on or reset to confirm that they are functioning PHY Activity If Ethernet is available LNK Solid green when transceiver is linked ACT Blinking green when transceiver detects Tx or Rx activity Otherwise for all RS232 and RS422 485 activity LNK Blinking green with Tx data activity ACT Blinking green with Rx data activity Note Red is never turned on Protocol Activity If EtherNet IP is enabled MOD Module status per EtherNet IP specification NET Network status per EtherNet IP specification Otherwise the MOD and NET LEDs are always off 5 126 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Bar Graph Read Rate Auto Calibration Bar Code Configuration and Read Cycle Result all share the Bar Graph 20 100 LEDs Status Indicators PHY Activity FENCE F 4 Rate Good Read NOl Disabled Tio Read Rate Good Read I O 1 I O 1 always shows the combined state of the discrete outputs If any output is active the I O 1 LED will be on Status Indicators PHY Activity Bar Graph Read Rate a output Active NO Z2 I O 2 I O 2 always shows the state of the hardware input trigger If the trigg
161. ata from sources external to the scanner External Source Processing Mode Command Disabled Command Command Command enables command processing in the scanner Data Data enables RS 422 as a data source port Note The data path between in the source port and out the source port is always two way Data is copied from source data ports and all those source ports data is transmitted to the destination port and from the destination port to the source port 5 12 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Ethernet When using Ethernet to deploy QX 830s in an application the host computer must be in the same IP range as the devices Network settings are accessible in Windows from the Control Panel The steps below show how TCP IP settings can be configured 1 From the Windows Start Menu open Control Panel and double click Network Connections amp Control Panel DER a File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Q X E Search Folders E Address i Control Panel LRE Name Accessibility Options S Add Hardware Add or Remove Programs Q Administrative Tools taj Adobe Gamma 7 Automatic Updates Date and Time a Display Folder Options amp Fonts T Game Controllers S Internet Options akeyboard Dail Mouse nero BurnRights Network Connections SI NVIDIA nview Desktop Manager Phone and Modem Options Power Options Printers and Faxes E Regional and L
162. ated Pin Function Wire Color 1 Trigger White 2 Power Brown 3 Default Green 4 New Master Yellow 5 Port 3 422 485 TxD Gray 6 Port 3 422 485 RxD Pink 7 Ground Blue 8 Input Common Red 9 Port 2 TxD Port 1 RTS Black 10 Port 2 RxD Port 1 CTS Violet 11 Port 3 422 485 TxD Gray Pink 12 Port 3 422 485 RxD Red Blue Pin Function 1 Terminated 2 Terminated 3 Terminated 4 Port 4 TX 5 Port 4 RX 6 Port 4 TX 7 Terminated 8 Port 4 RX QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices QX 1 Connectors Connector T on the QX 1 Interface Device is the Trigger connector Connectors 1 2 and 3 can be used to bus power and data as required by the application The connectors on the QX 1 interface device physically mirror those on the QX 830 scanner but they do not have explicit pin assignments The QX 1 connectors take on the communications and power roles that are assigned to them Trigger 4 _ 10 28V Trigger New Master 2 2 Trigger New Master Input 1 Common Input 1 Common QX 1 Tri c i 3 Ground rigger Connector 4 Trigger 4 pin Socket Power Switch Trigger Switch COMMI O L Tn TRIGGER QX 1 Wiring Diagram Connectors 1 and 3 are 12 pin plugs and Connector 2
163. ated in the Bar Code Dialog by typing the text to be encoded This is a useful tool for creating configuration symbols allowing the user to configure the scanner by reading the user created symbols Bar Code Dialog Bar Code Configuration Pririt Save As Drag specific configuration values from the control tree directly into this field to Bar Code alue gt lt encode new symbols Choose a spatial l orientation forthe Rotation 0 Degrees New new symbol Caption Create a caption w Same As Bar Code Value for the symbol that matches or C Specify describes the encoded data Add start configuration code Add end configuration code Save Settings Differences from Default Settings The symbol will be displayed in the field at the bottom of the Bar Code Dialog 2 14 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Using ESP Navigating in ESP To change scanner settings or to access the Setup Terminal or Utilities views click the App Mode button aoe 400 Mode To return to EZ Mode click the EZ Mode button 3 E Mode To make changes to configuration settings in the tree controls Parameters ESP Values gt Communications RS232 A RS232 B Enabled RS422 Disabled The X Ethernet Enabled indicates 1 Left click on the to expand Protocol Selection
164. ation commands K810 812 It is not necessary for Input 1 to be enabled External Output Control Bit Pin Name 0 Out1 1 Out2 2 Out3 3 31 Reserved 0 open the output contact 1 close the output contact Note Not operational at this time QX 830 OUT Assembly 0xC7 199 decimal Serial Command OUT PLC gt QX 830 Size of Data Field Data Type Type Elements Field Name QO U32 1 Length of Command String Field 1 1 U8 256 Command String Accessible only by unconnected explicit message This assembly enables the PLC to send serial commands to the device similar to a serial port Known Issues and Limitations 1 External Output Control has not been implemented yet 2 There is currently no way to receive serial command responses back from the QX 830 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 99 Using EtherNet IP Programming Flow Charts Triggered by PLC symbol data required timeout or decode ends read cycle Setup Read Cycle Trigger Mode External Edge or External Level Symbol Data Output Enabled globally and for EtherNet IP When to Output As Soon As Possible End of Read Cycle Timeout No Read message Enabled Triggered by PLC Barcode data required Timeout or decode ends readcycle Init Clear OUT Command ta 0 oo Wait for system event begin bar code reading Copy IN Sequence to PrevSeg Set OUT command Trigger
165. ation record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 Status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 10 Options 1 to 128 EAN 128 Status Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Required QxX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 51 Serial Commands Output Format Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Standard Options 0 Standard 1 Application Application Record Separator Status Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format
166. atus for symbol 10 Status Serial Cmd lt K742 symbol number status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Assign parameters to specified symbol QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 75 Serial Commands Output Format Status Serial Cmd lt K743 output format status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output Filter Configuration Filter Number Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Options 1 to 10 Symbology Type Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default 0 Options 0 Any type 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 2 Code 39 3 Code 128 4 Codabar 5 UPC 6 PDF417 7 EAN 128 8 Code 93 9 Pharmacode 10 GS1 DataBar RSS 11 MicroPDF417 12 Composite Length Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default 0 Options 0 to 128 Wildcard Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default 0x2A Options Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters A 76 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Placeholder Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildca
167. ayer within the standard Ethernet interface Ethernet TCP IP EtherNet IP is common in control systems and PLCs especially in the United States The highlighted areas below demonstrate how an Ethernet daisy chain can be arranged Ethernet enabled scanners can also be set up in standalone configurations or multiple Ethernet enabled scanners along a production or packaging line can be connected to Ethernet A m lt To Power Ethernet J 1 L Eam gt O gt D gt gt H T 5 PS eae i le Supply To Power Hh QX 1 dL Multidrop E E Supply Concentrator Host or PLC EtherNet IP and CIP are trademarks of the Open DeviceNet Vendors Association 3 12 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual E 4 Scanner Setup Contents ANNO MNO caress cee Scents sedae eed eset senees chan ne ade acne saeeeamesieaeeeaacensanceceewanemsaaeeep ce sexected aeons eee 4 2 COMMOUP AMON Data asE srncie rea i RA cite b nd anp sees Ea kaa erii ARER ERa aaas 4 4 Ordered OUtpUt lt i ee ee ee eee eee ene er AAAs KAn Ean E ANRE R ATEREA ee E ESE EITEN ee pee ee 4 6 10 1618 ONA e cS ene me Ret Se ec ee Oe 4 10 This section describes ESP s four Setup interfaces Calibration Configuration Database Ordered Output and Output Format Each interface allows the user to make changes to scanner configuration quickly and easily QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 4 1 Calibration Calibration Click th
168. bars If set to All Wide all bars will be considered as wide bars If set to Fixed Threshold it will use the fixed threshold value to determine whether the bars are narrow or wide The Bar Width Status setting will be ignored when the scanner is able to tell the difference between the narrow and the wide bars Bar Width Status Fised Threshold Direction Specifies the direction in which a symbol can be read Direction Formard Forward Reverse Fixed Threshold Value Used when Bar Width Status is set to Fixed Threshold Defines the minimum difference in pixels that will distinguish a narrow bar from a wide bar Fixed Threshold Value 1 65535 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 89 Symbologies GS1 DataBar Note GS1 DataBar symbologies were previously known as Reduced Space Symbology or RSS DataBar Expanded Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 14 DataBar Limited Disabled DataBar Omnidirectional Disabled DataBar Expanded Note DataBar Expanded was previously known as RSS Expanded Used to encode primary and supplementary data in retail point of sale and other applications DataBar Expanded is a variable length symbology that can encode supplementary information in addition to the 14 digit EAN item identification number and is capable of encoding up to 74 numeric or 41 alphabetic characters Where appropriate use 1 non stac
169. begin when a trigger change of state from an external sensing device is received The read cycle persists until the object moves out of the sensor range and the active trigger state changes again Important Level and Edge apply to the active logic state Negative or Positive that exists while the object is in a read cycle between the rising edge and the falling edge Rising edge is the trigger signal associated with the appearance of an object Falling edge is the trigger signal associated with the subsequent disappearance of the object This applies both to External Level and External Edge External Edge Initiate Read Cycle p 7 Object 1 moving in front of the detector beam causes a change in pi the trigger state which initiates the Object a read cycle detector Initiate Second Read Cycle Object 2 moving in front of the detector beam causes another gt n e change in the trigger state This sig nal initiates a new read cycle and Object ends the previous read cycle unless detector T Timeout is enabled and a good read or timeout has not occured This mode is highly recommended in any application where conveying speed is constant or if spacing object size or read cycle timeouts are consistent External Edge as with Level allows the read cycle active state to begin when a trigger change of state from an external sensing device is received However the passing of an object out of sensor range does not
170. bled Transition Counter 14 Maximum Element 400 Scan Width Enhance Disabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 59 Read Cycle Tracking Useful in fine tuning tracking or when conditions of poor contrast or blurred bar edges exist Tracks peak signals and selects an amplitude reference point to sample the analog signals for converting to digital Note Tracking is optimized at the factory before shipment in some cases the default value might not be 40 Reader Setup Gain Level Tracking Scan Speed Automatic Sain Control AGC AGC Sampling Mode Acs Minimum Acs Maximum Symbol Detect Status Transition Counter Maximum Element Scan Width Enhance Scan Speed 40 40 5 127 a Continuous 0 229 Disabled 14 400 Disabled Allows the user to set the number of scans per second by controlling the motor speed of the spinning mirror in the scanner Reader Setup Gain Level Tracking Scan Speed Automatic Gain Control AGC AGC Sampling Mode Acs Minimum Acs Maximum Symbol Detect Status Transition Counter Maximum Element Scan Width Enhance 5 60 40 40 500 1 s00 1400 Continuous 0 259 Disabled 14 400 Disabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Automatic Gain Control AGC Sampling Mode Disabled Fixed Gain When AGC Sampling Mode is Disabled the first parameter in the Gain Level command defines the Fixed Gain used to ampl
171. borted data is flushed Appendices A 81 Protocol Commands Setup 2 RES 0x00 disabled REQ 0x00 disabled STX 0x00 disabled ETX 0x00 disabled ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST_TX lt K141 0 gt a SCANNER_TX ACK Transfer 2 HOST_TX lt K141 gt B SCANNER_TX ACK SCANNER_TX lt K141 0 gt a HOST_TX ACK Error Condition Transfer 1 HOST TX lt k141 0 gt x BAD LRC SCANNER_TX NAK HOST_TX lt K141 0 gt a GOOD LRC SCANNER_TX ACK A 82 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Setup 3 RES 0x00 disabled REQ 0x00 disabled STX 0x28 ETX 0x29 ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST_TX lt K141 0 gt H SCANNER_TX ACK Transfer 2 HOST_TX lt K141 gt k SCANNER _TX ACK SCANNER TX lt K141 4M gt w HOST_TX ACK QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 83 Protocol Commands Setup 4 RES 0x21 T REQ 0x3D STX 0x28 ETX 0x29 ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST_TX lt K141 0 gt H SCANNER_TX ACK Transfer 2 HOST_TX lt K100 gt n SCANNER_TX ACK HOST _TX a I SCANNER_TX lt K100 8 0 0 1 gt X HOST TX ACK SCANNER_TX T Error Condition Transfer 1 HOST_TX lt K141 0 gt H SCANNER_TX ACK HOST _TX lt K100 gt n SCANNER_TX ACK HOST_TX P SCANNER_TX lt K100 8 0 0 1 gt X timeout reached SCANNER_TX timeout r
172. calibration if enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 7 25 Other Serial Utility Commands Outline of Full Auto Calibration Process continued 20 21 22 23 24 7 26 Take initial read rate at current settings Calibrate video select new gain and tracking settings Take final read rate with new gain and tracking settings If the final read rate is lt 2 video calibration fails if final read rate is gt or the initial read rate video calibration passes and new settings take effect if final read rate is lt initial read rate video settings revert to pre calibration values This is not a considered a failure all other settings calibrated by other calibration processes motor speed laser power etc will still take effect Perform laser framing if enabled If symbology detection is enabled update user NOVRAM with any new symbologies detected during calibration Note If any step in the calibration process fails or the user cancels calibration the remainder of calibration is canceled and all user settings are restored to their pre calibration state This does not apply to symbology status when symbology detection is enabled Any symbologies that are decoded during calibration will be enabled even if any other calibration processes fail or are canceled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Utilities Bar Code Configuration Mode Bar Code Configuration Mode is a way of pr
173. canLagix5561 Controller Tags Controller Fauk Handler 3 Pawer Up Handler amp Tasks MainTask 3 amp MainProgram Program Tags MainRoutins Unscheduled Programs amp Motion Groups Ungrouped Axes Add on Instructions amp Data Types Si User Defined HA gx_command fon qx_device_status Qx_extemal_inputs i qx_extemal_outputs i qx_IN_big_udt EA qx_IN_small_udt of qx_I0_big_udt El gx_IO_small_udt MA qx_OUT_udt Strings E stri28 if stre M sTRING Ready 4 Hf ct tet aek P bef orte A 3 Scope Eg MainProgram hd Name m qs_I0_bin pt Shaw Show All gt Description IENA gs I0_big udt qx_I0_big_pt IN anI qx_IN_big_udt choose one CPS for IN and OUT _sm qx 10_big_ptIN OUT_echo TAN qx DUT _udt i q _10_big_ptIN OUT_echo utertag AOSS o o E Decimal DINT E gt qx_l0_big_ptiIN OUT_echo command Ceara gx_command qx_l0_big_ptIN OUT_echo ext_out erent qx_external_oulputs qx_l0_big_pt IN ext_in tepi qx_external_inputs qx l0_big_pt IN ext_out Hope 4 kl qx_external_oulputs gx_ O_big_pt IN device_status eeh gx_device_status qx_ 0_big_pt IN sequence 3 Decimal DINT qs I0_big_pt IN trigger_ent 3 Decimal DINT qx_ O_big_pt IN decode_malch_cnt 3 Decmal DINT qg l0_big_pt IN mismatch_ent 0 Decimal DINT qx_I0_big_pt IN noread_cnt 0 Decimal DINT E qx_JO_big_pt IN syrb_str 123456789012vF000v 0118 4 1128
174. ccurs and Matchcode is enabled Se Mismatch Replace Disabled Replacement String meer Enabled Replacement String User defined data string that when enabled replaces symbol data whenever a mismatch occurs Mismatch Replace Disabled Replacement String MI MATCH 5 176 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Diagnostics nil 400 Mode 7 Sy Scanner Parameters Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display the tree control tabs Then click the Diagnostics tab to display the Diagnostics tree control Parameters 7 Parameters Diagnostics Counts Read only Hours Since Reset Read only Laser High Laser Low High Temperature Threshold Low Temperature Threshold Service Message Di Skatys Service Message Threshold Resolution User Defined Mame Communication Read Cycle Symbologies O Matchcode Diagnostics ESP Values The indicates nau E that the setting Disabled is the default Enabled Seconds Ox 830 To open nested options single click the To change a setting double click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options Note Matchcode settings can also be sent to the scanner from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format Refer to the Diagnostics section of Appendix E QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 177
175. cho to Source Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Disabled Qutouk at ETX CR Output at Timeout 0 200 Seconds QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 37 Communication Array Communication Modes Array Communication Modes Disabled Source RS232 B Daisy Chain ID Status Disabled Daisy Chain ID 1 Mode Daisy Chain When set to Daisy Chain follows Microscan Daisy Chain protocol Note Daisy Chain can also be autoconfigured by sending the Daisy Chain Autoconfigure serial command Disabled Se Array Communication Modes Aoures Disabled Daisy Chain ID Status Source Defines the communication port Array Communication Modes Disabled Source S232 B Daisy Chain ID Status P772 A Daisy Chain ID RS232 B RS422 TCF Fort 1 TCP Fort 2 Daisy Chain ID Status When enabled the scanner will append a two character prefix to each scanner in the array This allows the user to identify which scanner sent the data Note Daisy Chain ID will automatically disable Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information and Diagnostics Output for the Source Port Symbol Data Output will be automatically enabled Extra Symbol Information will be automatically enabled and Diagnostics Output will be automatically disabled for the Destination Port Array Communication Modes Disabled Source RS232 B Daisy Chain ID Skatus Disabled Daisy Chain ID nesbled Enabled 5 38 QX 830 Com
176. cket 1 m 61 000153 02 6 QX Power Supply 100 240VAC 24VDC M12 12 pin Socket 97 000012 01 7 QX Cordset Host Ethernet M12 8 pin Plug Ultra Lock to RJ45 1m 61 000160 01 or QX Cordset Host Ethernet M12 8 pin Plug Screw On to RJ45 1m 61 000160 02 8 QX Photo Sensor M12 4 pin Plug NPN Dark On 2 m 99 000020 02 Note Additional cordsets and accessories are available in the Microscan Product Pricing Catalog Note The QX 830 does not require an Ethernet crossover cordset because the scanner itself performs automatic internal crossover transmit to receive switching Microscan offers a standard straight through un crossed Ethernet cordset 61 000160 01 or 02 Important Do not attempt to power more than four scanners with a single power supply in a daisy chain configuration Add a QX 1 and one power supply for every four additional scanners in the daisy chain E gt H 6 8 Power Supply Photo Sensor Standalone with QX 1 Serial or Power Supply Ethernet Standalone without QX 1 Hardware Required Caution Be sure that all connections are secure BEFORE applying power to the system Always power down BEFORE disconnecting any cables 1 2 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Quick Start Step 2 Connect the System Important If you are connecting Ultra Lock cordsets to the QX 830 and QX 1 align the pins first and then push the connector into
177. cle QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 93 Symbologies MicroPDF417 Used for labelling small items that need large data capacity A variant of PDF417 a very efficient and compact stacked symbology that can encode up to 250 alphanumeric characters or 366 numeric characters per symbol Micra POF 417 Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 10 Fixed Symbol Length Status When Enabled the scanner will reject any MicroPDF417 symbol that does not match the Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled izabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Used to increase data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted When enabled the MicroPDF417 symbol must contain the same number of characters as the symbol length setting before it can be considered a good read The scanner will ignore any symbol not having the specified length Fixed Symbol Length i 0 1 128 Note Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Symbol Length to take effect 5 94 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Composite When set to Enabled or Required will decode the 2D composite component of a linear symbol The linear symbol can be DataBar 14 DataBar Expanded DataBar Limited EAN 128 UPC A EAN 13 EAN 8 and UPC E Composite Disabled Separator Status Disabled Separator i Enabled If Compo
178. ct Industrial Scanner User Manual A 85 Protocol Commands Error Condition 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data SCANNER_TX Ox1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached SCANNER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again HOST TX NAK Host rejects data frame Retry Event SCANNER_TX Ox1C STX lt T O0000 gt ETX Unit sends again HOST TX ACK Host receives data SCANNER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 The protocol makes 3 retry attempts before data is flushed and transfer is aborted A 86 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Setup 2 Address 0x01 translates to Poll Req 0x1C Unit Select 0x1D RES 0x04 REQ 0x05 STX 0x02 ETX 0x03 ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1D REQ Select Unit 1 to receive data SCANNER_TX 0x1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST _TX STX lt T gt ETX LRC SCANNER_TX 0x1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST_TX RES Terminate Transfer 2 Transfer 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data SCANNER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC SCANNER_TX ACK HOST_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 Starting with a RES ensures a clean transaction without leftovers from the previous
179. cter AIAG Serial Cmd lt K454 status D1 status1 I D2 status2 D3 status3 D4 status4 D5a D5b ID5c status5 D6 status6 D7 status 7 D8 status8 ID9 status9 D10 status710 D11 status11 D12 status 12 gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Depth of Field Enhance Serial Cmd lt K456 mode gt Default 2 Medium Options 0 Disabled 1 Low 2 Medium 3 High Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Status Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap tixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Output Status Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 46 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Large Intercharacter Gap Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII
180. ction Wizard Compare the scanner s IP address to the host s IP address to determine whether or not they are in the same range this can be determined by your I T department if you are unsure IP Address 162 148 88 IP Address 192 168 0 100 C RS 232 RS 232 Ethernet TCP Port 1 2001 Ethemet TCP Port 1 2001 00 0B 43 05 F4 D4 MODEL Q 830 DESCRIPTION QX 830 for SQE APP 35 338301 10 Borah EIPVID 1095 Q 830 192 168 0 1 oro ore 5 14 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Ethernet cont 5 To change the host computer s connection settings click Properties on the General tab To change TCP IP settings On the General tab click the Properties button to bring up a list of items being used by the current connection On the Local Area Connection Properties dialog double click Internet Protocol TCP IP Local Area Connection Status Connection 1 day 07 29 28 HB Broadcom 440x 10 100 Integrated 100 0 Mbps This connection uses the following items v 3 File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Z JZ QoS Packet Scheduler M Intemet Protocol TCP IP v lt E Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Description C Show icon in notification area when connected V Notify me when this connection
181. d lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Large Intercharacter Gap Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Length Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 10 Options 1 to 128 Check Character Type Codabar Serial Cmd lt K4 71 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Mod 16 2 NW7 Mod 11 3 Both Mod 16 and NW 7 Mod 11 Check Character Output Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter ga
182. d H Disabled E Z Disabled E 6 Disabled E D Disabled E C Disabled E L Disabled E x Disabled 5 96 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Quiet Zone Used when the leading and trailing edges of the symbols are smaller than the standard margin or other objects encroach into the margins Allows the scanner to read 1D symbols with quiet zones less than 8 times the width of the narrow bar element The Quiet Zone is the space at the leading and trailing ends of a symbol Each quiet zone can be as narrow as only five times the width of the narrow bar element when Quiet Zone is Enabled and set to Narrow or Narrow Enhanced Quiet Zone Marrow Enhanced Standard Marrow Standard Enhanced Narow Enhanced Note Do not use Narrow or Narrow Enhanced when Large Intercharacter Gap is enabled for Code 39 Note Any Quiet Zone setting other than Standard will increase processing requirements Standard The scanner locates symbols using a standard 8x Quiet Zone requirement Narrow The scanner locates symbols using a 5x Quiet Zone requirement Standard Enhanced The scanner locates symbols using an enhanced algorithm for standard 8x Quiet Zones The enhanced algorithm has a higher tolerance for leading edge noise and is particularly useful for high density symbols Narrow Enhanced The scanner locates symbols using an enhanced algorithm for 5x Quiet Zones The enhanced
183. d or activating the New Master input on connector A When activated the New Master function instructs the reader to store the next decode in the master symbol database Disable Scanning 8 Operates the same as the lt H gt and lt I gt commands A transition from 0 to 1 is the same as sending an lt I gt command which issues a disable event A transition from 1 to 0 is the same thing as sending an lt H gt command which issues an enable event Note that the most recent command either lt H gt or lt I gt serial commands or the Camera Action DisableScanning command will always override the previous scanning disable state To verify scanning status observe the DeviceStatus field in asm Ox65 A 98 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Clear Read Cycle Report and Counters 16 Trigger Decode Match Mismatch Noread Decoded Data string and Sequence A transition from O0 to 1 is similar to sending the commands lt U gt lt W gt lt Y gt lt O gt which clear the historical read cycle counters Also the Sequence counter and Decoded Data string will go to 0 Note that if this command is received while a read cycle is active execution of the command will be delayed until the read cycle has ended and the read cycle s information will probably be lost Unlatch Outputs 17 lf any outputs are configured for Unlatch on Input1 a transition from O to 1 will unlatch the output See configur
184. d Gain operation QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 67 Read Cycle Laser Setup Laser Setup allows the user to configure Laser On Off Laser Framing Status Laser On Position Laser Off Position and Laser Power Laser Setup Laser On OFF Disabled Laser Framing Status Disabled Laser On Position 10 Laser OFF Position 35 Laser Power Medium Laser On Off When Enabled the laser is On only during the read cycle When Disabled the laser operates continuously Note A serial trigger or external trigger must be enabled for Laser On Off to take effect Laser Setup Laser On OFF Disabled Laser Framing Status Disabled Laser On Position Laser OFF Position 95 Laser Power Medium Laser Framing Status When Enabled the laser will be off for the duration of the Laser Off time beginning from the start of the read cycle and the laser will then be on for the duration of the Laser On time Laser Setup Laser On OFF Disabled Laser Framing Status Disabled Laser On Position Disabled Laser OFF Position Enabled Laser Power Medium Laser On Position The duration of Laser Off time Laser On Position is a ratio of the total scan width with increments equal to 1 100th of the total scan width Laser Setup Laser On CFF Disabled Laser Framing Status Disabled Laser On Position i U 10 90 Laser OFF Position 95 Laser Power Medium 5 68 QX 830 Compact Indus
185. d to Enabled Ambles to Source Fixed to Disabled Echo to Source Fixed to Enabled Output at End of Read Cycle Fixed to Enabled Output at ETX Fixed to Enabled with user defined characters Default character will be used if this setting is set to Disabled Output at Timeout Fixed to Enabled with user defined timeout Default time will be used if this setting is set to Disabled Mode of Operation e Source Port data will echo back to itself e Source Port data will always pass through even when the Destination Port is in Polling Mode with the host e Whenever ETX is received on the Source Port or symbol data is generated the data will be send to the Destination Port with its data appearing between the Preamble and symbol data e Source Port data will always be sent to the Destination Port with a Preamble and Postamble e Symbol data will be sent to the Source Port on a good read without Preamble or Postamble in Point to Point protocol even if the Destination Port is in Polling Mode with the host e Destination Port data always echoes to the Source Port even if the Destination Port is in Polling Mode Scanner ays OF Host Tal Other Devices lt n OO External Data System Data 4 Destination Data Ambles needed Preamble needed O QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 33 Communication Half Duplex Mode When Half Duplex Mode is enabled th
186. data is selected that data will be overwritten by the new decoded data when this command is used QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 7 13 Master Database Request New Master Status Informs the user when a new master symbol is pending and which position it is in Returns the position in the master symbol database that will be loaded on the next read Send the lt NEWM gt command from ESP s Terminal The scanner returns lt NEWM next master to load gt Once a symbol has been read and loaded the status will be cleared and the response will be lt NEWM 0 gt 7 14 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Utilities Delete Master Symbol Data Master symbol data can be deleted using ESP 1 Click the Utilities button to access the master symbol 2 Click the Master Database tab and double click the symbol number to be deleted 3 Delete text and click OK Master Symbol Database Size M Matcheode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index 5 Recerve Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Master Symbol Data Master Symbol 1 Master Symbol 2 Master Symbol 3 Master Symbol 4 mn Fe wo Po Master 5 Symbol Data Delete test in this feld Cancel QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 7 15 Digital Bar Code Digital Bar Code Utilities Click the Utilities button and then the Digital Bar Code tab to display the Digital Bar Code view Cl
187. ddress to set EE AEI the IP Address Subnet and Gateway Subnet mask 5 255 0 0 Default gateway Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Altemate DNS server A 92 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Appendix Using EtherNet IP Overview The EIP interface will be identified as a Generic Device 0x00 The interface is designed to support remote serial transmit and receive using explicit unconnected messaging Necessary Tools The following tools are helpful for configuring the EIP EtherNet IP Messaging Tool can be a PLC or Software Tool must be capable of sending explicit messages and establishing Class 1 connections EIPScan is an example of such a tool Terminal emulation or serial communication tool that can connect to a TCP socket such as HyperTerminal e ESP Microscan s Easy Setup Program This tool has the ability to find Microscan products on the network configure their ip address then configure all application parameters EtherNet IP Terms of Use EtherNet IP Technology is governed by the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc ODVA Any person or entity that makes and sells products that implement EtherNet IP Technology must agree to the Terms of Usage Agreement issued by ODVA See www odva org for details Device Type The EtherNet IP device type is 0x00 Generic Device Vendor ID Microscan s Vendor
188. de leading edge trigger filter trailing edge trigger filter gt 0 Continuous Read 0 Continuous Read 1 Continuous Read 1 Output 2 External Level 3 External Edge 4 Serial Data 5 Serial Data and Edge Leading Edge Trigger Filter lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter trailing edge trigger filter gt Serial Cmd Default 313 10 ms Options 1 to 65535 x 32 0 us Trailing Edge Trigger Filter lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter trailing edge trigger filter gt Serial Cmd Default 313 10 ms Options 1 to 65535 x 32 0 us QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 37 Serial Commands Serial Trigger Character Delimited Serial Cmd lt K201 serial trigger character gt Default Space 0x20 Options Any 7 bit ASCII character External Trigger State Serial Cmd lt K202 active state gt Default 1 Positive Options 0 Negative 1 Positive End of Read Cycle End of Read Cycle Mode Serial Cmd lt K220 end of read cycle read cycle timeout gt Default 0 Timeout Options 0 Timeout 1 New Trigger 2 Timeout or New Trigger 3 Last Frame 4 Last Frame or New Trigger Read Cycle Timeout Serial Cmd lt K220 end of read cycle read cycle timeout gt Default 100 x10 ms 1 second Options 1 to 65535 Decodes Before Output Decodes Before Output Serial Cmd lt K221 decodes before output mode gt Default 1 Options 1 to 255 Mode
189. depending on how Decodes Before Output is set Enabling As Soon As Possible causes symbol data to be sent to the host immediately after a symbol has been successfully decoded End of Read Cycle End of Read Cycle is useful in timing based systems in which the host is not ready to accept data at the time that it is decoded Enabling End of Read Cycle means that symbol data does not get sent to the host until the read cycle ends with a timeout or new trigger Start of read cycle End of read cycle wi Read cycle duration Host This is when host activates trigger expects output QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 109 I O Parameters No Read Message Used in applications where the host needs serial verification that a symbol has not been read and especially useful in new print verification When enabled and if no symbol has been decoded before timeout or the end of the read cycle the No Read message will be transmitted to the host No Read Message Enabled Message MOREAD No Read Message Status Disabled Only symbol data is output after a read cycle Enabled When the scanner is in a triggered mode a No Read message will be appended for each failed read attempt Message Any combination of ASCII characters can be defined as the No Read message Note No Read Message will only be transmitted if Symbol Data Output is set to Match Mismatch or Good Read No Read Message can be s
190. e e To save the Differences from Default report either as plain text or as a tab delimited text file click Save As e Click Send and Save to send the settings to the scanner and save them or Send to Reader to send the settings without saving them Important To use Differences from Default connect to the scanner and Receive Reader Settings via the Send Recv button on the toolbar QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Master Database Master Database Click the Utilities button and then the Master Database tab Utilities to display the Master Database view Important The Master Database is used for all Matchcode modes except Sequential and Wild Card both of which use Master Database Index 1 Master Database Overview Used where more than one master symbol is required as in a Multisymbol setup for matching and other Matchcode operations Allows the user to define up to 10 master symbols as the master symbol database which can be entered by keyboard scanned in displayed or deleted by serial or ESP commands 1 Click the Master Database tab Enable Matchcode Type Set the Master Symbol Database Size Select the database index in which the master symbol will be entered Do one of the following to enter master symbol data a Double click the index row to type data directly into the index b Click the Read Symbol into Selected Index to enter the next decoded symbol O A ON Se
191. e p A E F ay May oS fe gt goe r e y n Oa a a n a a pea eA BR Oe eee aa BO a ow aa Be DEVICE 2 actin Pe acute An earth ground is provided through the cable shields and chassis of the scanner Ground Loops Ground loops signal degradation due to different ground potentials in communicating devices can be eliminated or minimized by ensuring that both the host scanner and their power supplies are connected to a common earth ground A 14 QxX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Expected Power and Ground Connections for Proper Operation SCANNER INTERFACE In Line Filtering SF Shunt Filtering POWER RETURN EARTH 3 TERMINAL POWER SUPPLY POWER Q 7e POWER GHD Q POWER 2 TERMINAL POWER RETURH SUPPLY EARTH local to power source connected to RETURN at main power panel COMM SGHLS SIGHAL GHD IF CONDUCTIVE MOUNTING BRACKET IS GROUNDED TO EARTH POTENTIAL THEN POTENTIAL MUST BE SAME AS EARTH AT POWER SOURCE real MOUNTING BRACKET Notes e Ensure that mounting bracket Earth is at the same potential as power source Earth e Supply Return and Earth ground must be stable low impedance reference points e 2 Terminal Power Supply must still provide an Earth connection to the scanner QxX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 15 Flying Lead Cordset Pinouts Appendix D Flying Lead Cordset Pi
192. e Setup button and then the Calibration tab to display the Calibration view The settings in the Calibration interface can also be configured using the lt gt and lt CAL gt serial commands and the Calibration Options command Calibration Configuration Database Ordered Output Output Format The Test and Calibrate features Laser Off Position are also available in EZ Mode and Laser On Position can be entered using the fields below or by Test ee clicking and dragging Fited Parameter Calibration the edges of the laser Scan Speed arc in the picture l W Decodes per Second 500 W Fixed 100 Laser Frame 2a 40 q Framing Tracking W Fixed Enabled 40 OFF Position l en ere E H Medium i Fixed On Position 1 0 Scan Speed Gain and Tracking can also be configured z in the Reader Setup command Save Stop eset Click Save to save calibration settings or Stop to cancel the calibration process 4 2 QxX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Setup Laser Off Position Percentage of the full scan arc that the scan beam moves through before the laser turns off The combined values of Laser On Position and Laser Off Position cannot exceed 100 percent the total arc of one scan Laser Off Position must always exceed the value of Laser On Position for a scan to take place Laser Off o Laser Off Pos
193. e a esp file when ending a session 2 Save changes to session 9 esp Yes Mo Cancel The esp file will be saved in the location specified by the user S My Documents Seles File Edit view Favorites Tools Help ae Links sack QA wi po Search F Folders Ek Folders Name Size Type E Desktop Ef session 9esp 6KB ESP Document B My Documents E My Computer A 344 Floppy 45 B s Local Disk 0 ka gt 4 Connect to Readers via TCP IP When enabled shows the TCP IP Connection Wizard by default IP Address 162 148 88 51 C RS 232 Ethemet TCP Port 1 2001 4 1 Use Default Storage Location When enabled automatically stores data in ESP s Application Data folder 2 10 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Using ESP Document Memo The information entered in the Document Memo field will appear in a context sensitive text box whenever the cursor hovers over the Document Memo item on the Options menu Insert up to 250 characters to describe this document Type document specific information here Options Preferences EES Type document specific information here Model Memo Model Memo Similar to Document Memo the information entered in the Model Memo field will appear in a context sensitive text box whenever the cursor hovers over the Model Memo item on the Options menu Memos created in Model Memo are specific to the model enabled when the message was
194. e following conditions apply Symbol Data to Source Fixed to Enabled Ambles to Source Fixed to Enabled Echo to Source Fixed to Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Fixed to Disabled Output at ETX Fixed to Disabled with user defined characters Default character will be used if this setting is set to Disabled Output at Timeout Fixed to Disabled with user defined timeout Default time will be used if this setting is set to Disabled Mode of Operation Source Port data is not echoed back to itself source Port data is ignored when the Destination Port is in Polling Mode Source Port data or symbol data is sent to the Destination Port whenever it is received Source Port data is sent to the Destination Port without a Preamble or Postamble Symbol data is sent to the Source Port and the Destination Port at the same time and conforms to the communication parameters Destination Port data is echoed to the Source Port in an un polled mode Scanner Other Devices ee j as Exiernal Data 5ystem Data Destination Data Unpolled mode Ambles needed e 5 34 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Full Duplex Mode When Full Duplex Mode is enabled the following conditions apply Symbol Data to Source Fixed to Disabled Ambles to Source Fixed to Disabled Echo to Source Fixed to Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Fixed to Disabled
195. e source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Default 1 Options One or two ASCII characters A 36 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Read Cycle Trigger Mode Trigger Filter Duration Appendices lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter duration trailing edge trigger filter duration gt Serial Trigger Character lt K201 serial trigger character gt External Trigger State lt K202 external trigger state gt End of Read Cycle lt K220 mode read cycle timeout gt Decodes Before Output lt K221 mode number before output gt Multisymbol lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Serial Trigger Start Character lt K229 start character gt Serial Trigger Stop Character lt K230 stop character gt Processing Timeout lt K245 processing timeout gt Scan Speed lt K500 scan speed gt Maximum Element lt K502 maximum element gt Automatic Gain Control lt K504 gain level AGC sampling mode AGC minimum AGC maximum gt Symbol Detect Status Transition Counter lt K505 symbol detect status transition counter gt Scan Width Enhance lt K511 status gt AGC Tracking lt K520 tracking gt Laser Setup lt K700 aser on off laser framing status laser on position laser off position laser power gt Trigger Mode Filter Duration Trigger Mode Serial Cmd Default Options lt K200 trigger mo
196. eached SCANNER_TX timeout reached SCANNER_TX timeout reached SCANNER_TX T A 84 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Polling Mode Data Flow Examples Setup 1 Address 0x01 translates to Poll Req 0x1C Unit Select Ox1D RES 0x04 REQ 0x05 STX 0x02 ETX 0x03 ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC disabled Transfer 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1D REQ Select Unit 1 to receive data SCANNER_TX 0x1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST_TX STX lt T gt ETX SCANNER_TX 0x1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST_TX RES Terminate Transfer 2 Transfer 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data SCANNER_TX Ox1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX HOST_TX ACK SCANNER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 Starting with a RES ensures a clean transaction without leftovers from the previous transaction Error Condition 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data SCANNER_TX Ox1C STX lt T O0000 gt ETX HOST _TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached SCANNER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached SCANNER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached SCANNER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached SCANNER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 data is flushed QX 830 Compa
197. eaeesseeeesaeesaaees A 93 Appendix J Operating EtherNet IP Serial Gateway Data FieldS ccccccccccseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees A 102 Appendix K Allen Bradley Version 16 PLC Setup cccccccccsecccseeeceeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeseeeeeees A 104 Appendix L Allen Bradley Version 20 PLC Setup cccceccccceecccseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesaeeeeseeeeeees A 118 Appendix M ElIPScan Se Up mimara aE sas acta enc inieaesedomedcnnyacesegeesceedee A 125 Appendix N Interface Standards cccccccccccsecccceeeeccaeeecseeeeseeeseeseeeeeseeseesseeeeseaeeesseeesseeeess A 131 Appendix O Glossary Of TermS ccccccccceeeccceeececeseeeeceececeee cesses ceeseeeeesseecesseeeessneeessaeeesneeeeas A 132 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 1 General Specifications Appendix A General Specifications Mechanical Height 2 59 66 mm Width 3 47 88 mm Depth 1 38 35 mm Weight 7 50z 212 g Environmental Enclosure Die cast aluminum IP65 rated Operating Temperature 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F Storage Temperature 29 to 70 C 20 to 158 F Humidity Up to 90 non condensing Emissions Heavy Industrial EN 61000 6 2 2005 Radiated Emissions EN 55022 2006 Class A 30 1000 MHz Conducted Emissions EN 55022 2006 Class A 15 30 MHz Communication Interface Standard Interfaces RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 Ethernet Symbologies Standard Offering Code 39 Codabar Code 93 Int
198. eate button Select H odube Type FIS OG30 Texel G30 FIS 6S00 TxxeG Oa HAWE A 122 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices e Enter the name of the device used in the PLC program and the IP address of the camera OS New Module i General Connection Module Info Intemet Protocol Port Configuiation Type FIS O830 1 seal 0 830 Vendor Microscan Systeme Inc Parent EIF _ Description j _ g E C Private Network 1921681 E Statur Creating ok _ cca Hep e After the new device has been added to the project the default assembly data will be the small size You can change it to large by double clicking the camera menu item in the tree control and clicking the Change button on the dialog Rolo SOG Basic Tester 1756 L61 ALi Pe Et Wey Seach Lot Commr ara fooe Wines hep alsa a e le Pa TR SIS seco ei s i ajeji Porites 9 Ol Modute Properties EIP FIS G800 laocets 1 1 Tae e BEIE pea Pac Cantioder gaie a Cortreder Base Terie BA Comtolier Tags SS cooler Fat Hande Pansit EIF I Power Up Hender E Tas Hon ee MinTik Ciescription P fer Lo Maan cep ari zi J Unrecheduled Programs Phases OOP Address SS Beton Gup Winona A E AddOn mainad S Data Types H User Defined 5 Ye Pings m ag Pree fied Rewari 1 1 lt Ca Mode De fined pen Ekun Fein Cormpa
199. eaved 2 of 5 Enabled Codabar Enabled UPCIEAN Both Standard or Edge Code 93 Both Standard or Edge Pharmacode Disabled DataBar Expanded Disabled DataBar Limited Disabled DataBar Omnidirectional Disabled Stacked Symbologies PDF 417 Enabled Micro POF 417 Disabled Composite Disabled AIAG Disabled Quiet Zone Marrow Enhanced Symbology Identifier Standard Background Color Narrow Depth of Field Enhance standard Enhanced Symbol Reconstruction Narrow Enhanced Code Ratio Mode The indicates that the setting is the default To change a setting double click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options Note Symbologies settings can also be sent to the scanner from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format Refer to the Symbologies section of Appendix E 5 70 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Code 39 Code 39 is considered the standard for non retail 1D symbology An alphanumeric symbology with unique start stop code patterns composed of 9 black and white elements per character of which 3 are wide Code 39 Enabled Check Character Status Disabled Check Character Qukput Status Disabled Large Intercharacter Gap Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 10 Full ASCII Set Disabled Check Character Status Enables or Disables the check character Check Character Status Disabled
200. ecial output formatting options available in this command If EAN status is required the scanner will only decode symbols that have a function 1 character in the first position and that conform to EAN format All symbols read will be subject to the special output formatting options available in this command EAN Status Enabled Disabled Enabled Note Code 128 status must be enabled for EAN status to be active Output Format In Standard the scanner will not apply special EAN output formatting options In Application the scanner will apply the special EAN output formatting options to decoded EAN conforming symbols Dutput Format standard Standard 5 74 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Application Record Separator Status When enabled an EAN separator will be inserted into the output between fields whenever an EAN conforming symbol is decoded and EAN output formatting applies Application Record Separator Status Disabled l 23 b E d x Enabled Application Record Separator Character This is an ASCII character that serves as an EAN separator in formatted EAN output Application Record Separator Character NUL SOH STX ETX EQT ENG ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF cR S SI DLE ct Dc2 De3 DC4 mak SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS Gs Fs us SP Click Delete to remove characters Application Record Brackets If
201. ecimal BOOL aw E qx _l0_big_ pt OUT command es4 0 Decimal BOOL eseve ial gx_ 0_big_ptOUT command tes5 0 Decimal BOOL esene E gx_l0_big_pt OUT command tes6 0 Decimal BOOL __ f gs_l0_big_pt OUT command tes 0 Decimal BOOL G BE fa qx_ 0_big_pt OUT command disable_scan 0 Decimal BOOL lising edge disables reading X 4 Monitor Tags Edit Tags IE Enter a tag value a QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 115 Allen Bradley Version 16 PLC Setup 21 Change the OUT usertag to non zero A 116 fa RSLuyix 5000 MscanLuvix3561 1756 161 Pivgiau Tags MainPrugrani File Edit wew Search Logic Communications Tools Window Hel File Edit M Search Logic icati Tools Windi Hep a x alsel Sl alel AA TTT alaa Wiel alal Fem Aun DE Run Mode KE Path AB_ETHIP 1410 10 5 233 Backplane G lt El Drea b E Contioller OK fi at lace aren fone No Edits PES al H hort te sa eal H gt Redundancy fot T 4 K Favorites Addo Alarme Bit Timer Counter Controller MscanLagixS561 Scope Eg MainProgram Show Show All Controller Tags A T Controller Fauk Handler Name amp Value el Style Data Haz Description i Pawer Up
202. ed for a particular purpose the scanner behaves more like a data switch Port Routing Advantages e Data can be routed in on one port and out on the same port or a different port like a switch or router Transparent Mode Half Duplex Mode Full Duplex Mode and Custom Mode e External Data Routing still follows the To From Host Aux paradigm The new capability allows the customer to define the data direction which port behaves as the Host Port and which port behaves as the Aux Port e Only one daisy chain setup required per system e Minimal configuration required for each port with similar items grouped together QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 3 Communication RS 232 A The following settings define the basic transmission speeds and digital standards that ensure common RS 232 formatting RSZ 4 Baud Rate 115 2K Parity Mone Stop Bits One Data Bits Eight Symbol Data Gukput Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Qutpuk Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command Baud Rate Can be used to transfer data faster or to match host port settings The rate at which the scanner and host transfer data back and forth Baud Rate 115 2K Parity Only changed if necessary to match host setting An error detection routine in which one data bit per character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of bits in the data field is either even or odd None
203. ed to qualify the reconstruction result This can limit the Effort level required to decode However this is the lowest level of proof required so occasionally the symbol s level of data integrity may lead to a misread Note Applications with low area coverage may be forced to use this setting Medium When Symbol Reconstruction Redundancy is set to Medium the scanner will attempt to reconstruct symbols across multiple scan lines A larger amount of redundancy checking will be applied to qualify the reconstruction result This may require the decode Effort level to be increased This level of redundancy checking is helpful in avoiding misreads Occasionally the symbol s level of data integrity may lead to a misread but this setting requires enough matching data to protect the majority of data Note Applications with average area coverage can use this setting High When Symbol Reconstruction Redundancy is set to High the scanner will attempt to reconstruct symbols across multiple scan lines A very large amount of redundancy checking will be applied to qualify the reconstruction result This will require the effort level to rise to achieve a decode This level of redundancy checking is helpful in avoiding misreads Occasionally the symbol s level of data integrity may lead to a misread but this setting requires enough matching data to protect the majority of data Note Applications with a large amount of area coverage can use this
204. edefined Add Rung Ctrl R 4 Module Defined Edit Runa Enter Trend L io coiii Edit Rung Comment Ctrl D 1756 Backplane 1756 A4 fa 0 1756 L61 MscanLogix5561 Export Rung 3 1756 ENBT A eip s Ethernet 1756 ENBT A eip ETHERNET MODULE QxHawk gt kp m i mo qq py Rung Ctrl C Accept Pending Rung Edits Pendi its Type Ladder Diagram Main Description Verify Rung Go To Ctrl G Add Ladder Element Alt Ins Rung 0 of 1 APP VER 10 Click the Attachments icon in this PDF to show the 32 000001 xx L5X file Save the file to the location of your choice Navigate to the file and click Import 2 Open Attachment ppm P swie Attachment J Add Attachment T Delete Attachment Edit Description ra Open a Search Attachments ml 1 _ Show attachments by default Modified Size Compressed size 32 000001 xx L5X 10 28 2013 2 02 12 PM 36 KB Ew KB y p 4 F Save Delete YW Search Click the icon at left in this PDF to display attached files Right click the 32 000001 xx L5X file and select Save Attachment After you have saved the 32 000001 xx L5X file navigate to it and click Import in the Import Rung dialog File name 322 000001 10L Files of type RSLogix 5000 XML Files L5 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 109 Allen Bradley Version 16 PLC Setup 11 At the Import C
205. eld active until the opposite condition selected under Output On has been met For example if No Read is enabled under Output On the programmable output will go active on a No Read and remain active until the opposite condition a good read occurs Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re enter Read Cycle The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until a new read cycle begins Note All of the Output On modes are inhibited when any Diagnostic Warning is active for Output 3 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 157 I O Parameters Trend Analysis Note Output On under Output 3 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Under Output 3 Parameters expand the Trend Analysis tree Useful in cases where the user doesn t want to shut down for one condition but wants to monitor quality and read conditions Applies Trend Analysis settings to Output 3 With Trend Analysis the user can track the occurrences and frequency of mismatches No Reads and the number of reads per trigger and output the results to any of three outputs Trend Analysis Mode No Read Trigger Evaluation Period 25 triggers read cycles Number to Output On 4 In this example the scanner will activate an output when 4 No Reads occur within a period of 25 triggers read cycles 5 158 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Trend Analysis Mode Sets
206. emperature specification The user can set a low temperature value that whenever the ambient temperature falls below it causes a low temperature message to be displayed If Low Temperature Threshold is set to zero the warning message will be disabled Status Allows the user to Enable or Disable the Low Temperature Threshold Low Temperature Threshold Status Disabled Peranan Disabled Enabled Message The user can enter a message of up to 10 characters that will be displayed whenever the ambient temperature falls below the Low Temperature Threshold Low Temperature Threshold Status Disahled L 0 W T E iH F QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 183 Diagnostics Service Message Status When Enabled a Service Message of up to 128 characters is sent whenever the system detects that the service time has expired Service Message Status Disabled service Message Disabled Threshold Enabled Resolution Seconds Service Message Allows the user to define a service message of up to 128 characters Service Message Status is able Service Messa SERVI CE Threshold UU Resolution Seconds Threshold Allows the user to determine the length of time until the service message will be sent Service Message Status Disabled Service Message SERVICE Threshold 300 a 1 65535 Resolution Seconds Resolution The service timer has a resolution field for setting up t
207. en the maximum and minimum bars in the symbol is used for additional security Aggressive Maximum ratio is set at 6 1 1 A Validate function is not used in this mode This method may be useful on long symbols where the spot velocity can change throughout the symbol and effect the minimum and maximum bar values 5 106 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual I O Parameters the tree control tabs Y Sy Scanner Parameters Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display oat 8 4pp Mode Then click the I O tab to display the I O Parameters tree control Parameters r Parameters O Parameters Symbol Data Output Mo Read Message Bad Symbol Message No Symbol Message Read Duration Oukput Output Indicators Serial Verification EZ Button Status Indicators Calibration Options Database Identifier Output Input 1 Mutou 1 Parameters Qutouk 2 Parameters Oukput 3 Parameters Quality Output Symbol Position Gutput Communication Read Cycle Symbologies To Matchcode Diagnostics ESP Values Good Read Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled PHY Activity kk a Disabled The indicates ei that the setting Disabled is the default Reset Counts Unlatch Output A SE cena ee Le A ee To open nested options single click the To change a setting double click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the
208. ence on No Read 007 007 008 Consider the following decodes as an example of Sequence on No Read Disabled Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 No Read 003 not sequenced 003 003 004 004 No Read 004 not sequenced 004 No Read 004 not sequenced 004 004 005 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 173 Matchcode Sequence on Mismatch Note Matchcode Type must be set to Sequential for this command to function Enable this parameter if every trigger event should have a decode and more than one consecutive mismatch may occur When set to Enabled the master symbol sequences on every decode match or mismatch Disable this parameter if every trigger event should have a decode but no more than one consecutive mismatch may occur When set to Disabled the master symbol will not sequence whenever consecutive mismatches occur The scanner will sequence the master to one more or one less than the decoded symbol Matchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position T Match Length 1 Wild Card d Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Sequence Step Mew Master Pin Disabled iz g b E d x Enabled Consider the following decodes as an example of Sequence on Mismatch Enabled Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003
209. ences tab Utilities to display the Differences from Default view Clicking the Differences from Default button will cause ESP to check all stored configuration settings and compare them to default settings All settings that are different than default will appear in the left column shown below and descriptions of those settings will appear in the right column Click this button for a list of ESP configuration settings that are different than default settings Click Generate Barcode to display the Bar Code Dialog Then create configuration symbols containing the required configuration commands lt K2003 gt skee 502 tkrh 25 lt K810 5 gt lt F 611 13 lt K81 2 25 Save As Send and Save Send to Reader Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Digital Bar Code Firmware Differences from Default Generate a Code Mode External Edge Read Cycle Timeout 50 Code 128 Edge to Edge Output On No Read Output On Good Read M atch Output On Mismatch Send configuration settings to the scanner without saving by clicking Send to Reader Click Save As to save the report as plain text or a tab delimited text file Send configuration settings to the scanner and save in ESP by clicking Send and Save e To create a symbol containing any of the command settings in the table click Generate Barcod
210. eneral Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced Auto Sync When entering a view that supports Auto Sync do the following Always Ask Before Auto Syne Occurs C Receive Settings fram the Reader f Send ESP Settings to the Reader f Do Not Send or Receive Settings Send 80N with Autoconnect i Ask to Save ESP File when Quitting iM Connect to readers via TCP IP Use Default Storage Location Default Settings The Auto Sync options at the top of the Advanced tab allow the user to determine whether Auto Sync will be enabled automatically in sections of ESP where it is used or if it will ask before it enables Auto Sync functions Always Ask Before Auto Sync Occurs If this option box is checked specific Auto Sync functions can be enabled Receive Settings from the Reader will automatically send the scanner s settings to ESP when Auto Sync is enabled Send ESP Settings to the Reader will automatically send all scanner configuration settings chosen in ESP to the scanner Do Not Send or Receive Settings creates a condition in which Auto Sync will not automatically send scanner settings to ESP or send ESP settings to the scanner Send XON with Autoconnect Sends an XON Begin Transmission command to the scanner before starting the Autoconnect routine QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 2 9 Menu Toolbar Preferences gt Advanced Tab cont Ask to Save ESP File when Quitting When enabled prompts the user to sav
211. er is active I O 2 will be on Status Indicators PHY Activity Bar Graph Read Rate DOl Qutput Active a tout Active Disabled Output Active NPL t fan Ti i Wee QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 127 I O Parameters Calibration Options Calibration Options specifies the operation of the calibration feature The default configuration is set up to perform calibration on Gain Focus and Symbol Type Calibration Options Video Calibrate Scan Speed Calibrate Laser Power Calibrate Laser Framing Don t Calibrate Symbol Type Calibrate Video When set to Calibrate there will be an attempt to change Video settings Gain and Tracking Video settings include Gain and Tracking Calibration Options Video Calibrate Scan Speed Don t Calibrate Laser Power Calibrate Laser Framing Don t Calibrate Symbol Type Calibrate Scan Speed When set to Calibrate there will be an attempt to change Scan Speed If a better read rate at a different speed is found the new speed will be the calibration result for Scan Speed Calibration Options Video Calibrate Scan Speed Calibrate Laser Power Laser Framing Calibrate Symbol Type Calibrate Laser Power When set to Calibrate there will be an attempt to change Laser Power If a better read rate at a higher power is found or if the same read rate at a lower power is found the new power level will be the calibration result
212. ere Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols of a specific length are required When Range Mode is disabled the scanner checks the value of the symbol length against the values set in Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 If the symbol length does not match either of the preset values then it is rejected as invalid When Range Mode is enabled Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 are combined to form a range of valid symbol lengths Any symbol length that does not fall into this range is rejected as an invalid symbol Either of the preset symbol length values in the Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 fields can form the start or end of the range Range Mode Status Enabled Disabled Enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 79 Symbologies Codabar Used in photo finishing and library applications Previously used in medical applications but not typically used in newer medical applications Codabar is a 16 bit character set 0 through 9 and the characters and with start stop codes and at least two distinctly different bar widths Codabar Enabled Start and Stop Match Status Enabled Start and Stop Oukput Status Enabled Large Intercharacter Gap Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 10 Check Character Type Disabled Check Character Output Status Disabled Start and Stop Match Status When disabled the scanner will decode Codabar symbols whether or not the star
213. erial Utility Commands Note For a list of all K commands see Serial Commands on page A 8 Type Command Name Enter Decodes Second Test lt Cp gt Enter Decode Percent Test Read Rate Exit Decodes Second and Decode Percent Tests lt a1 gt PDF417 Information lt N gt No Read Counter Oo KOR O No Read Counter Reset C e Triger Counter lt U gt Trigger Counter Reset PNE oOo o Y U Trigg Device Control Master Database Part Number Checksum Default Reset Save Good Read Match Counter Good Read Match Counter Reset Mismatch Counter Mismatch Counter Reset Programmable Output 1 Programmable Output 2 Programmable Output 3 Disable Scanner Enable Scanner Store Next Symbol Read to Database Index 1 lt Gn gt Store Next Symbol Read to Database Index n lt NEWM gt New Master Load Status Display All Firmware Part Numbers Display Application Code Part Number Display Boot Code Part Number Display FPGA Code Part Number _ E Display All Available Firmware Checksums Display Application Code Code Checksum Display Boot Code Checksum Display FPGA Code Checksum Save Current Settings for Power On Save Current Settings as Customer Default meee Parameters for Power On Recall Customer Default Settings and Save for oe Power On lt Zrd gt Recall Microscan Default Settings and Save for Power On Will not default sticky settings QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Utilities lt Z
214. erleaved 2 of 5 Code 128 PDF417 MicroPDF417 Pharmacode UPC GS1 DataBar Applications Standards EAN 128 AIAG Laser Light Type Laser diode Bottom Output Wavelength 655 nm 1316 mm Lo M xl Beam Divergence 0 4mrad typ Pulse Duration 40 186us Maximum Power 1 75mW Operating Life 50 000 hours 25 C Safety Class Visible laser Class 2 655 nm Note Nominal dimensions shown Typical tolerances apply QX 830 Dimensions Scanning Parameters Mirror Type Rotating 10 faceted Optional Raster Mirror Image 10 raster scan lines over a 2 arc or 0 500 raster height at 8 203 mm Scan Rate Adjustable from 300 to 1 400 scans per second Default 500 Scan Width Angle Typically 60 Pitch 50 max Skew 40 max Symbol Contrast 25 min absolute dark to light differential at 655 nm wavelength Protocols Point to Point Point to Point with RTS CTS Point to Point with XON XOFF Point to Point with RTS CTS and XON XOFF Multidrop Daisy Chain User Defined Multidrop Ethernet TCP IP EtherNet IP Discrete I O Input 1 Trigger New Master Optoisolated 4 5 28V rated 13 mA at 24VDC New Master is to signal ground Outputs 1 2 3 Optoisolated 1 28V rated lcg lt 100 mA at 24VDC current limited by user A 2 QxX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual QX 1 Interface Device Mechanical Height 75 19 1 mm Width 2 50 83 5 mm Depth 3 15 80 mm Weight
215. ernet A 6 byte hardware address is used which is divided into a 3 byte vendor ID and a 3 byte vendor defined field Ethernet enabled device manufacturers are assigned a unique vendor ID and are then responsible for insuring that all of their devices have unique addresses in the last 3 bytes QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 131 Glossary of Terms Appendix O Glossary of Terms AGC See Automatic Gain Control Analog A smooth continuous voltage or current signal or function whose magnitude value is the information Automatic Gain Control AGC Adjustment to signal strength that seeks to maintain a constant level regardless of the distance between a scanner and symbol Baud Rate The number of discrete signal events per second bits per second Check Character A Modulus 43 or Modulus 10 character that is added to encoded symbol data for additional data integrity Connector A plug or socket on a device or cable providing in out connectivity for various circuits and pins Concentrator Intermediary device that relays data from scanners to a host and commands from the host to the scanners or other devices Counter Memory space allocated to keep track of scanner events Daisy Chain Linkage of primary and secondary scanners allowing data to be sent to the host Decode A good read The successful interpretation and output of the information encoded in a symbol Default Resto
216. ers Wild Card Allows the user to enter user defined wild card characters in the master symbol Note If Matchcode Type is set to Sequential the scanner will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration Sequential Matching Useful in tracking product serial numbers that increment or decrement sequentially With Sequential enabled Sequential Matching determines if a count is in ascending incremental or descending decremental order Makchcode Makchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position Increment Match Length Wild Card r Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step 1 Hew Master Pin Disabled 5 170 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Match Start Position Match Start Position is useful in defining specific portions of a symbol for comparison For example if a symbol contains a part number manufacturing date and lot code info but only the part number information is needed set the scanner to sort only the part number and to ignore the other characters Match Start Position determines the portions of symbols that will be matched by defining the first character in the symbol from left to right that will be compared with those of the master symbol when Matchcode Type is set to Enabled or Sequential For example if Match Start Position is set to 3 the first 2 charact
217. ers read in the symbol will be ignored and only the 3rd and subsequent characters to the right will be compared up to the number of characters specified by Match Length Note Match Start Position must be set to 1 or greater to enable this feature A 0 setting will disable this feature Matchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position 0 3000 Match Length 1 Wild Card Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step 1 New Master Pin Disabled Match Length Example f Match Length is set to 6 in a 10 character symbol and Match Start Position is set to 2 only the 2nd through 7th characters from left to right will be compared Defines the length of the character string that will be compared with that of the master symbol when Match Start Position is set to 1 or greater When Match Start Position is set to 0 no comparison will occur Matchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position O Match Length i 1 3000 Wild Card Sequence on Wo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step l Hew Master Pin Disabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 171 Matchcode Wild Card Example With Wild Card Character defined as the default asterisk defining CR 34 as the master symbol will result in matches for CR134 and CR234 but not CR2345 Entering the wild card at the end of the master symbol as in
218. ese labels are located on the QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner On Side AVOID EXPOSURE LASER RADIATION IS EMITTED FROM THIS APERTURE MICROSCAN m DESIGNED IN USA ww microscan com helpdesk microscan com CAUTION CLASS 2 LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040 10 AND 1040 11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE NO 50 DATED JUNE 24 2007 viii QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Introduction Statement of Agency Compliance F The QX 830 has been tested for compliance with FCC Federal Communications Commission regulations and has been found to conform to all applicable FCC Rules and Regulations To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements this device must not be co located or operate in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment CE The QX 830 has been tested for compliance with CE Conformit Europ enne standards and guidelines and has been found to conform to applicable CE standards specifically the following requirements Heavy Industrial EN 61000 6 2 2005 Radiated Emissions EN 55022 2006 Class A 30 1000 MHz Conducted Emissions EN 55022 2006 Class A 15 30 MHz The QX 830 has been tested by an independent electromagnetic compatibility laboratory in accordance with the
219. essing Enter when no value has been entered A Symbol Length 10 Rang 1 128 System Default 10 PLEASE TYPE THE NEW VALUE THEN ENTER ESC TO CANCEL NEW VALUE QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 7 29 Embedded Menus 7 30 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual RE pendices Contents Appendix A General Specifications ccccccccccccceecccceeeeeceeeeeceeueeseeeeecsaeeessaeessueeeessaeeesagesessaeees A 2 Appendix B Electrical Specifications us c sdis ccscynces epcados sonedesiesbeauectbeu aes iedoeaiee leg adoeseiecedeee haneedenie A 6 Appendix C Ground and Shield Considerations ccccccecccecesececeeceeeseececeeeceseeeeeeseeeessaeeesees A 14 Appendix D Flying Lead Cordset PinOuts cccccsecccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseneeeessaees A 16 Appendix E Serial COMMAMNAS ccccccseeccccaeeecseeeeceeseeeceeceeseeeeeceeeceseueeeeseeeesseueeeseueeeseneeesens A 17 Appendix F Protocol COMMANGCS cccceeccceescceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeceeseeeeeseeeceseeeeeeseecessueceseeeeeeseeeeesaes A 80 Appendix G ASCII Table ccccccccccccsscccceseeeceeeeseuseeccasseecaeeeseusessaeeeesageessaseeesaaeeseuseessansensags A 89 Appendix H Configuring Ethernet TCP IP cccccccseeeeceeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeeeseeseeeeseeeeeseaees A 90 Appendix Using EtherNet IP cccccccccccccceececeeeeeeceeeeesee cesses eeseuceeeseeeesseeeees
220. et to any ASCII character No Read Message Foahled Message NORE AD 5 110 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Bad Symbol Message Useful in determining if a symbol is present and if user defined requirements for that symbol are met Can tell the user if a qualified symbol is present but not decodable Sets the requirements that will qualify an object or a symbol before outputting a decode or message When enabled sends a message to the host whenever an object meets the qualifications setup but is not decoded Note When Symbology Identifier is enabled the Bad Symbol Message is preceded by the identifier for the symbology being used Bad Symbol Message Disabled Message BAD SYMBOL Message Any combination of ASCII characters can be defined as the Bad Symbol Message Bad Symbol Message Disabled Message B A D a Y M E 0 L QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 111 I O Parameters No Symbol Message Useful in determining if a symbol is present and if user defined requirements for that symbol are met Can tell the user if an object does not qualify as a symbol Sets the requirements that will qualify an object or a symbol before outputting a decode or message When enabled sends a message to the host whenever an object meets the qualifications setup but is not decoded Note When Symbology Identifier is enabled the No Symbol Message is preceded by the identifier for
221. ewed placement The AGC Minimum and AGC Maximum parameters are useful in applications with depth of field limitations that are not conducive to Fixed Gain operation To determine the appropriate minimum and maximum gain e Set AGC Sampling Mode to Disabled Fixed Gain and find the range of gain levels that yields successful decodes in the application both the lowest and the highest gain levels e Enter those values in the AGC Minimum and AGC Maximum fields This will leave the scanner room for gain changes to increase depth of field within the limitations of what works for the application Maximum gain may be too high for symbols on white backgrounds because it may attempt to process false bars Especially in applications using symbologies that require more processing setting gain too high can slow decode performance substantially Setting a minimum gain can prevent the system from occasionally under gaining because of previous false candidates that appear very bright 5 66 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Tracking Tracking is the frequency detection value that determines the threshold between a white bar and a black bar This is a range of frequencies that have been divided into 127 steps For most applications the default tracking value 40 is robust enough to deal with most marginal signals However in some instances symbols are printed on a noisy substrate or symbols are rela
222. for Laser Power Calibration Options Video Calibrate Scan Speed Calibrate Laser Power Calibrate Laser Framing Don t Calibrate Symbol Type Calibrate 5 128 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Laser Framing When set to Calibrate there will be an attempt to frame the symbol automatically Framing is based on symbol readability The frame line will be decreased until a drop in read performance is detected Once the line length is found then a small margin is added to account for variation Calibration Options Video Calibrate Scan Speed Calibrate Laser Power Calibrate Laser Framing Don t Calibrate Symbol Type Don t Calibrate Symbol Type When set to Calibrate all supported symbologies except PDF417 and Pharmacode will be attempted during calibration Symbol lengths are not detected Any new symbologies successfully decoded during calibration will remain enabled at the end of the process All enabled symbologies will remain enabled For example assume that only Code 39 is enabled at the beginning of calibration If a Code 128 symbol is read during calibration then Code 128 as well as Code 39 will be enabled at the end of calibration Calibration Options Video Calibrate Scan Speed Calibrate Laser Power Calibrate Laser Framing Don t Calibrate Symbol Type Calibrate Don t Calibrate Calibrate QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manua
223. formation about using specific commands in ESP is provided in subsequent sections For ESP system requirements see ESP System Requirements in Chapter 1 Quick Start QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 2 1 EZ Mode EZ Mode EZ Mode allows the user to test read rate and calibrate the scanner After connecting to the scanner the EZ Mode view will appear On screen instructions assist the user with positioning testing and calibration Test Click the Test button to start the read rate test for a quick indication of the scanner s read capabilities and the limits of the application When Decodes per Second is unchecked the test will count the percentage of decodes relative to the number of actual scans Click Stop to end the test Calibrate The calibration routine that will optimize the scanner by comparing Read Rates at various camera and image processing settings ESF ESP Untitled E EJE File Model Options Connect Help i A G D Starts Read Rate test Test Calibrate App Mode Auboconnect Switch Model gt Decodes per Second Welcome to Easy Setup Program 1 Position your reader at the distance from the symbal recommended by the specifications for the unit Click Calibrate to begin the calibration routine Calibration is explained at the left of the EZ Mode screen and also in Quick Start 2 To avoid specular reflection pitch the reader or the symbol 15 deg
224. he timer increment Options are increments of seconds or minutes Service Message Status Disabled Service Message SERVICE Threshold 300 Resolution Seconds Bcor g 5 184 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters User Defined Name User Defined Name allows the user to enter any combination of ASCII characters to identify the scanner User Defined Name i ka 5 3 0 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 185 Diagnostics 5 186 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual es 6 ferminal Contents Teminal VINO OW sesasine aana nei eiA Aeaaeai rn a rae a koneineen 6 2 FING aa E A E A 6 3 Sa E E aes sess ec sec ETETE E ign gs net E ee E E AE E 6 4 KTO e E E E eeankeoaneae 6 5 Terminal Window Menus cccccceccecececeeseeceeeeseeeeeeeseueeeeeeaeeeeausaeeueaeeeueueaeeeeeeaeeeuaeeeeeeeeeseeeenanenes 6 6 This section describes the multiple functions of ESP s Terminal interface QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 6 1 Terminal Window Terminal Window _ Terminal Click this button to display the Terminal view Copy paste save Type text here to Terminal find matching text screen in the Terminal window Clear screen ESF ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect View Terminal Help Ez Mode Autoconnect Switch Model Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities p amp W Find
225. iation Enabled The scanner will adjust for scan width variation 5 64 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Additional Information about Gain Tracking and Transition Counter Gain The QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner is an optical device Optical devices deal with a wide range of brightness in a way similar to a camera If the image is too bright the exposure must be reduced If the image is too dark the exposure must be increased The scanner will only work properly if it is within the range of brightness that can resolve light and dark changes or transitions in the field of view If the gain is too low the entire symbol looks like a dark bar to the scanner If the gain is too high the entire symbol looks like a white bar to the scanner Brightness conditions can be affected by the distance between the symbol and scanner or by the consistency of the material on which the symbol is printed The AGC Sampling Mode command has two primary functions AGC either Leading Edge or Continuous and Disabled Fixed Gain AGC Leading Edge or Continuous AGC self adjusts the optical electrical gain to hold brightness to one range for all materials and distances The Auto Calibration menu shows what AGC is doing to control brightness as in the example shown here Scan Motor cain Track AE Rate set Set Thrsh Level Read Rate 500 SOO 65 45 35 0 1005 0089305467640 The
226. ick the Digital Bar Code tab and the Start button to view a digitized representation of the symbol in front of the scanner QO tar This routine is useful for conveying a sense of the symbol s readability and graphically indicating bad or unreadable portions of symbols or extraneous noise A green waveform indicates a decoded symbol a red waveform indicates an undecoded symbol or other object The red triangles represent the width of the scan beam relative to the symbol The upward pointing arrows indicate the symbol s quiet zone Read Fiate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Digital Bar Code Firmware Start Sa Margins T Symbol Information Zoom Out Zoom In Laser Framing Ay Zoom in Zoom Out Increase the zoom level by sliding the Zoom lever to the right It may be necessary to scroll right or left to view the symbol s waveform in its entirety Read Fiate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Digital Bar Code Firmware start N Margins T Symbol Information T Zoom Out oom In Laser Framing A 7 16 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Utilities Firmware Click the Utilities button and then the Firmware tab Utilities to display the Firmware view Read Fiate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Digital Bar Code Firmware Firmware Update App Code Start
227. ify the analog signal In most applications when changing the sampling mode to Disabled the Gain Level will need to be changed For Fixed Gain operation changes to gain adjustment settings can be performed in Auto Calibration Leading Edge Leading Edge uses only the first signal sample to calculate gain adjustments The Transition Counter value is used to determine which transition triggers the sample Important This option should only be used if recommended by a Microscan Sales or Applications representative as the other AGC modes cover most application requirements Continuous Continuous will take the highest value among any samples within a scan and use that value to make adjustments Reader Setup Gain Level 40 Tracking 40 Scan Speed 50 Automatic Gain Control AGC AGC Sampling Mode Continuous Ait Minimum Disabled AGC Maximum Leading Edge Symbol Detect Status Continuous Transition Counter 14 Maximum Element 400 Scan Width Enhance Disabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 61 Read Cycle AGC Minimum Sets a gain limit that AGC cannot go below when not in Fixed Gain operation Reader Setup Gain Level Tracking Scan Speed Automatic Gain Control AGC AGC Sampling Mode AGL Minimum AGC Maximum Symbol Detect Status Transition Counter Maximum Element Scan width Enhance AGC Maximum 40 40 a0 Continuous D 0 255 259 Disabled 14 400 Disabled Set
228. ignal routing and switching are enhanced further by Port Routing which can be configured in ESP Port Routing eliminates the need for dedicated Host and Aux ports in a traditional sense With Port Routing any port can be defined as a Host or Aux port Port Routing also allows users to define the data types that are accessible from specific ports The primary benefit of Port Routing is that any type of data can be routed to any port and can be sent through multiple ports simultaneously Multiple types of data can also be appended to the symbol data that is output from the scanner to the host Command data symbol data extra symbol information and diagnostic data are enabled by default in the QX 830 The table below lists different types of data with examples for each data type Data Type Example Command Data Serial commands scanner responses to serial commands Symbol Data Any string of data encoded in a symbol Extra Symbol Information Decodes per trigger decode direction configuration database index number Diagnostic Data Laser status temperature service message The screen capture below from ESP shows the QX 830 s four communications ports and the parameters for each Parameters Communications R5232 A Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode R5232 B Baud
229. in 3 seconds connect them again A longer beep should be heard If not repeat the process Default on Power On Use the EZ Button to default the scanner by holding it down while applying power to the scanner if this feature is enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 7 21 Scanner Status Requests Scanner Status Requests lt K gt All Status Request This is the fastest way to learn the scanner s current configuration Sending this request will return the current settings of all commands starting with the lowest K command value and ending with the highest K command value lt K gt All Descriptor Status Request This request will return all current descriptors for every K command starting with the lowest K command value and ending with the highest K command value lt K gt All Range Status Request This request will return the current settings of all commands within the user defined range starting with the lowest user defined K command value and ending with the highest user defined K command value lt Knnn gt Single Status Request This request will return the value of the variables associated with the requested K command The request of a single entry of a database command cannot exceed the number of database slots for the specific command lt Knnn gt Single Descriptor Status Request This request returns the basic functional description of all fields in the requested K command lt Knnn gt
230. in Number of Triggers No Symbol Output will be activated when the number of No Symbol occurrences equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers 5 148 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Number of Triggers The number of triggers to examine for the trend analysis condition Output 2 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Wo Read Output State Normally Open Pulse width 500 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Ho Read Number of Triggers 255 Humber to Output On T Decodes per Trigger T Number to Output On Example If Number to Output On is set to 3 and Trend Analysis Mode is set to No Read then the output will not be activated until 3 No Reads have occurred Sets the number of Trend Analysis Mode events mismatches No Reads or reads trigger as configured by Trend Analysis Mode to occur within the trigger evaluation period before activating the associated output Output 2 Parameters Output Or Mismatch or Wo Read Output State Normally Open Pulse Width 500 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Mo Read Mumber of Triggers 0 Humber to Output On D L 0 255 Decodes per Trigger T QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 149 I O Parameters Decodes per Trigger When set to this mode and when the appropriate output is set to output on trend analysis the sca
231. ing data from a symbol s original data output and or inserting user defined characters It may be helpful to think of individual indexes as positions in the final formatted output Starting with index 1 enter either an extract or insert command to begin building the desired output string Then with the next index number enter either an extract or insert command to continue building the output string Continue this process until the string is built Start Location Defines the location within the symbol data where the character extraction will begin The first character extracted will also be the first character in the sequence displayed in user defined output Length Defines the length in consecutive characters that will be extracted and placed in user defined output 4 12 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Setup Insert Symbol Parse Insert Data Extract Range ap ap Insert SoH STX ETK EOT ENO ACK BEL Bs f HT LF it FF cal sof si s1 per Dc2f Dej Deal Mak SYN ETB CAN EM sue Esc Fs Gs AS us SP Click Delete to remove characters Add Step Remove Step Clear All Parsing Cancel Sample Symbol Parse Original ABCOEFGHWELMNOPORS TU 201 23456709 Output The Insert process is very similar to the Extract process except that Insert allows the user to enter characters using the Insert calculator shown above OF Cancel
232. installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communication However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help For connection to a UL listed direct plug in power unit marked Class II and rated 10 to 28 VDC at 5 watts or greater European models must use a similarly rated Class or Class II power supply that is certified to comply with standard for safety EN 60950 CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure There are no user serviceable parts in the scanner Opening the scanner voids the Microscan Systems Inc warranty and could expose the user to laser diode power of up to 7mW The laser beam can be harmful to eyesight Avoid eye contact with the laser beam Never point the beam at other people or in a direction where people
233. ionally perform the REQ and RES event sequences in ACK NAK mode If the sender does not receive an ACK or NAK it will send REQ to request such a response if enabled When the sender receives an ACK too many NAKs or times out if already enabled it will send a RES if enabled to terminate the transaction Note See ACK NAK Data Flow Examples in Appendix E for sample ACK NAK communication scenarios 5 28 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Polling Mode Options These parameters only take effect for Polling Mode lt K140 5 gt on the main RS 232 or RS 422 ports not on the Auxiliary Port and are completely independent of the ACK NAK Options lt K147 gt The values of protocol characters can be changed but the protocol events cannot be disabled The polling mode address is configured in the lt K140 gt command To enable true multidrop protocol the RS422 485 port must be enabled lt K102 1 gt in order to turn the transmitter on and off If RS 232 is enabled instead of RS422 485 lt K102 0 gt then Polling Mode will operate as a Point to Point polling protocol This is because the RS 232 transmitter is always left on when enabled Note See Polling Mode Data Flow Examples in Appendix E for sample Polling Mode communication scenarios Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Protocol Port RS232 4 ACK PAK Options RES ALL REQ ALL ST ALL ETS ML ACE ALK MAF MAK Polling Mode Opt
234. ions RES EOT REQ ENG STS STX ETX ETX ACE ACK MAK MAK Response Timeout J LEC Status Disabled RES NAK Defaults RES Reset EOT 0x04 REQ Request ENQ 0x05 STX Start of Text STX 0x02 ETX End of Text ETX 0x03 ACK Acknowledge ACK 0x06 0x06 NAK Negative Acknowledge NAK 0x15 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 29 Communication Response Timeout Only used when a response is required from the host While in Multidrop if the scanner does not receive an ACK or NAK from the host after sending polled data it will act on a fault The scanner can be set to wait indefinitely by setting Response Timeout to zero The time that the scanner will wait before timing out if ACK NAK and ETX are enabled and a host response is expected Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Protocol Port AS52324 ATK NAK Options RES MUL REQ MUL STA MUL ETA MUL ALK ACK MAK MAK Polling Mode Options RES EOT REQ ENG STX STX ETA ETH ACK ACK MAK MAK Response Timeout 0 005 4 Seconds LAZ Status Disabled 5 30 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters LRC Status Used when extra data integrity is required An error checking routine that verifies the accuracy of transmissions It is the exclusive OR of all characters following the STX start of text up to and including the ETX end of text What this means is that the binary representation of all the char
235. is a 12 pin socket All three connectors can be assigned to bus power and data The two switches at the center of the device allow the user to route signals as needed The simple diagram above also shown on the base of the QX 1 illustrates how power communications I O and trigger signal can be routed through the QX 1 device Power can be bussed between scanners and interface devices At each location on a network where a new power supply is added the Power switch on the QX 1 can be used to break power between Connector 2 and Connectors 1 3 and T The Trigger signal between Connector 2 and Connectors 1 3 and T can be broken using the Trigger switch This isolates trigger signals as required QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 7 Electrical Specifications Optoisolated Outputs The reader has optoisolated outputs that can transfer signals from the reader to peripherals Outputs can be configured as either NPN or PNP but NPN and PNP cannot be mixed in a system because the output common is shared by all outputs NPN Output for Host Input Host Camera 1i V ji ilii Input 7 ii V Output 2 E ji ii Input Input _ __ p Output Common A 8 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices NPN Output for External Load Camera Output 1 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 9 Electrical Specifications PNP Output for Host Input Host Camera D T T ii ii Inp
236. is location in multisymbol output Note To filter or order a symbol the symbol must meet all the requirements of the selected filter index Length Specifies the length of the decoded symbol allowed to occupy this location in multisymbol output Note To filter or order a symbol the symbol must meet all requirements of the selected filter index Wildcard This is the character to be used in the data output field when performing a data filter comparison The wildcard character represents the end of matching and allows for variable lengths of symbol output Placeholder The placeholder character requires a character to be present but does not compare the data value Matching Data This is the data string to be used when comparing symbol data for output filtering and ordering This data string may also contain wildcard and placeholder characters to facilitate matching Remember that in order to filter or order symbol data it must meet all the requirements of the selected filter index Examples e Filter data 123 This will match data strings of 123 123456 and 123ABC but not 12 e Filter data 123 AB C This will be interpreted as 123 e Filter data 123 This will match 1234 and 123A but not 123 12345 or 12340 e Filter data 123 A This will match 1234A and 123BA but not 123 1234C or 1234ABCD e
237. is method may be useful on long symbols where the spot velocity can change throughout the symbol and effect the minimum and maximum bar values QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 105 Symbologies Codabar Symbol Fatio Mode Code 39 Standard Codabar Standard Interleaved 2 of 5 Standard ggezsIve Tight Maximum ratio is set to 3 6 1 A Validate function which compares the ratio between the maximum and minimum bars in the symbol is used for additional security A Validate Bars function minimizes the acceptance of skewed symbols Standard Maximum ratio is set to 4 0 1 A Validate function which compares the ratio between the maximum and minimum bars in the symbol is used for additional security Aggressive Maximum ratio is set at 5 8 1 A Validate function is not used in this mode This method may be useful on long symbols where the spot velocity can change throughout the symbol and effect the minimum and maximum bar values Interleaved 2 of 5 Symbol Ratio Mode Code 39 Standard Codabar Standard Interleaved 2 of 5 Standard Standard Aqgressive Tight Maximum ratio is set to 3 6 1 A Validate function which compares the ratio between the maximum and minimum bars in the symbol is used for additional security A Validate Bars function minimizes the acceptance of skewed symbols Standard Maximum ratio is set to 4 8 1 A Validate function which compares the ratio betwe
238. is not in Continuous Read the Green Flash will not occur To use Static Presentation 1 Enable Continuous Read 2 Select the number of symbols 3 Enable Static Presentation in Green Flash Mode 4 Select the read time in Green Flash Duration Match The green LEDs will flash when a match condition is met If multisymbol is enabled then green flash LEDs will illuminate only if all symbols qualify as a match If matchcode is disabled then this mode will activate the LEDs on a good read Mismatch Same as Match except that LEDs will illuminate on a mismatch QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 115 I O Parameters Green Flash Duration Provides visual verification that a good read has occurred When a good read occurs the green LEDs will illuminate and stay on for the time set in the Green Flash Duration value Qutpuk Indicators Green Flash Mode On Good Read Green Flash Duration 100 Seconds Beeper On Good Read Beeper An audible verification that either a good read or a No Read has occurred A beep is emitted after each good read or No Read Note The beeper will also sound at any of the following times e When the scanner is defaulted e When a Send and Save command is sent from ESP e At the conclusion of an Auto Calibration procedure e When a lt Z gt lt Zp gt lt Zrd gt or lt K701 1 gt command is sent from ESP s Terminal Output Indicators Green Flash Mode Qn Good Read Green
239. ition Laser On Position Percentage of the full scan arc that the scan beam moves through before the laser turns on For example if set to 30 the laser will be off during the first 30 percent of the scan When Laser Framing is disabled the laser is on for 100 percent of the full scan Laser On Position Laser On Position QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 4 3 Configuration Database Configuration Database Click the Setup button and then the Configuration Database tab to display the Configuration Database view Configuration Database settings can also be configured by using the Configuration Database serial commands Calibration Configuration Database Ordered Output Output Format Index Gain AGC Mode Tracking Framing LaserOn Laser Off Laser Background Status Position Position Power Color Current ee Disabled CHEAN white B 40 Continuous 40 Disabled 10 35 Medium white T 40 Continuous 40 Disabled 10 95 Medium white E 40 Continuous 40 Disabled 10 95 Medium white 4 40 Continuous 40 Disabled 10 35 Medium white 10 40 Continuous 40 Disabled 10 95 Medium white 5 Humber of Active Indexes Load Index To Current Double clicking on an Index will bring up the 0 Number of Database Cycles Load Current To Index oo Switch Timing Receive 10 Time 10 rs Send Settings Use the Number of Active Indexes field to determine how many database indexes will be used Use the Number of
240. ked for better performance over 2 stacked and non stacked DataBar Expanded Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 14 Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled the scanner will check the symbol length against the symbol length field minus the embedded check character If disabled any length would be considered valid Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Dizabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Specifies the exact number of characters that the scanner will recognize this does not include start stop and check character characters The scanner ignores any symbol not having the specified length Fixed Symbol Length i 4 1 4 5 90 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters DataBar Limited Note DataBar Limited was previously known as RSS Limited DataBar Limited is designed to be read by laser scanners and CCD imagers It is not recommended for omnidirectional slot scanners Encodes a smaller 14 digit symbol 74 modules wide that is not omnidirectional DataBar Limited Disabled Disabled Enabled DataBar Omnidirectional Note DataBar Omnidirectional was previously known as RSS 14 Used in the grocery retail and prescription drug industries where 14 digit EAN item identificatio
241. l 5 129 I O Parameters Database Identifier Output Useful in tracking which database entries read which symbols Database Identifier Output Status Database Identifier Qutput Disabled Separator Character SP Disabled When this command is disabled no database identifier information will be output Enabled When this command is enabled the scanner will append a two digit number and the characters DB to the data output following the separator for each symbol decoded using Configuration Database For example if the separator is an underscore character and the second database entry reads a symbol encoded with data capture during the read cycle the symbol data output will be data capture _DB02 If the database is not active no identifiers will be attached to output Separator Character The separator character separates the symbol data from the database identifier Database Identifier Oukput Disabled Separator Character aF NUL SDH ST ETS EOT ENG ACK BEL BES HT LF vT FF cA so si DLE pct DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM suB ESC FS Gs Fs us SP Click Delete to remove characters EE E l F on m Ep Tp 5 130 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Input 1 Input 1 Disabled Active State Active Open Input Mode Determines the function of the Input pin i Cisabier Active
242. l Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Range Mode Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 49 Serial Commands UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge Options 0 Disabled 1 Standard 2 Edge to Edge 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge EAN Status Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Supplementals Status UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Required Separator Status UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default
243. l Scanner User Manual E 7 Quick Start Contents Step 1 Check Hardware cccccscccccssccccseeceecseceeseceeseeceeseeeeeseeeeeceuececeeceseeeeeseueesseueesseueessaseeees 1 2 Step Z Connec the Syste irira aa E e E atcha eadsac ts 1 3 Step 3 Position Scanner and Symbol ssiei cic sesc conde yecdds once fons lecesecackdediadenesdecnasecsl feadssteecdeeeanocbiceeah oes 1 4 Ste SS Call ESP ae ccsrca aa ica a Pedaccir sateen wae don daca ake ntubeten eee 1 5 NS Co ois Seler 1 6 6 e eee ee ee ee ee Ce eee rere eee oer ee ee ee 1 6 SEPO CONNEC Gurr ene men eam IRR Ome RE et oe OP te eee ee ea 1 7 DIED HESURCAC ALG 2 5 sh cgisacs a A 1 10 Slep 6 Configure Ne SCanner six cla Seah ct rs ie oes er al ede ee 1 11 Slep J Save Canes sii SF acces ct ce asa Nd ee cee ere A Nana 1 12 This section explains how to set up and test the QX 830 quickly using ESP Easy Setup Program Detailed setup information for installing the scanner into an application can be found in subsequent sections QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 1 1 Check Hardware Step 1 Check Hardware Item Description Part Number 1 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner FIS 0830 XXXXG 2 QX 1 Interface Device 98 000103 02 3 QX Cordset Common M12 12 pin Socket to M12 12 pin Plug 1m 61 000162 02 4 QX Cordset Host Serial M12 12 pin Plug to DB9 Socket 1 m 61 000152 02 5 QX Cordset Host Serial M12 12 pin Socket to DB9 So
244. l length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 0 Mixed Options 0 Mixed 1 All Narrow 2 All Wide 3 Fixed Threshold Direction Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 0 Forward Options 0 Forward 1 Reverse Fixed Threshold Value Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 400 Options 1 to 65535 GS71 DataBar RSS DataBar Omnidirectional RSS 14 Serial Cmd lt K482 status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled DataBar Limited RSS Limited Serial Cmd lt K483 status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled DataBar Expanded RSS Expanded Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 55 Serial Commands Fixed Symbol Length Status DataBar Expanded Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length DataBar Expanded Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 14
245. lar to the substrate Trigger A signal transition or character string that initiates a read cycle Very Large Scale Integration VLSI The creation of integrated circuits by combining thousands of transistor based circuits on a single chip A 134 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual
246. length status fixed MicroPDF41 7 symbol length gt Symbol Reconstruction Ba alla reconstruction redundancy symbol reconstruction Quiet Zone Serial Cmd lt K450 quiet zone status gt Default 3 Narrow Enhanced Options 0 Standard 1 Narrow 2 Standard Enhanced 3 Narrow Enhanced A 44 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Background Color Serial Cmd lt K451 background color gt Default 0 White Options 1 Black Symbol Ratios Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K452 Code 39 Codabar nterleaved 2 of 5 gt Default 1 Standard Options 0 Tight 1 Standard 2 Aggressive Codabar Serial Cmd lt K452 Code 39 Codabar nterleaved 2 of 5 gt Default 1 Standard Options 0 Tight 1 Standard 2 Aggressive Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K452 Code 39 Codabar Interleaved 2 of 5 gt Default 1 Standard Options 0 Tight 1 Standard 2 Aggressive Composite Symbology Status Composite Serial Cmd lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Required Separator Status Composite Serial Cmd lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QxX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 45 Serial Commands Separator Composite Serial Cmd lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt Default Comma Options Any 7 bit ASCII chara
247. lible Modde Oo Contgursten Tonecho D i a 16 44 Ea 0 1755 461 Base Tester fA 3 75SETB EF Private Nea 1321681 05 nn m pels QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 123 Allen Bradley Version 20 PLC Setup e Select the large assembly size and click the OK button when done A 124 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendix M EIPScan Setup Appendices This procedure is for the EIPScan simulation tool published by Pyramid Solutions 1 Right click on EIPScan Test Tool and select Add Device iia EIPScan EIPscan yx viplest1 asm1029big clg File View Request I O Stack Device JO Moduke Help D w amp Target Adapter Servee hex 1 Class hex 4 ElPScan Test Tool Network Path 10 10 5 234 Gl foram a xe nee _ _ Request all fields are in hex Host 10 11 configure assembly Predefined None X v Run mode Short I O Instance hex 1301 Attribute hex 13 berber hex Symbol Tag m Request Data Each byte is a 2 char hex value sepaiated by a space i e 0a 26 f9 Response Response Size decimal 260 DO 00 0000 DO 00000000 0000000000 00 00 000000 00 000000 0001000000 01 00000001 a 0000 00 CA 0000 00m rr Message 12 13 50 963 12 16 15 33 12 49 11 174 13 56 36 950 14 02 38 790 14 12 56 270 12 13 31 755 12 13 41 750 15 20 39 187 15 20 45 536 1F 21 R452 Connection opened with
248. libration has started 5 quick beeps Calibration has failed 1 long beep Calibration has been completed successfully 1 sec Green Flash Calibration has been completed successfully 7 24 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Utilities Outline of Full Auto Calibration Process Auto Calibration runs a calibration cycle for the scanner to optimize basic symbol decoding parameters Focus Gain Shutter Speed and Symbol Type are all configured during Auto Calibration To configure the operation of Auto Calibration see Calibration Options The calibration cycle can be entered either through ESP serial command or the EZ Button 1 0O A ON O 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 If laser framing is enabled set scan line to full If laser power calibration is enabled set laser power to factory default If motor speed calibration is enabled set motor speed to factory default If video calibration is enabled set gain and tracking to default If symbology detection is enabled initialize symbology detection array with current symbology status configuration Enable all symbologies except PDF417 and Pharmacode Symbology detection continues to operate concurrently with all remaining calibration processes Set LEDs to display 20 LED on all others off Set LEDs to display 40 LED on all others off Perform one pass of symbology detection 10
249. logy gt Default 1 Calibrate Options 0 Don t Calibrate 1 Calibrate Serial Verification Serial Command Echo Status Serial Cmd lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep Status control hex output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Serial Command Beep Status Serial Cmd lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Control Hex Output Serial Cmd lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Default 0 Control Options 0 Control 1 Hex QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 59 Serial Commands Beeper Serial Cmd lt K702 beeper status gt Default 1 Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 No Read Quality Output Separator Serial Cmd lt K704 separator decodes per trigger status gt Default comma Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Decodes per Trigger Status Serial Cmd lt K704 separator decodes per trigger status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Data Output Symbol Data Output Status Serial Cmd lt K705 symbol data output status when to output symbology i d output status gt Default 3 Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Match 2 Mismatch 3 Good Read When to Output Symbol Data Serial Cmd lt K705 symbol data output status when to output symbo
250. logy i d output status gt Default 0 As Soon As Possible Options 0 ASAP 1 End of Read Cycle Symbology ID Output Status Serial Cmd lt K705 symbol data output status when to output symbology i d output status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled AIM Defined ID 2 Readable ID Read Duration Output Read Duration Output Mode Serial Cmd lt K706 status separator gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 60 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Read Duration Output Separator Serial Cmd lt K706 status separator gt Default Space 0x20 Options Any 7 bit ASCII character No Read Message No Read Message Status Serial Cmd lt K714 No Read message status No Read message gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled No Read Message Serial Cmd lt K714 no read message status No Read message gt Default NOREAD Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters Bad Symbol Message Bad Symbol Message Status Serial Cmd lt K715 bad symbol message status message gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bad Symbol Message Serial Cmd lt K715 bad symbol message status message gt Default BAD _SYMBOL Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters No Symbol Message No Symbol Message Status Serial Cmd lt K716 no symbol message status message gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1
251. lt 1 Command Options 0 Disabled 1 Command 2 Data A 28 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Ethernet TCP Port 1 Data Type Symbol Data Output Ethernet TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Extra Symbol Information Ethernet TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Diagnostic Output Ethernet TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Source Processing Mode Ethernet TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Command Options 0 Disabled 1 Command 2 Data Ethernet TCP Port 2 Data Type Symbol Data Output Ethernet TCP Port 2 Serial Cmd lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Extra Symbol Information Ethernet TCP Port 2 Serial Cmd lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external sou
252. lt A gt initializes the scanner s memory but does not save for power on For example to enable UPC and save the change for power on send lt K473 1 gt lt Z gt To change Baud Rate and reset without saving changes for power on send lt K100 3 gt lt A gt Serial Configuration Command Conventions e All command fields except the last must be followed by a comma without a space e NULL cannot be used The characters lt gt and can be used but only if entered as hex pairs see ASCII Character Entry Modifier e All fields preceding a modified field must be included e If there is no change in preceding fields then commas alone can be entered in these fields For example if only the last field in the following command is changing lt K100 4 7 0 0 gt can be entered as lt K100 0 gt e All fields following a modified field can be omitted For example to change Baud Rate only send lt K100 3 gt QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 21 Serial Commands Concatenating Configuration Commands Commands can be concatenated added together in a single string For example lt K145 1 gt lt K220 1 gt lt K450 7 gt lt A gt enables LRC sets End of Read Cycle mode to New Trigger enables Narrow Quiet Zone and resets the data buffers without saving the changes for power on Serial Command Status Request To ensure that any command was received and accepted send the Show Reader Status command lt gt
253. ly selected Add Exception Remove Exception Advanced Options Send Current View Send Current Command Add Remove Exception After a Receive Reader Settings command is performed and the Add Exception option is selected a list of serial commands may appear These are commands that may be in the scanner s firmware but are not included in or are different from the current version of ESP These commands can be edited by double clicking them and changing them as needed It is important to note that these commands will be saved to the scanner whenever a Save to Reader command is sent or when an lt A gt or a lt Z gt command is sent Also if there is a corresponding ESP menu item the ESP Value column for that item will be blank following a Receive Reader Settings command 1 From the Send Recv button or by right clicking in any blank section of a tree control view QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 2 17 Send Receive Options 2 18 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual E 3 Hardware Integration Contents 6110 1c oa ae ee mt a ee an oe ee ee Oe a eee 3 2 QX 830 and QX 1 Connectors And PINOUtS ccccceeeccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeceseeeeesaeeeesauaesesseeesanaees 3 3 POWCr and TMOGER S WICNING ekoa A din esansl coca tace enieesee xe eeiu se cesions 3 8 FPO FROUMIIAG S Siae a a a a A Const ndceecemnanasnacandenceviaseachsedances E T 3 9 PO OIIC ATION EE XAITVOIS Sse aie ors carck waged E A EE
254. mber of data bits n data bits This feature can be disabled by sending lt a1 gt again QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 7 5 Counters Counters Utilities Click the Utilities button and then the Counters tab to display the Counters view Counter commands can be a numeric value from 00000 to 65535 After reaching the maximum numeric limit of 65535 an error message will be displayed and the counter will automatically roll over and start counting again at 00000 To obtain the cumulative total of counts after the rollover has occurred add 65536 per each rollover the scanner does not keep track of the number of rollovers to the current count Note All counter values will be lost if power is recycled to the scanner or if the scanner receives a Reset or Save command Click the Request button to display the appropriate count or Clear to set the counter to zero Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Digital Bar Code Firmware Request Clear Tiner pO Trigger Good Read No ead and Mismatch Regest Cler_ Goodreat Sirutansoucly Request Request Clear O and Clear buttons fo the Request Clear Aai pO Request All Clear All counters can be All and Clear All buttons left of each item QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Utilities Counters Serial Utility Commands No Read Counter sending lt N gt displays the
255. mbols can be placed into unfiltered output positions For example if the number of symbols required is 6 but there are only 5 active filters the last position can be filled by any unfiltered qualified symbol Output Filter Configuration Rule 2 The same filter setup can be used multiple times For example filters 1 2 and 3 can be set up to filter Code 39 symbols and the output will occur in the order the symbols are decoded Output Filter Configuration Rule 3 All qualified symbols will be sorted and output in the matching filter position If a symbol matches filter 3 it will be output as the third symbol If a filter does not have a matching qualified symbol a No Read message will be output in place of the symbol assuming the No Read message is enabled For example if there is not a symbol that meets filter 3 s requirements then a No Read message will be output in the third output position QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 4 9 Output Format Output Format Click the Setup button and then the Output Format tab to display the Output Format view Enable Output Format This is a global enable disable parameter Use Set Number of Symbols and Output Phrase to assign symbols for formatting and Symbol Parse to determine the specific output content for the assigned symbols On the Output Format tab check the Enable Output Format box Calibration Configuration Database Ordered Output
256. ments Field Name 0 U32 1 User Defined Tag U32 32 bit flags omen U32 2 32 bit flags 1 External Output Control User Defined Tag This provides the PLC programmer a method of uniquely identifying multiple readers in the system This field serves no functional purpose in the QX 830 The value sent by the PLC for this field is echoed back to the input assemblies QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 97 Using EtherNet IP Command Bit Action 0O Trigger 1 New Master 2 7 8 Disable Scanning 9 15 Reserved 16 Clear Read Cycle Report and Counters 17 Unlatch Outputs 18 31 Reserved The PLC programmer should verify that a Command has been received by QX 830 by observing the equivalent echo field in the IN assemblies Trigger 0 Edge event driven Takes effect when read mode is Serial Edge or Level A transition from 0 to 1 is a rising edge trigger event A transition from 1 to 0 is a falling edge trigger event The following sources all induce trigger events in the reader including e A serial command from a serial com port e EZ button e External Trigger input signal on connector A e Command Trigger bit in the OUT assembly If the reader is to be exclusively triggered by the PLC then all other trigger sources must be kept idle New Master 1 Edge event driven A transition from 0 to 1 is a command to the unit similar to sending the lt G gt serial comman
257. mmunication tab to display the Communication tree control Sy Parameters Parameters ESP Values Communications RS232 A R5232 B Enabled RS 422 Disabled Ethernet Enabled Protocol Selection Point to Point External Data Routing Disabled Array Communication Modes Disabled Preamble Disabled mie Postamble Enabled eer is the default gt To open nested options To change a setting double click the single click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options Note Communication settings can also be sent to the scanner from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format Refer to the Communication section of Appendix E 5 2 QxX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Port Routing The QX 830 features a communication system based on Port Routing instead of traditional dedicated serial ports Decisions can be made about the direction and content of communication between ports based on different Data Types Any available port can be used in any combination The fundamental concept of Port Routing is that communication design can be based upon Data Types rather than ports The advantage of this is the ability to map different data types to different ports the user is no longer limited to a Host Port and Aux Port for specific types of input and output Since each port is independent instead of fix
258. n may be needed DataBar 14 is a fixed symbol length symbology that encodes 14 digits including a 1 digit indicator DataBar 14 is 96 modules wide It can be stacked in two rows it can read omnidirectionally if printed in full height or horizontally if height truncated for small marking Note Where appropriate use 1 non stacked for better performance instead of 2 stacked decode both stacked and non stacked DataBar Omnidirectional Disabled Disabled Enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 91 Symbologies PDF417 Used in applications where a large amount of information over 32 characters needs to be encoded within a symbol typically where the symbol is transported from one facility to another For example an automobile assembly line might use a single symbol with multiple fields of information that will be read at several stations along the way without reference to a database A two dimensional multi row 3 to 90 continuous variable length symbology that has high data capacity up to 2 700 numeric characters 1 800 printable ASCII characters or 1 100 binary characters per symbol Each symbol character consists of 4 bars and 4 spaces ina 17 module structure PDF 417 Enabled Scan oun 65555 Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 10 Decode at End of Read Disabled Note Sending lt a1 gt from ESP s Terminal will cause PDF417 data to be prefaced with info
259. nation of Modifiers for Code 39 Codabar and Interleaved 2 of 5 For Code 39 Codabar and Interleaved 2 of 5 the modifier indicates Check Character and Check Character Output status e For Code 39 only Full ASCII must be enabled to see modifiers 4 5 and 7 Check Moamer hater arate ra oss on 0 Disabled N A No 1 Enabled Enabled No 3 Enabled Disabled No 4 Disabled N A Yes 5 Enabled Enabled Yes 7 Enabled Disabled Yes Example A5 indicates a Code 39 symbol with Check Character and Check Character Output enabled and Full ASCII conversion performed Explanation of Modifiers for Other Symbologies e For Code 128 a 1 indicates EAN 128 otherwise the modifier is 0 e For all other symbologies the modifier is 0 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 99 Symbologies Background Color Symbol backgrounds are often White or other very light colors If the background is darker than the symbol Black background should be enabled Allows the user to specify the symbol background used in the application Background Color white White When White background is enabled the bars of linear symbols and the elements of 2D symbols are recognized as dark on a light background Black When Black background is enabled the bars of linear symbols and the elements of 2D symbols are recognized as light on a dark background 5 100 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Par
260. nce on mismatch gt Master Symbol Database Size lt K224 number of master symbols gt New Master Pin lt K225 status gt Sequence Step lt K228 sequence step gt Master Symbol lt K231 index master symbol data gt Match Replace lt K735 status replacement string gt Mismatch Replace lt K736 status replacement string gt Matchcode Matchcode Type Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Wild Card 3 Sequential Sequential Matching Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 0 Increment Options 0 Increment 1 Decrement Match Start Position Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 0 Options O to 3000 Match Length Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 1 Options 1 to 3000 A 68 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Wild Card Character Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read
261. nd Options 0 Disabled 1 Command 2 Data Preamble Preamble Status Serial Cmd lt K141 status preamble character s gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 30 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Preamble Characters Serial Cmd lt K141 status preamble character s gt Default CR 0x0D Options 1 4 ASCII characters Postamble Postamble Status Serial Cmd lt K142 status postamble character s gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Postamble Characters Serial Cmd lt K142 status postamble character s gt Default CR LF 0x0D 0x0A Options 1 4 ASCII characters Response Timeout Serial Cmd lt K143 response timeout gt Default 5 x10 ms 50 Options 0 to 255 x10 ms LRC Status Serial Cmd lt K145 status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ACK NAK Options Serial Cmd lt K147 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt RES NAK Defaults RES Reset 00 disabled REQ Request 00 disabled STX Start of Text 00 disabled ETX End of Text 00 disabled ACK Acknowledge 06 NAK Negative Acknowledge 15 Polling Mode Options Serial Cmd lt K148 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 31 Serial Commands RES NAK Defaults RES Reset REQ Request STX Start of Text ETX End of Text ACK Acknowledge NAK Negative Acknowledge 04 05 02 03 06
262. nd Edge enabled an edge or serial trigger ends a read cycle and initiates the next read cycle In the case of External Level a falling edge trigger ends the read cycle but the next read cycle does not begin until the occurrence of the next rising edge trigger Timeout or New Trigger Useful in applications that require an alternative way to end the read cycle For example if an assembly line should stop completely or the intervals between objects are highly irregular Timeout or New Trigger is identical to Timeout except that a timeout or a new trigger whichever occurs first ends the read cycle Last Frame Useful in applications in which the timeout duration varies Last Frame or New Trigger Useful in applications in which line speeds are irregular and a new object could appear before the last frame in the sequence Last Frame or New Trigger is identical to New Trigger except that a new trigger or last frame whichever occurs first ends the read cycle 5 56 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Read Cycle Timeout Read Cycle Timeout determines the duration of the read cycle End of Read Cycle Mode Timenut Read Cycle Timeout i O00 Seconds QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 57 Read Cycle Processing Timeout Useful in higher speed applications with long processing times Processing Timeout 1710 65535 1 ms Note If a timeout occurs during processing and no symbol
263. ndard UPC or EAN symbology and the supplemental symbology when Supplementals is set to Enabled or Required Separator Status Disabled i i b E d x Enabled 5 84 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Separator Character As required by the application Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a new character Note Whenever Separator Character is defined as a comma sending a lt K473 s gt command from ESP s Terminal will return the current settings including the separator character comma which appears after the separator status comma Separator Character OO f NUL SOH STX ETx EOT Engl ACK BEL es HT LE f vr FF cR _so _s1 DLEf Der Dc2 Dca Dca NAK SYN ETB caN Em sue Esc _Fs GS RSJ us sP Click Delete to remove characters Supplementals Type As required by symbology used in application Allows the user to select 2 character or 5 character supplements or both Supplementals Type Both ioth Two Char Only Five Char Onl Either 2 character or 5 character supplementals will be considered valid Both Two Characters Only Only two character supplementals will be considered valid Five Characters Only Only five character supplementals will be considered valid QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 85 Symbologies UPC E as UPC A When disabled the scanner will output the version E s
264. ned 4 Oj Module Defined E Trends 2 1 0 Configuration H E 1756 Backplane 1756 44 fa 0 1756 L61 MscanLogx5561 S f 3 1756 ENBT A ep B a Ethernet o 1756 ENBT A eip ETHERNET MODULE qx E Module Properties eip ETHERNET MODULE 1 1 General Connection Module Info Requested Packet Interval RPI 200 34 ms 1 0 3200 0 ms I Inhibit Module T Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails while in Run Mode Module Fault Status Offline Ready QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 107 Allen Bradley Version 16 PLC Setup 7 Double click on the Controller Tags item and verify QX 830 s l and O tags appear in the Controller Tags window fa RSLuyix 5000 MsvanLuvix3561 1756 161 File Edit Yew Search Logic Communications Tools Window Hep alsel al simile ool CO SI TI ll Offline J T AUN E E Poth Ab ETHIP 110 10 5 239 Backplanc r z l No Forces b m oK No Edits ae al Fst BIEL ak sakea gt Redundancy w B 4 gt K Fworitee Timer Counter Controller MscanLagix5561 i Controller Tags AscanLogix5561 controller A Controller Tags E Controller Fauk Handler Scope fo MscanLogixs61 Show Show all Pawer Up Handler 43 Tasks a aa MainTask ge ane ian AB ETHERNET_MODULE C 0 oO MainProgram Fox O O TA a AB ETHERNET_MODULE_DINT_176Bytes 1 0 unscheduled Programs am
265. ner to beep once whenever a K command is entered to indicate that the command was accepted and processed If an invalid command is entered the scanner beeps 5 times to indicate an invalid entry However this does not necessarily mean that all data fields have been entered incorrectly Only one bad field needs to be found in order to activate the 5 beep response Serial Verification Serial Command Echo Status Disabled Serial Command Beep Status Disabled ContralfHex Output Deon Enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 117 I O Parameters Control Hex Output Useful for viewing settings with binary characters when using serial commands on a terminal Determines the response to a Serial Command Echo or status request command When set to Control two characters are transmitted to represent a non displayable character For example a carriage return will be shown as M Serial verification Serial Command Echo Status Disabled Serial Command Beep Status Disabled ControlfHes Oukput Control Control Hex 5 118 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters EZ Button 100 GR MOD ACT go EELK a FR yj enue i NET LNK EE 20 STS Serves as a master switch to enable disable the EZ Button status EZ Button Enabled Default On Power on Enabled Single Beep Read Rate Two Beeps Calibration Three Beeps Save For Power on Four Beeps Auto Fr
266. nger character sequences For example to insert a 10 character sequence in user defined output three commands with consecutive index numbers would be required where the first two character sequence lengths were 4 and the third was 2 Serial Cmd lt K741 output index length hex string gt Default 0 Disabled end of format cell array Options 1 to 4 Hex String Specifies a character string that represents ASCII characters to be inserted in the database entry Two hex characters are required for every ASCII character to be inserted in the user defined output string These two characters comprise the hex base 16 value of the ASCII character For example to enter the three character sequence Hi 3 would indicate the length of the string and a hex sequence of 486921 would be the ASCII sequence to be inserted 48 H 69 i 21 Important Each pair of hex characters represents one ASCII character Hex character pairs range from 00 to FF Since there is a limit of 4 ASCII characters per insertion per database entry there is a limit of 8 hex characters per insertion per database entry Serial Cmd lt K741 output index length hex string gt Default NULL 0x00 Options 00 to FF As many as 4 bytes or hex pairs Format Assign Symbol Number Serial Cmd lt K742 symbol number status gt Options 1 to 10 1 Formatted output status for symbol 1 2 Formatted output status for symbol 2 10 Formatted output st
267. nnectors Connector B is a 12 pin socket on RS 232 scanner models and an 8 pin socket on Ethernet models QX 830 Connector Pin Assignments Output 2 New Master 4 44 3 Default 2 Power Output 1 5 e 10 E 232 Output 3 fh A File I Trigger Ground 7 Input Common N RS 232 RxD Output oa Connector A All Models M12 12 pin Plug Pin Function Wire Color 1 Trigger White 2 Power Brown 3 Default Green 4 New Master Yellow 5 Output 1 Gray 6 Output 3 Pink 7 Ground Blue 8 Input Common Red 9 RS 232 Host RxD Black 10 RS 232 Host TxD Violet 11 Output 2 Gray Pink 12 Output Common Red Blue QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual RS 422 485 RxD Input 9 RS 232 TxD RS 232 RTS Common 8 1g 1 Trigger Ground 7 En o g 0 RS 232 RxD RS 232 CTS J RS 422 485 RxD s tfe 2 Power RS 422 485 5 TxD Input 1 4 n 3 Terminated RS 422 485 TxD Connector B Serial Models M12 12 pin Socket Pin Function Wire Color 1 Trigger White 2 Power Brown 3 Default Green 4 New Master Yellow 5 Port 3 422 485 TxD Gray 6 Port 3 422 485 RxD Pink 7 Ground Blue 8 Input Common Red 9 Port 2 TxD Port 1 RTS Black 10 Port 2 RxD Port 1 CTS Violet 11 Port 3 422 485 TxD Gray Pink 12 Port 3 422 485 RxD Red Blue QX 830 and QX 1 Connectors and Pinouts QX 830 and QX 1 Connector
268. nner User Manual 5 135 I O Parameters Trend Analysis Note Output On under Output 1 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Under Output 1 Parameters expand the Trend Analysis tree Useful in cases where the user doesn t want to shut down for one condition but wants to monitor quality and read conditions Applies Trend Analysis settings to Output 1 With Trend Analysis the user can track the occurrences and frequency of mismatches No Reads and the number of reads per trigger and output the results to any of three outputs Trend Analysis Mode No Read Trigger Evaluation Period 25 triggers read cycles Number to Output On 4 In this example the scanner will activate an output when 4 No Reads occur within a period of 25 triggers read cycles 5 136 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Trend Analysis Mode Sets the trend condition Mismatch No Read Decodes per Trigger Bad Symbol or No Symbol that will activate the output Output 1 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Wo Read Output State Normally Open Pulse width 50 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Aead Number of Triggers Number to Output Gn No Read Decodes per Trigger Decodes per Trigger Diagnostics nel TS SLE High Temperature Service Unit Disabled Laser Current High Disabled Laser Current Low Disabled Low Temperature Disabled Mi
269. nner will function in a Decodes per Trigger mode during the read cycle and the trend analysis operation Output will be activated based on whether or not the symbol decode count at the end of the read cycle is less than the decodes per trigger threshold Note Although this setup causes the scanner to function in a Decodes per Trigger mode the decode count will only be appended to the symbol data if the status of the Decodes per Trigger command is enabled Output 2 Parameters Output Or Mismatch or No Read Output State Normally Open Pulse Width S00 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On 0 Decodes per Trigger 0 65535 Example Decodes per Trigger threshold 100 100 or more decodes No output Fewer than 100 decodes Output fires 5 150 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Diagnostics Note Output On under Output 2 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Under Output 2 Parameters expand the Diagnostics tree When Diagnostic Warning is enabled the Output On configuration has no effect The output will remain active as long as one of the diagnostic warning conditions is met The output will become inactive once it detects that there are no diagnostic warning conditions High Temperature Activates output when the temperature exceeds factory defined upper limits Output 2 Parameters
270. nouts Microscan offers two flying leads cordsets 61 000166 02 and 61 00016 7 02 for use in QX hardware configurations The diagrams below show the correspondence of wire colors to pins 61 000166 02 QX Cordset M12 12 Pin Plug Flying Leads The 61 000166 02 cordset connects to QX 830 Connector B serial and QX 1 Connector 2 BROWN 3000 50 GREEN 100 20 GREY PINK RED BLUE 61 000167 02 QX Cordset M12 12 Pin Socket Flying Leads The 61 000167 02 cordset connects to QX 830 Connector A and QX 1 Connectors 1 and 3 ue N 3000 50 GREEN 100 20 YELLOW GREY GREY PINK RED BLUE QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Appendix E Serial Commands Note For a list of utility commands such as defaults read rate requests device control options and scanner status requests see Serial Utility Commands on page A 68 Communication RS 232 A lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt RS 232 B lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt RS 422 lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Ethernet lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt Ethernet TCP Ports lt K127 TCP Port 1 7CP Port 2 gt EtherNet IP lt K129 status gt RS 232 A Data Type lt K130 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt RS 232 B Data Type lt K131 symbol data output e
271. nt string gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Replacement String Serial Cmd lt K736 status replacement string gt Default MISMATCH Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters A 70 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Diagnostics High Temperature Threshold lt K402 status message gt Low Temperature Threshold lt K403 status message gt Counts Read only Beall returns power on resets power on saves custom default Hours Since Reset Read only lt K407 gt returns hours minutes Service Message lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Laser Current Warning Message lt K411 aser high status laser high message laser low status laser low message gt User Defined Name lt K412 user defined name gt High Temperature Threshold Serial Cmd Default Options Message Serial Cmd Default Options lt K402 status message gt 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled lt K402 status message gt HIGH_TEMP Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters Low Temperature Threshold Serial Cmd Default Options Message Serial Cmd Default Options lt K403 status message gt 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled lt K403 status message gt LOW_TEMP Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters Counts Read only Power On Serial Cmd Resets Serial Cmd lt K406 power on resets power on saves power
272. nts every 60 seconds Range 0 to 59 minutes QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 179 Diagnostics Laser High When Enabled a Laser High message is transmitted whenever the laser current exceeds a factory calibrated reference value which cannot be altered The message repeats once every 30 minutes until the condition is corrected Alerts the user to impending laser failure Contact Microscan Service Status Allows the user to Enable or Disable the Laser High message Laser High Status Disabled ee Disabled Enabled Message Defines the Laser High message Laser High Status Disabled H I G H L d E F 5 180 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Laser Low When Enabled a Laser Low message is transmitted whenever the laser current falls below a factory calibrated reference value which cannot be altered The message repeats once every 30 minutes until the condition is corrected Alerts the user to impending laser failure Contact Microscan Service Status Allows the user to Enable or Disable the Laser Low message Laser Low Status Disabled Message Disabled Enabled Message Defines the Laser Low message Laser Low Status Disabled L T W L A d E F QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 181 Diagnostics High Temperature Threshold A message can be defined that will display when a user defined High Temperatu
273. ogic Communications Tools Window Help elsa s e o gt alaelal ie Ciel lal Offline D m RUN E EA Path AB_ETHIP 1 10 10 5 233 Backplane 0 z l No Forces gt ae a No Edits S mo K Aire E Se ES Redundea p 5 D KIA i Favorites Counte amp Controller MscanLogix5561 Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler Power Up Handler amp Tasks SQ MainTask H amp MainProgram E Unscheduled Programs amp Motion Groups Ungrouped Axes G Add On Instructions amp Data Types Of User Defined E Strings i Add On Defined ir Predefined Module Defined i Trends amp 1 0 Configuration 6 1756 Backplane 1756 44 fla 0 1756 L61 MscanLogix5561 3 1756 ENBT A eip Ctrl Create a module E Select Module os LPO4 AENT IA 1794 GENT B 2364F RGU EN1 im CrivelogixS 730 Ethernet ETHERNET BRIDGSE mE THERNET MODULE ETHERMET P4 amp NELYVIEV EtherNetfIP PowerFlex 4 E PowerFlex 40 E PowerFlex 40P E PowerFlex 70 EC E PowerFlex 70 E By Category By Vendor QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Controller Tags MscanLogix5561 controller Scope fla Mscanl ogix5561 Show Show AII lt gt Monitor Tags Edit Tags IKE hd a 4 Select ETHERNET MODULE Generic Ethernet Module and click OK 1794 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Adapter Twisted Pair Media 1794 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Adapter Twi
274. ogramming the scanner by using symbols Bar Code Configuration Mode can be entered two different ways 1 By forcing the scanner into Bar Code Configuration Mode by serial command lt BCCFG gt 2 By configuring one of the four EZ Button positions Single Beep Two Beeps Three Beeps Four Beeps to Bar Code Configuration Mode Once Bar Code Configuration Mode has been entered symbols can be thought of as serial data Configure the scanner by printing symbols in Microscan s serial command format Commands are processed as if the data were streamed in through the serial port The scanner will acknowledge the symbol with a beep green flash and echo the serial data to the host If the command causes the scanner to produce more serial output such as serial verification or counter requests the data will be routed to the host Bar Code Configuration Mode can be exited by any reset lt A gt or lt Z gt command as well as a lt J gt or a quick press and release of the EZ Button The command to exit Bar Code Configuration Mode can be included as part of the symbol For example try encoding lt K200 4 gt lt K220 1 gt lt J gt into a symbol This configures the scanner to enable Serial Trigger Mode to program a new trigger to end the read cycle and to exit Bar Code Configuration Mode with lt J gt To end all EZ Button functions press the EZ Button once and quickly release QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 7 27 Embedded
275. om the scanner Diagnostics Output Enables or disables diagnostics output from the scanner External Source Processing Mode Enables or disables processing of commands or data from sources external to the scanner Command Command enables command processing in the scanner Data Data enables EtherNet IP as a data source port Note The data path between in the source port and out the source port is always two way Data is copied from source data ports and all those source ports data is transmitted to the destination port and from the destination port to the source port QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 23 Communication Protocol Selection In general the point to point protocols will work well in most applications They require no address and must use RS 232 or RS 422 communication standards Protocols define the sequence and format in which information is transferred between the scanner and the host or in the case of Multidrop between the scanners and a concentrator Note In all protocol modes the Preamble and Postamble character strings can be used to frame the decoded data and both are included in calculating the LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Protocol Port RS232 A ATK f NAK Options RES MUL REQ MUL STX MUL ETX MUL ACK ACK MAK MAK Polling Mode Options RES EOT REC ENG STA ST ETX ETX ACE ACK MAK MAK Response Timeout LE
276. on T Match Length 1 Wild Card i Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step 1 Mew Master Pin Disabled Disabled Enabled New Master Load Status The new master status responds with the number of the next master position to be loaded where 0 represents idle or no master to be loaded Example f the user has the Master Symbol Database Size set to 1 and then either sends a lt G gt or toggles an active New Master Pin the state will be 1 and prior to reading and effectively loading position 1 the response to lt NEWM gt would be lt NEWM 1 gt Once a symbol has been read and loaded the status will be cleared lt NEWM 0 gt QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 175 Matchcode Match Replace Provides a convenient shortcut for applications that need to output a predefined text string whenever a symbol matches a master symbol Outputs a user defined data string whenever a match occurs and Matchcode is enabled Sig Match Replace Disabled Replacement String cence Enabled Replacement String User defined data string that when enabled replaces symbol data whenever a match occurs Match Replace Disabled Replacement String MATCH Mismatch Replace Provides a convenient shortcut for applications that need to output a predefined text string whenever a symbol does not match a master symbol Outputs a user defined data string whenever a mismatch o
277. on flash saves gt 16 bit counter that increments on scanner power on lt K406 power on resets power on saves power on flash saves gt 16 bit counter that increments on scanner reset Value is reset on power on QxX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 71 Serial Commands Power On Saves Serial Cmd lt K406 power on resets power on saves power on flash saves gt 16 bit counter that increments when a scanner setting is saved for power on lt Z gt command Custom Default Saves Serial Cmd lt K406 power on resets oower on saves power on flash saves gt 16 bit counter that increments when a scanner setting is saved to the customer parameter section of flash memory lt Zc gt command Hours Since Reset Read only Hours Serial Cmd lt K407 hours minutes gt 16 bit counter 0 to 65535 Minutes Serial Cmd lt K407 hours minutes gt 16 bit counter 0 to 60 Service Message Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Service Message Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default SERVICE Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters Threshold Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default 300 5 minutes Options 1 to 65535 Resolution Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default 0 Seconds Options 0 Seconds 1
278. onfiguration window link the first two items to the module name assigned earlier Import Configuration Tags Data Types qx JAB ETHERNE ira Existing 0 B ETHERNE Use Existing Holban Orona Nere a1 o Create New gx_ O_small_pt qx_lO_s Create New Cancel Help 12 Link l to the input assembly Import Configuration Tags Data Types Data ie AB ETHERNET_MODULE_DINT_176Bytes 1 0 Description Controller Program Show Show All A 110 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 13 Link O to the output assembly Import Configuration Tags Data Types Appendices Name J Alias For Data Tyne EN qx l Al 0 E E Controller Program Show Show All 14 Delete any empty rungs fa RSLuyix 5000 MsvanLuvix3961 1756 161 AB ETHERNE AB ETHERNE AB ETHERNE Name qx 0 Data Type AB ETHERNET_MODULE_DINT_12Bytes 0 0 Description a a AB ETHERNE Use Existing File Edit ew Search Logic Communications Tools Window Hep else S xsmlelolo SCS SI TI alal Offline fi AUN No Forces T Ok No Edits a ae Redundancy ED n E Path AB_ETHIP 1510 10 5 233 Bachplane S Eal laj H ia a w lil 4 K Faoritee AddOn amp Alarms A Bit A TimenCounter J Controller MscanLagix5561 j Controller Tag
279. onous Copy File Source Dest gx_lO_small_pt IN Synchronous Copy File Source gx_lO_stmall_pt OUT gx 1 choose one CPS for IN and OUT _smal_pt or _big_pt Synchronous Copy File Source Dest gx_lO_big_pt N Synchronous Copy File Source qx_lO_kig_pt OUT Dest gx Length 1 Rung O of 2 IAPR Ven QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 16 Appendices In this example the small assembly set has been kept fo RSLuyix 5000 MsvanLuvix3561 1756 161 File Edit Yew Search Logic Cammunicatiors Tools Window Hep alsa a xmle ol l dsl le Il ala Offline l E AUN No Forces ae E ok No Edits a nae Redundancy iy se Fa E E 4 Hlal afaj m a K Fworitee Add On Timer Counter gt E E Controller MscanLagix5S61 Controller Tags Controller Fauk Handler i Pawer Up Handler d Tasks H 8 MainTask B MainProgram Program Tags MainRoutins Unscheduled Programs Motion Groups Ungrouped Axes Add on Instructions J Data Types User Defined A qx_command tn qx_devioe_status i E Qx_extemal_inputs E qx_extermal_outputs A qx_IN_big_udt AA gx_IN_small_udt ie qx_ID_big_udt E gs _IO_small_udt ff gx_OUT_udt Qi Strings of striz8 lM strot i STRING ae Ei MainProgram MainRoutine i l i MainRoutine AA P BE MainProurem 4 gt Monitor Tags Enter non BOOL File source opa
280. options Note I O Parameters settings can also be sent to the scanner from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format Refer to the I O Parameters section of Appendix E QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 107 I O Parameters Symbol Data Output Symbol Data Output relates to data and should not be confused with Outputs 1 2 and 3 listed in the Output Parameters which describe output states and functions Useful when the host needs symbol data only under certain conditions Defines the conditions under which decoded symbol data is transmitted to the host Note Symbol Data Output Status if set to Match or Mismatch will not take effect unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory Se 5ymbol Data Output Good Read When to Output Symbol Data Disabled Match Mismatch Good Read Symbol Data Output Status Disabled It is useful when an application only needs to use the discrete outputs and can allow the scanner to do the decision making When Disabled the host does not need the symbol data and the communication lines are used only for setup and status checks When set to Disabled the scanner will not transmit any data that is generated during a read cycle symbols No Reads etc Match Match is used in an application that requires specific symbol information and needs to sort route or verify based on matching the specific symbol data When set to Match
281. ort Serial Cmd Default Options lt K160 protocol address protocol port gt 1 1 50 1 Poll address 0x1C select address 0x1D 2 Poll address 0x1E select address 0x1F 50 Poll address 0x7E select address 0x7F lt K160 protocol address protocol port gt 0 0 1 0 Main RS 232 on QX 830 Connector A 1 RS 422 485 on QX 830 Connector B External Data Routing Mode Serial Cmd Default Options lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Transparent 2 Half Duplex 3 Full Duplex 4 Customized Destination Port Serial Cmd Default Options A 34 lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt 0 RS 232 on QX 830 Connector A 0 RS 232 on QX 830 Connector A 1 RS 232 on QX 830 Connector B 2 RS 422 on QX 830 Connector B 4 Ethernet TCP Port 1 5 Ethernet TCP Port 2 6 EtherNet IP QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Ambles to Source Serial Cmd lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Echo to Source Serial Cmd lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX outp
282. oy QX 830s in an application the host computer must be in the same IP range as the devices Network settings are accessible in Windows from the Control Panel The steps below show how TCP IP settings can be configured 1 From the Windows Start Menu open Control Panel and double click Network Connections amp Control Panel File Edit View Favorites E X E pe Search Folders Tools Help Eu Address GC Control Panel Name Accessibility Options SE Add Hardware Add or Remove Programs 4M Administrative Tools ta Adobe Gamma 7 Automatic Updates Date and Time EN Display Folder Options ee Fonts F Game Controllers amp Internet Options amp akeyboard OP mail Mouse Nero BurnRights Network Connections I NVIDIA nview Desktop Manager Phone and Modem Options amp Power Options Printers and Faxes 9 Regional and Language Options Sy Scanners and Cameras EI Scheduled Tasks ty Security Center alsoundmax Sounds and Audio Devices g Speech System B Taskbar and Start Menu 89 User Accounts Se Windows Firewall a Wireless Network Setup Wizard lt Comments Adjust your computer settings for vision hearing and mobility Installs and troubleshoots hardware Install or remove programs and Windows components Configure administrative settings For your computer Calibrate monitor for consistent color create ICC profile Set up Windows to automatically deliver important updates Set the
283. p Motion Groups Ungrouped Axes E Add On Instructions E Data Types El on User Defined Strings a Add On Defined fe Op Predefined ER Module Defined Trends 1 0 Configuration 1756 Backplane 1756 44 fa 0 1756 L61 MscanLogx5561 S f 3 1756 ENBT A ep G as Ethernet 1756 ENBT A eip i ETHERNET MODULE gx AB ETHERNET_MODULE_DINT_12Bytes 0 0 4 gt Monitor Tags AEdit Tags lal 8 Open the Main Routine fa RSLuyix 5000 MscanLuvix3561 1756 161 File Edit iew Search Logic Cammunicatiors Tools Window Hep alsel S sael ol alele Gig alel Offline j AUN Path 48_ETHIP 1 10 10 5 233 Backplane Or x No Forces P m OK No Edite a laj tet Kakak a Soe gt Redundancy ie 4 b fi Fworitoe Timer Counter Controller MscanLagix5561 Controller Tags NscanLogix5561 contraller So x A Controller Tags 9 Controller Fauk Handler Scope ffaMecanLoginss61 Show Show All Pawer Up Handler Name amp Value oe Data Type Des A E Tasks m z S MainTask AB ETHERNET_MODULE CO GR MainProgram ee ABETHERNET_MODULE_DINT_176Byle A Program Tags 0 ABETHEANET_MODULE_DINT_12Bytes Unscheduled Progr 1 6 Motion Groups 0 Ungrouped Axes Cut cole GB Add On Instructions Bs copy crlee E Data Types E Paste Sti
284. p fixed symbol length status symbol length check character tyoe check character output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 48 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Output Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Length 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 16 Options 0 to 128 Symbol Length 2 Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 6 Options 0 to 128 Guard Bar Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Seria
285. pact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Daisy Chain ID The Daisy Chain ID is a two character identifier Array Communication Modes Disabled SOUFCE RS232 B Daisy Chain ID Status Disabled Daisy Chain ID Click Delete to remove characters QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 39 Communication Daisy Chain Autoconfigure For quick setup of a daisy chain configuration The command to Autoconfigure the daisy chain is sent to the primary scanner and the software responds in the following ways e Counts the number of secondary scanners in the daisy chain e Assigns an internal ID number 1 n to each secondary scanner where the first secondary scanner is number 1 the primary scanner s ID being a 0 e Propagates the communication settings and the relevant operating modes of the primary scanner to the ports of each secondary scanner e Resets each secondary scanner e Confirms that each secondary scanner has acquired the new settings When setting up a daisy chain operation perform the following steps 1 5 40 Set the primary scanner the one connected to the host to Serial Data Trigger Mode This sets all the scanners in the chain to Serial Data when the command is executed Important All secondary scanners must be set to Serial Data Trigger Mode for Daisy Chain to function Before Autoconfigure the primary scanner must be set to Serial S Primary
286. perform an installation test on the file s click Next QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 119 Allen Bradley Version 20 PLC Setup e Click the Next button This test evaluates each EDS file for emors in the EDS file This test does not ba ec work eds qe 830 32 000002 10 eds e Click the Next button You can change the graphic image that is associated with a device A 120 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices e Click the Next button Rockwell Automation s EDS Wizard Final Task Summary This is a review of the task you want to complete i You would like to register the following device Ox 230 e Click the Finish button Rockwell Automation s EDS Wizard Fa You have successfully completed the EDS Wizard Lm D QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 121 Allen Bradley Version 20 PLC Setup e Now the EDS file has been loaded into RSLogix s database Right click the Ethernet menu item and select New Module A RSLogix 5000 Basic Tester 1756 161 20 11 Fle Edt Wen Search Loge Conmacaters Tools Widow Hels 9 1 0 Configuration mite MF 1756 Badola a pae fa 0 1756 E n ars print 2 En Read e To find your camera in the list type fis and the dialog will show only devices with the letters fis in the name Either double click the camera you want or highlight it and click the Cr
287. place Do not twist the connectors as this will bend the pins Important Do not attempt to power more than four scanners with a single power supply in a daisy chain configuration Add a QX 1 and one power supply for every four additional scanner in the daisy chain Note The configuration instructions below are for simple direct connections to an RS 232 or Ethernet host The QX 1 can be added to RS 232 or Ethernet configurations in which greater flexibility and complexity are required The first diagram in Step 1 shows a standalone configuration that includes the QX 1 RS 232 Standalone without QX 1 e Connect the Serial Communication Cable from B on the QX 830 to the host e Connect the power supply to A on the QX 830 e Plug in the power supply Ethernet Standalone without QX 1 Important Configure Ethernet enabled readers off line and then connect to network when ready for dynamic use Note The QX 830 does not require an Ethernet crossover cordset because the scanner itself performs automatic internal crossover transmit to receive switching Microscan offers a standard straight through un crossed Ethernet cordset 61 000160 01 or 02 Connect the Ethernet Communication Cable from B on the QX 830 to the host network e Connect the power supply to A on the QX 830 e Plug in the power supply Host Ethernet Host Serial 5 2 if Yc ly Host OnO Power Suppl
288. preferable for most applications as they provide the best overall scannable area However there are times when AGC will have difficulty locking onto the symbol of interest especially when extraneous non symbol objects in the field of view appear to be symbols AGC can only base its measurements on one object If that object is not the actual symbol AGC performance and consistency are adversely affected Leading Edge bases its calculations on the first object it detects even if the first object is not a symbol This is helpful if the symbol is always at the leading edge of the decode direction Continuous is the recommended setting for Microscan scanners Continuous always samples throughout the entire scan but is most interested in the object with the most sharply defined bars This can occasionally mislead the scanner when bar like objects or specular reflection enter the field of view Fixed Gain is preferable if AGC repeatedly fails to choose the correct Gain Level setting for the application In some applications symbols might be surrounded by a greater number of symbol like false candidates than actual symbols The Fixed Gain setting will never change its value so once it is set Surrounding objects in the field of view will not distract the scanner from decoding actual symbols Fixed Gain is also useful in applications using symbols that have very low bar counts or in applications using Symbol Reconstruction on symbols with tilted or sk
289. put 3 Serial Cmd lt K792 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt A 66 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Output 1 Parameters Output On Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Default Mismatch or No Read Options 0 Mismatch or No Read 1 Match or Good Read 2 Mismatch 3 No Read 4 Trend Analysis 5 unused 6 Diagnostic Warning 7 In Read Cycle Output State Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Default 0 Normally Open Options 0 Normally Open 1 Normally Closed Pulse Width Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Default 50 50 ms Options 1 to 65535 in 1 ms increments Output Mode Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Default 0 Pulse Options 0 Pulse 1 Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin 2 Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition 3 Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re Enter Read Cycle Output 2 Parameters Serial Cmd lt K811 output on output state pulse width outout mode gt Configurable Output 3 Serial Cmd lt K812 output on output state pulse width output mode gt QxX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 67 Serial Commands Matchcode Matchcode lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card sequence on no read seque
290. put data from symbol data Quality Qutpuk Quality Output Separator Decodes Trigger Status r Decode Direction Oukput NUL SOH HT tall S e2 De3 Deaf Nakl CAN EM SUB ESCI ES RS US SF Click Delete to remove characters T D cy SE on joo j 3 klg gt lt Z slz alge Decodes per Trigger Status When Enabled the scanner enters a state where it processes frames as configured until the end of a read cycle with or without a successful symbol decode When the read cycle ends the scanner outputs any decoded symbol data along with the decodes per trigger count Quality Output Quality Output Separator Decodes Trigger Status Disabled Decode Direction Output Disabled Enabled Decode Direction Output When Enabled compares the symbol decode direction to the direction specified in Output Filter Configuration Quality Output Quality Output Separator i Decodes Trigger Status Disabled Decode Direction Gutput Disabled isabled Enabled 5 166 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Symbol Position Output Symbol Position Output Scan Status Disabled Separator SP Scan Status When Enabled the location of the symbol within the scan line is appended to the symbol data output The scan position is formatted with a leading identifier of SP plus two zero padded three digit numbers
291. r disables decoded symbol data output from the scanner Symbol Data Output JE nabled Disabled Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enables or disables extra symbol information output from the scanner Extra Symbol Information Enabled Disabled Enabled Diagnostics Output Enables or disables diagnostics output from the scanner Diagnostics Output Enabled Disabled Enabled 5 8 QxX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters External Source Processing Mode Enables or disables processing of commands or data from sources external to the scanner External Source Processing Mode Command Disabled Command Command Command enables command processing in the scanner Data Data enables RS 232 B as a data source port Note The data path between in the source port and out the source port is always two way Data is copied from source data ports and all those source ports data is transmitted to the destination port and from the destination port to the source port QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 9 Communication RS 422 The following settings define the basic transmission speeds and digital standards that ensure common RS 422 formatting R5422 Disabled Baud Rate 115 2k Parity Mone Stop Bits One Data Bits Eight Symbol Data Output Disabled Extra Symbol Information Disabled Diagnostics Qutpuk Disabled External Source Proces
292. r gt Switch Timing lt K254 switch mode time gt Symbologies Quiet Zone lt K450 qguiet zone status gt Background Color lt K451 background color gt Symbol Ratios lt K452 Code 39 Codabar Interleaved 2 of 5 gt Composite lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt lt K454 status D1 status1 D2 status2 D3 status3 D4 status4 AIAG ID5a ID5b ID5c status5 ID6 status6 ID7 status7 ID8 status8 ID9 status9 ID10 status10 1D11 status11 ID12 status12 gt Depth of Field Enhance lt K456 DOF Enhance mode gt lt K470 status check character status check character output status Code 39 large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt lt K471 status start stop match status start stop output status Codabar large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length check character type check character output status gt Interleaved 2 of 5 lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar range mode status gt UPC EAN lt K473 mode EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplementals type UPC E as UPC A gt Code 128 EAN 128 lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record b
293. r hex value sepaiated by a space i e 0a 26 f9 E Response Response Size decimal 260 00 00 0000 DO 00 0000 DO 00 0000 DO 00 00 00 0000 DO 00 0000 DO 00 01 000000 D1 00 0000 D1 00 0000 DO 00 0000 DO 00 v 12 13 50 9873 12 16 15 33 Connection dosed with Instance 1 13 58 38 950 Connection dosed with Instance 1 14 12 56 270 Connection dosed with Instance 1 12 13 31 755 Error Request Failed Target is nat responding 12 15 41 750 Error Request Falled Target Is nat responding 15 20 45 536 Connection dosed with Instance 1 Ready Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay 11 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 5535 Sent pkts 7012 17l A45A7 Onen Connertion failed for Tostance 1 Tnvalid Seqnert Tyne of Seoment valie in Path ElPScan TestTool Host 10 10 4 130 QX 830 R 10 10 5 234 mE 12 49 11 174 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay amp 3 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 mser Revd pkts 164265 Sent pkts 208135 14 02 36 790 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay G msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 24216 Sent pkts 30663 15 20 39 187 Open Connection Failed for Instance 1 Invalid Segnert Type or Segment Value in Path 3 Right click on QX 830 and select Add Class1 Connection im EIPScan ElPscan yx viplest1 asm1
294. rackets application record padding separation factor gt Code 93 lt K475 mode fixed symbol length status symbol length gt PDF417 lt K476 status scan line limit fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length decode at end of read cycle gt Bharnacode lt K477 status fixed bar count status fixed bar count minimum bar count bar width mode direction fixed threshold value gt A 18 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual DataBar Omnidirectional RSS 14 Appendices lt K482 status gt DataBar Limited RSS Limited lt K483 status gt DataBar Expanded RSS Expanded lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt MicroPDF417 lt K485 status scan line limit fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Symbol Reconstruction lt K496 symbol reconstruction redundancy symbol reconstruction effort gt I O Parameters Calibration Options lt K521 unused video scan speed laser power laser framing symbology gt Serial Verification lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Beeper lt K702 status gt Quality Output lt K704 quality output separator decodes per trigger status decode direction output gt Symbol Data Output lt K705 symbol data output status when to output symbol data symbology identifier status gt Read Duration Output lt K706 status separator gt No
295. racters by double clicking in the text field and then using the Postamble calculator Postamble CR LF i SOH STX ETX EOT Engl ACK BEL BS HT LF vt FF cal sof si s1 pet pce Des Deal NAK SYN ETB CAN Em sue ESC FS Gs RS us sP Click Delete to remove characters Cancel 4 11 Output Format Extract Parse Symbols Receive Quality Parameters Hide Parse Table Symbol Parse Build Sequence Emtact 2 4 The Extract Range function corresponds to the Start Location and Length parameters in the Format Extract serial command Insert Data Extract Range 2 4 Extract Sample Symbol Original ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPGRSTUVWHyZ ieee Reece Output BCD Remove Step Clear All Parsing Sample Symbol Original ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWxyv2Z Output BCD Cancel Multiple character sequences can be extracted and inserted using Symbol Parse In this example the selected extraction range is characters 2 4 The Sample Symbol example on the Symbol Parse dialog shows the selected character positions extracted and output as desired Simultaneously the data string from the selected symbol is displayed at the bottom left of the Parse Table followed by the user defined extracted output Output Index Output Index refers to the database entry to be modified with this command A formatted output is built by extract
296. railing edge trigger filter duration gt lt K201 serial trigger character gt External Trigger State lt K202 external trigger state gt End of Read Cycle lt K220 mode read cycle timeout gt Decodes Before Output lt K221 mode number before output gt Multisymbol lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Serial Trigger Start Character QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual lt K229 start character gt A 17 Serial Commands Serial Trigger Stop Character lt K230 stop character gt Processing Timeout lt K245 processing timeout gt Motor On Scan Speed lt K500 scan speed gt Motor Off lt K501 motor off gt Maximum Element lt K502 maximum element gt Automatic Gain Control lt K504 gain level AGC sampling mode AGC minimum AGC maximum gt Symbol Detect Status Transition Coun ter lt K505 symbol detect status transition counter gt Scan Width Enhance lt K511 status gt AGC Tracking lt K520 tracking gt Laser Setup lt K700 aser on off laser framing status laser on position laser off position laser power gt Configuration Database Number of Active Indexes lt K252 number of active indexes number of database cycles gt Configuration Database lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking unused unused unused framing status laser on position laser off position laser power background colo
297. rand choose ane CPS for IN and OUT _small_pt or _big_pt Synchronous Copy File Source el Dest gx_lO_small_pt IN PS Rung 1 of 2 APB ven In this example the big assembly set has been kept fa RSLuyix 5000 MscanLuvix3561 1756 161 File Edit Yew Search Logic Communications Tools Window Hep plaltal a slale ol lal Wiel alal Offline fi E AUN No Forces ya No Edits a E vo Redundancy bf a Path AB_ETHIP 1410 10 5 233 BackplaneSC m amp 4 Hfj atl fom o f Favortos Karon K aame KEE K TmarComta Ki gt Controller MscanLagix5561 Controller Tags Controller Fauk Handler i Pawer Up Handler Tasks H A MainTask 8 a MainProgram Program Tags MainRoutins Unscheduled Programs Motion Groups Ungrouped Axes Add on Instructions Data Types Sq User Defined A qx_command te qx_devioe_status i id Qk_extemal_inputs E qx_extermal_outputs A qx_IN_big_udt iA qx_IN_small_udt i qx_ID_big_udt E Qx_IO_small_udt KA gx_OUT_udt Strings A stri28 lM strot K STRING oo ae E MainProgram MainRoutine iH MainRoutine MainProgram 41 gt DoK choose one CPS for IN and OUT _stall_pt or _big_pt Synchronous Copy File Source gx Dest gxlO_big_ptIN P i gt MonitorTags Edit Tags lla ER Enter non BOOL fil source oparand Rung 1 of 2 lapp fer For
298. ransactions 3 Populate the Receive Timeout field with a value that the PLC is willing to wait for the transaction to complete When receiving bar code data this would typically be set to the read cycle timeout lt K220 timeout gt plus 20 milliseconds or so When checking for a command response set this to at least 10 milliseconds 4 Populate the Receive Request Flags with 0x1 if needed to delete all pending data from the device and only respond with data generated by the device after this request is received 5 Initiate the transaction 6 When the transaction is complete check the Receive Length field e If Receive Length is 0 no data has been received e If Receive Length is non zero then new data has been received Process the Serial Data field up to the value of Receive Length and manage any fragmentation per standard programming technique Check the Receive Response Flags If the value is not 3 then the string sitting in the Serial Data field in not a complete message It is a fragment of a larger message QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 103 Allen Bradley Version 16 PLC Setup Appendix K Allen Bradley Version 16 PLC Setup Allen Bradley PLC Setup This section was created and run on the following Allen Bradley Rockwell components e RSLogix 5000 Version 16 e ControlLogix 5561 processor e 756 ENBT A EtherNet IP interface card firmware version 4 003 or newer This setup procedure was also follo
299. rce processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 29 Serial Commands Diagnostic Output Ethernet TCP Port 2 Serial Cmd lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Source Processing Mode Ethernet TCP Port 2 Serial Cmd lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Command Options 0 Disabled 1 Command 2 Data EtherNet IP Data Type Symbol Data Output EtherNet IP Serial Cmd lt K136 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Extra Symbol Information EtherNet IP Serial Cmd lt K136 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Diagnostic Output EtherNet IP Serial Cmd lt K136 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Source Processing Mode EtherNet IP Serial Cmd lt K136 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Comma
300. rd Placeholder and Matching Data Calibration Configuration Database Ordered Output Output Format Filter Number Symbology Type Length Wildcard Placeholder and Matching Data are all displayed in the table below Double clicking on any row of the table will display the Ordered Output Filter Settings dialog where settings can be changed Filter Symbology Length Wildcard Placeholder Matching Data Number Type Any Type U 2 Any Type 0 7 4 Any Type U 7 4 Any Type i 7 p Any Type 0 i 7 Receive settings from the scanner Send settings to the scanner or Send and Save settings Number of Filters 5 Receive Ai Send and Save Note These buttons only affect this view Number of Filters refers to the number of active output filters 0 disables all output filters Any non zero numeral will enable output filtering to be performed using the filter indexes covered by this value For example if the number of filters is 5 then filter indexes 1 2 3 4 and 5 will be applied 4 6 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Setup Filter Number This is the filter index number that represents the position of the symbol in the data output at the end of the read cycle This index number should be entered along with the following filter settings for the predetermined symbol position Symbology Type Specifies the symbology type allowed to occupy th
301. rd placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default Ox3F Options Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters Data Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default NULL 0x00 Options Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters Decode Direction Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default 0 Any Direction Options 0 Any Direction 1 Forward 2 Reverse Database Index Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default 0 any index Options 0 to 10 Output Filter Enable Serial Cmd lt K745 number of filters gt Default 0 Options 0 to 10 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 7 Serial Commands Serial Utility Commands Type Command Name Enter Decodes Second Test lt Cp gt Enter Decode Percent Test Read Rate Exit Decodes Second and Decode Percent Tests lt a1 gt PDF417 Information lt N gt No Read Counter a e No Read Counter Reset PTH Trigger Counter eaaniere Trigger Counter Reset Device Control Master Database Part Number Checksum Default Reset Save A 78 Good Read Match Counter Good Read Match Counter Reset Mismatch Counter Mismatch Counter Reset Programmable Ou
302. rdall gt Recall Microscan Default Settings and Save for Power On Will also default sticky settings Default Reset Save lt A gt Reset Will not save for power on lt Arp gt Reset and Recall Power On Parameters lt Arc gt Reset and Recall Customer Default Parameters lt Ard gt Reset and Recall Microscan Default Parameters lt K gt All Status Request lt K gt All Descriptor Status Request lt K gt __ All Range Status Request Scanner Status nds Knmn gt Single Status Request Request Commands Single Descriptor Status Request Single Range Status Request lt Knnnd gt Default Customer Parameter 5 lt CAL gt Calibrate without Menu ther Serial Utility Coman lt gt Calibrate with Menu lt BCCFG gt Enter Bar Code Configuration QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 7 3 Read Rate Read Rate Click the Utilities button and then the Read Rate tab Utilities to display the Read Rate view ESP ESP Untitled Fie Model Options Connect View Help 3 yy yzl Ez Mode Autoconnect Send Recy Switch Model Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Digital Bar Code Firmware f Decodes sec J 5 To see the number of decodes per second click the Decodes sec radio button and Percent og Clear Output then the Start button To see the percentage of decodes click the Percent radio button and then the Start button
303. re Threshold has been reached The message repeats once every 30 minutes until the condition is corrected This value is a reference to the external ambient temperature in the environment around the scanner Helps ensure that the scanner is being used within its temperature specification Also since hotter environments tend to shorten the life of electronics components a user may want to set the temperature threshold closer to the nominal temperature of 25 F A user can set a temperature value that when exceeded will cause a high temperature message to be displayed If High Temperature Threshold is set to zero the warning message is disabled Status Allows the user to Enable or Disable the High Temperature Threshold High Temperature Threshold Skatus Disabled Message Disabled Enabled Message The user can enter a message of up to 10 characters that will be displayed whenever High Temperature Threshold is exceeded High Temperature Threshold Status Disabled H I E H T E iH F 5 182 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Low Temperature Threshold A message can be defined that will display when a user set Low Temperature Threshold has been reached The message repeats once every 30 minutes until the condition is corrected This value is a reference to the external ambient temperature in the environment around the scanner Helps ensure that the scanner is being used within its t
304. re no longer desired It is important to note that a hardware default does not affect customer default parameters For example a user that has inadvertently changed communication settings and saved them with a lt Z gt command may not know the correct settings or have the capability to communicate within those settings By first doing an EZ Button default to restore the known Microscan defaults the user can then recall the previous customer saved settings with an lt Arc gt or lt Zrc gt command Restore Customer Defaults Use the EZ Button to default the scanner by holding it down while applying power to the scanner if this feature is enabled Microscan Default Parameters Microscan default parameters are contained in the firmware and cannot be changed Software Defaults Microscan default parameters can be recalled loaded into current settings with the lt Ard gt command or recalled and saved for power on with the lt Zrd gt command Restore Microscan Defaults lf a software default and reset is not possible it may be necessary to reset the scanner by shorting connecting specific pins This procedure has the same effect as the lt Zrd gt software command Important For this reset to occur this command must be executed within 60 seconds of a power on or a reset e Apply power to the scanner e Locate default pin and ground e Momentarily connect these wires or pins and listen for a series of short beeps e With
305. rees 3 Click Test to begin Click the App Mode button to access configuration trees and other setup features Stop Save Symbol Information Attribute wt For Help press F1 OMMESTEDIY Point to Point COMI 115 2K M 5 1 2 2 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual App Mode Using ESP From EZ Mode click on the App Mode button to access the tabbed tree controls in Parameters the intuitive user interfaces in Setup the Terminal interface and the Utilities interface 400 Mode Note The App Mode and EZ Mode buttons appear in the same position to allow easy switching between these primary modes Calibration Configuration Database Ordered Output Output Format Click this icon to return to EZ Mode ESF ESP Untitled GG File Model Options Connect View Help lt j Menu toolbar Ez Mode Autoconnect SendfRecy Switch Model Parameters communication Read Cycle Symbolagies 10 Matchcode Diagnostics Parameters Communications RSZ A RSZ B RS42z Ethernet Protocol Selection External Data Routing Freamble Fostamble For Help press F1 Autoconnect to the scanner Send and Receive command settings and Switch Model 4rray Communication Modes QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Y Setup ESF Values Code Firmware En
306. rent model is chosen the connection to the present model is terminated New Model Remove Model To connect to another model select New Model choose a new model from the pop up menu that appears and click OK Note When an ESP file is saved the settings of all the models defined in that file are saved QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 2 5 Menu Toolbar Options The Options menu allows the user to save memos and set up ESP Preferences Note Preferences will be saved and loaded into ESP whenever Preferences ESP is opened next whether or not the ESP file is saved Options Document Mera Model Memo Preferences gt General Tab Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced The Toolbar Style el options allow the user C Reload Last File f Show Both lean and Text to determine how ESP will display the mode options in the two rows i Show Connect Prompt Only Show Tent at the top of the screen On Startup Toolbar Style i Show Model Prornpt C Only Show leon Receive After Connect Skip EZ Mode Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults Default Settings Reload Last File At startup reloads the last file saved to the host computer s hard drive Show Model Prompt At startup shows the model menu displaying all supported scanners Show Connect Prompt At startup displays the Would you like to connect to the QX 830 prompt
307. res non volatile or flash memory settings initializes serial commands and resets all counters Delimited A delimited command or field is bracketed by predefined characters Decode Rate The number of good reads per second ahieved by a scanner Discrete I O Inputs and outputs characterized by discrete signal transitions from one voltage level to another so that digital switching can occur End of Read Cycle The time or condition at which the scanner stops expecting symbol information to decode External Edge Allows a read cycle to be initiated by a trigger signal from an object detector when it detects the appearance of an object The read cycle ends with a good read a timeout or a new trigger External Level Allows a read cycle to be initiated by a trigger signal from a photo sensor The read cycle ends when the object moves out of the detector s range Firmware Software hard coded in non volatile memory and closely tied to specific pieces of hardware Fixed Symbol Length Increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Full Duplex A communication system in which signals can travel simultaneously between devices Gain Optimal signal strength Good Read A decode The successful scanning and decoding of the information encoded in a symbol A 132 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Half Duplex A communication system in which
308. rmation consisting of error correction level ECC Level n number of rows n Rows number of columns n Columns number of informative code words n Info Code Words and the number of data characters n Data Characters This feature can be disabled by re sending lt a1 gt Scan Count Determines the number of scans required before symbol data will be output Scan Count 65535 1 65535 Fixed Symbol Length Status When Enabled the scanner will reject any PDF417 symbol that does not match the Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Dizabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Used to increase data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted When enabled the PDF symbol must contain the same number of characters as the symbol length setting before it can be considered a good read The scanner will ignore any symbol not having the specified length Fixed Symbol Length 0 1 128 Note Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Symbol Length to take effect 5 92 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Decode at End of Read Decode at End of Read Disabled izabled Enabled Disabled The scanner will attempt to decode the PDF417 symbol whenever the algorithm determines that there are enough error correction code words Enabled The scanner will not attempt to decode the PDF417 symbol until the end of the read cy
309. rom ESP s Terminal Auto Framing Auto Framing is initiated when this button position is selected To cancel Auto Framing quickly press and release the EZ Button Load New Master Functions in the same way as New Master Pin input whenever the associated button position is selected Sleep Mode When Sleep Mode is selected the scanner will shut the motor and laser off when this button position is selected To cancel Sleep Mode quickly press and release the EZ Button Bar Code Configuration Enables Bar Code Configuration Mode whenever the associated button position is selected When enabled the scanner can accept configuration commands from symbols To disable quickly press and release the EZ Button 5 124 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Auto Framing Options When Enabled Laser Framing is performed when the Auto Framing button beep position is selected Single Beep Two Beeps Three Beeps or Four Beeps Auto Framing Options Laser Framing Enabled Disabled Enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 125 I O Parameters Status Indicators The side of the QX 830 features an array of LEDs that indicate various aspects of scanner activity ay PWR Status Indicators PHY Activity Bar Graph Read Rate Good Read To Qutpuk Active Oz Input Active Controls the operation of the MOD ACT and NET LNK LEDs Note MOD and ACT function
310. rs QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 53 Read Cycle Decodes Before Output Decodes Before Output specifies the number of times a symbol needs to be decoded to qualify as a good read Decodes Before Output Mode Non consecutive Number Before Output 3 Decodes Before Output Mode Decodes Before Output CE ororo Number Before Gutput a Saa ee Consecutive Non Consecutive In Non Consecutive mode decodes will be counted in any order Multiple symbols can be decoded in any order Consecutive In Consecutive mode all decodes must be identical until the good read count is satisfied Only one unique symbol can be qualified at a time Number Before Output The number of successful decodes performed by the scanner before symbol data is output Decodes Before Output Mode MHon consecutiwe Number Before Gutput 3 1 255 T 5 54 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters End of Read Cycle The read cycle is the time during which the scanner will attempt to decode a symbol A read cycle can be ended by a timeout or a new trigger or a combination of the two End of Read Cycle Mode Timeout Read Cycle Timeout 100 End of Read Cycle Mode Note When operating in Continuous Read or Continuous Read 1 Output the scanner is always in the read cycle End of Read Cycle EG E Read Cycle Timeout mear New Trigger Timeout or New Trigger
311. s control hex output gt Beeper lt K702 status gt Quality Output lt K704 quality output separator decodes per trigger status decode direction output gt Symbol Data Output lt K705 symbol data output status when to output symbol data symbology i d output status gt Read Duration Output lt K706 status separator gt No Read Message lt K714 status message gt Bad Symbol Message lt K715 status message gt No Symbol Message lt K716 status message gt Input 1 lt K730 input mode active state gt Green Flash LED lt K750 green flash mode unused green flash duration gt Status Indicators lt K751 status bar graph l O 1 1 O 2 gt Symbol Position Output lt K758 scan status separator gt Database Identifier Output lt K759 status separator character gt EZ Button EZ Button Modes Auto Framing Options Trend Analysis Output 1 lt K770 status default on power on gt lt K771 single beep two beeps three beeps four beeps gt lt K773 laser framing gt lt K780 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on decodes per trigger gt Trend Analysis Output 2 lt K781 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on decodes per trigger gt Trend Analysis Output 3 lt K782 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on decodes per trigger gt Diagnostics Output 1 lt K790 high temperature
312. s OD Controller Fauk Handler Pawer Lp Handler 6 Tasks E fa MainTask 3 3 MainProgram A Program Tags MainRoutine F Unscheduled Programs 6 Motion Groups Ungrouped Axes E Add On Iretructions Qj Data Types User Defined EA qx_command iq qx_device_status E qx_extemal_inputs i qx_extemal_outputs RY qx IN _big_udt A qx_IN_small_udt 8 qx_IO_big_udt A qx_IO_small_ude KA qx_OUT_udt Sa Strings E striza str 4 i STRING oo aa Delete the selected Relay Ladder Logic Elementis Controller ae B MainProgram MainRoutine m Ss Ba a Delete Rung Del e r End 1x tH Cut Rung Ctrl 3 Copy Rung Ctrl Paste Ctrl RET roller Add Rung Ctrl R Edit Rung Enter Edit Rung Comment Ctrl D Import Rung Export Rung Start Pending Rung Edts Ctrl Shift 5 Accept Pending Rung Edits Cancel Pending Rung Edits Assemble Rung Edt Cancel Rung Edit Verify Rung Go To Ctrl G choose one CPS for IN and OUT _simall_pt or _big_pt Pp Synchronous Copy Fil ded Source Dest ar w Length Synchronaus Copy File Source gxJO_small_pt OUT gro 1 Jox er choose one CPS for IN and OUT _2mall_pt or _big_pt Synchronous Copy File Source gs l Dest qxJO_big_pt IN Length Synchronous Copy File Source qx_lO_big_pt OUT Dest qs 0 Length 1 Add Ladder Element Ak ins QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual
313. s a gain limit that AGC cannot exceed when not in Fixed Gain operation Reader Setup Gain Level Tracking Scan Speed Automatic Sain Control AGC AGC Sampling Mode AGC Minimum AGC Maximum Symbol Detect Status Transition Counter Maximum Element Scan Width Enhance 5 62 40 40 a0 Continuous j 255 0 255 Disabled 14 400 Disabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Symbol Detect Status When Symbol Detect Status is enabled Bad Symbol No Symbol is output depending on whether or not there were enough transition counts rather than based on a simple No Read Note Symbol detection can only be used when AGC Sampling Mode is set to Disabled Fixed Gain Reader Setup Gain Level 40 Tracking 40 Scan Speed 50 Automatic Gain Control 467 AGC Sampling Mode Continuous AGC Minimum 0 AGC Maximum 255 Symbol Detect Status Transition Counter Maximum Element Scan Width Enhance Transition Counter Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Number of bar space transitions required for an AGC sample When multiple samples take place within a scan the largest value is used lf symbol detection is enabled the transition counter defines the minimum number of transitions required for a scan to qualify as a No Symbol number of transitions lt transition counter or Bad Symbol number of transitions gt or transition counter and no decode Reader
314. s and Pinouts continued 7 Terminated Important The 8 pin Ethernet version of Connector B does TX _ not have RS 422 485 Input 1 RX 5 A xe Terminated or RTSICTS pins f o RX AS A hi TX 3 Terminated Connector B Ethernet Models M12 8 pin Socket Pin Function 1 Terminated Terminated Terminated Port 4 TX Port 4 RX Port 4 TX Terminated Port 4 RX OINI O OIN 3 4 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Hardware Installation Grounding the QX 830 Proper grounding is necessary for operator safety noise reduction and the protection of equipment from voltage transients Buildings including any steelwork all circuits and all junction boxes must be grounded directly to an earth ground in compliance with local and national electrical codes be de We yae ere a RR ee de BD can UN wee Gh Oe te Maa San ee BONG fry uM Mi re ET HERNET i i et fas see WP rte Ag a ook cee ee Pee ce ee tee ue SP ee et CE ek me yo fa DEVICE An earth ground is provided through the cable shields and chassis of the scanner Ground Loops Ground loops signal degradation due to different ground potentials in communicating devices can be eliminated or minimized by ensuring that both the host scanner and their power supplies are connected to a common earth ground QX 830 Compact Industrial Sc
315. s coed sth becca d Mace Poser Daley D ec Moc Sarid Enles oc Sc ART ieee er AT Sc oer eed plis ei Sert pis Keii LA Serer heated eal Drea DERE Gone coord sith Lota Fare Bere Uae Bec Bec Sed Dole l eee Slr APT rom Sek Pe ee eed phe Jt Tord pie LED PEELS Ony Pomquaec d Target k ir DAHLI Ene Bapan Mekej Pte he al ia IM Open Connection faled fir kokee 1 krri egret hpa on eee Satu ie Path exe rei pee eer Trader 0 Clee oremi ahap Place Ae Deby G roor Far Tord ems ee Fiar Pee 2 Far ered AF 1 5A A 128 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual ElPScan begins polling the unit assemblies F EIPScan ElPscan qx eiptest1 asm1025big cfg File view Request I O Stack Device I0 Module Help Dawe ed Target Network Path 10 10 5 234 10 10 4 130 Request all fields are in hex Predefined Adapter None v Service hex le Class hex 4 Instance hex 301 Attribute hex 3 Member hex m Request Data Each byte is a 2 char hex value separated by a space i e 0a 26 f9 a Response Response Size decimal 260 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 000000000001 000000 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 z Symbol Tag oft lt gt AUCMM lal 12 13 50 983 12 16 15 33 12 49 11 174 12 13 31 755 1P1BA1 7oN Connection closed with Instance 1 Error Request failed Target is not responding Frrar Deciiect Failad Tarnat
316. s data bits gt Default 8 115 2K Options 0 600 1 1200 2 2400 3 4800 4 9600 5 19 2K 6 38 4K 7 57 6K 8 115 2K 9 230K Parity RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 None Options 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd Stop Bits RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 One Options 0 One 1 Two Data Bits RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 1 Eight Options 0 Seven 1 Eight Ethernet Serial Cmd lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QxX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 25 IP Address Serial Cmd Default Options Subnet Serial Cmd Default Options Gateway Serial Cmd Default Options Serial Commands lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt 192 168 0 100 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 IP Address Mode Serial Cmd lt K126 status P address subnet gateway IP address mode gt Default 1 DHCP Options 0 Static 1 DHCP Ethernet TCP Ports TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K127 TCP Port 1 1CP Port 2 gt Default 2001 Options 1024
317. s for Entering and Using Master Symbols 1 Set Trigger Mode to External Level External Edge or Serial Data 2 Choose the method of symbol comparison that fits the application 3 Define the type of output required with Matchcode setup a Symbol data output b Discrete output 4 Select the number of master symbols required 5 Decide how the master symbol s will be entered a Use ESP to type master symbol data directly b Send a serial command with symbol data in the form of lt K231 master symbol data gt c Send a lt G gt Read Next Symbol as Master Symbol command d Enable the New Master Pin command and activate the discrete input to store the next symbol read as the master symbol QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 169 Matchcode Matchcode Type Allows the user to choose the way that master symbols will be compared with subsequently read symbols Note First set Trigger Mode to External Level External Edge or Serial Data Matchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Disabled Match Start Position Enabled Match Length sequeritial wild Card Wild Card Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step l Mew Master Pin Disabled Sequential Instructs the scanner to compare symbols or portions of symbols with the master symbol Instructs the scanner to sequence after each match numeric only and compare symbols or portions of symbols for sequential numb
318. s in the field of view have been decoded the result will be a No Read For this reason a longer timeout should be tried to ensure that the symbol is decoded successfully 5 58 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Reader Setup Reader Setup parameters allow the user to configure Gain Level Tracking and Scan Speed parameters as well as various Automatic Gain Control parameters Reader Setup Gain Level 40 Tracking 40 Scan Speed 50 Automatic Gain Control 43C AGC Sampling Mode Continuous AGC Minimum T AGC Maximum 255 Symbol Detect Status Disabled Transition Counter 14 Maximum Element 400 Scan Width Enhance Disabled Gain Level Gain Level can be used in two different ways depending on the AGC Sampling Mode When AGC Sampling Mode is set to Disabled Gain Level is used as a Fixed Gain The analog signal is amplified by this gain value For Fixed Gain operation changes to gain adjustment setting should be performed in Auto Calibration When AGC Sampling Mode is set to Leading Edge or Continuous Gain Level defines the set point analog signal level The AGC system will attempt to hold the analog signal at this level by automatically raising and lowering the gain as needed Reader Setup Gain Level 40 0 255 Tracking 40 Scan Speed 50 Automatic Gain Control AGC AGC Sampling Mode Continuous AGC Minimum T AGC Maximum 255 Symbol Detect Status Disa
319. se the EZ Button Save for Power On All scanner settings will be saved to non volatile memory to be recalled on power on whenever the associated button position is selected This is the same as sending a lt Z gt from ESP s Terminal Auto Framing Auto Framing is initiated when this button position is selected To cancel Auto Framing quickly press and release the EZ Button Load New Master Functions in the same way as New Master Pin input whenever the associated button position is selected Sleep Mode When Sleep Mode is selected the scanner will shut the motor and laser off when this button position is selected To cancel Sleep Mode quickly press and release the EZ Button Bar Code Configuration Enables Bar Code Configuration Mode whenever the associated button position is selected When enabled the scanner can accept configuration commands from symbols To disable quickly press and release the EZ Button QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 121 I O Parameters Two Beeps Hold down button until two quick beeps are heard and the 20 and 40 LEDs illuminate EZ Button Enabled Default On Power on Enabled Single Beep Read Rate Calibration Three Beeps Disabled Auto Framing Options Calibration Laser Framing Save for Power on Auto Framing Load New Master Sleep mode Bar Code Configuration Disabled When set to Disabled the associated button position will have no function associated wi
320. se width Good Read Match Output Mode Mismatch Trend Analysis i Read l rend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Diagnostic warming Number of Triggers In Read Cycle Number to Qutpuk Or Disabled Decodes per Trigger T Diagnostics High Temperature Disabled Service Unit Disabled Laser Current High Disabled Laser Current Low Disabled Low Temperature Disabled Mismatch or No Read Activates discrete output when the data does not match that of the master symbol or the symbol has not been decoded before the end of the read cycle Good Read Match Activates a discrete output when the symbol data matches the master symbol Note To output on Good Read when Matchcode is not enabled enable any output for Match Mismatch Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data does not match that of the master symbol No Read Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data is not decoded before the end of the read cycle 5 132 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Trend Analysis Typically used when successful decodes are occurring but a discrete output is needed to flag a trend in quality issues Activates discrete output when a trend analysis condition is met depending on the trend analysis option enabled Diagnostic Warning Typically used when a discrete indication of a diagnostic condition is needed Activates discrete output when a diagnostic warning condition is met depending on the diagnostic
321. send serial commands e Click the Utilities button to access Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences from Default Master Database Digital Bar Code and Firmware For further details see Microscan ESP Help in the dropdown Help menu 1 10 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Quick Start Step 9 Save Changes in ESP To make changes to a configuration setting Parameters ESP Values Communications l R5232 A k een bell ne R5232 B Enabled down to the setting to be R5422 Disabled needa oe Ethernet Enabled Protocol Selection Point to Point External Data Routing Disabled Array Communication Modes Disabled 1 Left click on the B EEE Disabled desired parameter and click once in the siete Preamble Characters EE 2 Double click on the Postamble A A Enabled selection box to view 4 Left click again 5 Right click on the open options on the open screen and select Save to screen to complete Reader to implement the the selection command in the scanner Saving Options e Send No Save Changes will be lost when power is re applied to the scanner e Send and Save This activates all changes in current memory and saves to the scanner for power on QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 1 11 Save Changes in ESP 1 12 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual E 2 Using ESP Contents EZ NOUE eee ne en ee ee ee ee eee 2 2 AP
322. ser Manual Chapter 1 Quick Start Step 1 Check Hardware acc s csecdseeeccseccsiceendcbeectscesacsdaceuesseagececsseenceseeceeecnes 1 2 Step 2 Connect the SVSIOMie sie eal ea ee 1 3 Step 3 Position Scanner and Symbol ccecceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeseaees 1 4 Slep 4 INStalMES Rise ee a aed ee ae 1 5 SID I Selec Model aici ee ee ene 1 6 Sen O COMIC CL aae he ae Vee ie 1 7 Step 7 Test Read Rale iccc ani eo Viel es ee 1 10 Step 8 Configure the Scanner ccccceseecceeeeeeecceeeececeeeuseeessenseeeeneas 1 11 Step 9 Save Changes in ESP aeran narren eaa a E a 1 12 Chapter 2 Using ESP 2A 0 10 ean Oe an ee REE eee eS eR O reno ee 2 2 PAOD MOO Gussi ietbdea ss asada ated an tlbascde aac anasesacace sete setacdenneesaeueeueeaeds 2 3 Mengi TOONS AM eran S E A ERE 2 4 Naviga ng MES P are a ct eee en meer een 2 15 Send Receive OPtions ceccccseccccseececesececeeeeeeeecesseeesseeeeeseeeesseeeeess 2 16 Chapter 3 Hardware Integration Cordes ie er ee aa tel oe Cah al A ae hoe 3 2 QX28 30 An KED Vacate A EAE E A Racal E E 3 3 Power and Trigger SwitChing c cccccsssseececeeseeeeceeeeeeecseuseeeessenseeesees 3 8 FONE ROUUNG ciei a a ahaa 3 9 Application Examples orriei aeaa a a eee 3 10 Chapter 4 Scanner Setup CANDANGO esenea a r aes nee ee eae 4 2 Configuration Database cccccseccceecseseeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaseeeeeesaeeeeessaaaeees 4 4 Ordered Output erremata e a sfaceoacseedetet ee ieeeae st 4
323. signals can travel between devices in both directions but not simultaneously Host A computer PLC or other device that is used to execute commands and process data and discrete signals Initialize Implement serial configuration commands into the scanner s active memory Input A channel or communication line Decoded data or a discrete signal that is received by a device Ladder Orientation A linear symbol orientation in which the bars are parallel to the symbol s direction of travel LED See Light Emitting Diode Light Emitting Diode LED A semiconductor device that emits light when conducting current Multidrop A communication protocol for networking two or more scanners or other devices with a concentrator or controller and characterized by the use of individual device addresses and the RS 485 standard Noise The same as static in a phone line or snow in a television picture noise is any unwanted electrical signal that interferes with the symbol data being decoded and transmitted by the scanner Normally Closed A discrete output state that is only active when open Normally Open A discrete output state that is only active when closed Output A channel or communication line Data or discrete signals that are transmitted or displayed by a device Parity An error detection routine in which one data bit in each character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of 1 bi
324. sing Mode Command Baud Rate Can be used to transfer data faster or to match host port settings The rate at which the scanner and host transfer data back and forth Baud Rate 115 2K Parity Only changed if necessary to match host setting An error detection routine in which one data bit per character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of bits in the data field is either even or odd Hone Stop Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Stop Bits 5 10 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Data Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Data Bits Eight Eight Symbol Data Output Enables or disables decoded symbol data output from the scanner Symbol Data Output JE nabled Disabled Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enables or disables extra symbol information output from the scanner Enabled Extra Symbol Information Disabled Enabled Diagnostics Output Enables or disables diagnostics output from the scanner Diagnostics Qutput Enabled Disabled Enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 11 Communication External Source Processing Mode Enables or disables processing of commands or d
325. site is set to Enabled the scanner will decode both the 2D composite and linear components However if the 2D composite component is not decoded the linear data will be sent by itself at the end of the read cycle Required If set to Required the scanner must decode both components or a No Read will occur Separator Status Allows the user to distinguish between the main and Supplemental symbols Separates the linear and the composite component Separator Status Disabled E i fa b d Enabled Separator The Separator Character will be the same as the character defined in the Multisymbol Separator field As required by the application Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a new character Separator NUL SOH ST ETX EOT ENG ACK BEL Bs f HT LF vT Click Delete to remove characters QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 95 Symbologies AIAG AIAG is a standard controlled by the Automotive Industry Action Group AIAG is used in automotive applications When AIAG is Enabled each Status field can be Enabled or Disabled and an ID can be defined for each status AIAG ID1 Statusi ID Status ID3 Statusa ID4 Status4 IDSa IDSb DSc Statuso IDG Statuse ID Status IDS Statuses IDS Statuss I 10 Statusi 0 I 11 Statusi l IDi Statusi z Disabled r Enabled P Disabled Q Disabled Y Disabled 5 m E Disable
326. sktop Manager settings Configure your telephone dialing rules and modem settings Configure energy saving settings For your computer Shows installed printers and Fax printers and helps you add new ones Customize settings for the display of languages numbers times and dates Add remove and configure scanners and cameras Schedule computer tasks to run automatically View your current security status and access important settings SoundMAX Control Panel Change the sound scheme for your computer or configure the settings for your speakers and recording devices Change settings for text to speech and for speech recognition if installed See information about your computer system and change settings For hardware performance and automatic updates Customize the Start Menu and the taskbar such as the types of items to be displayed and how they should appear Change user account settings and passwords For people who share this computer Configure the Windows Firewall Set up or add to a wireless network For your home or office Connects to other computers networks and the Internet 2 The Network Connections dialog will appear Double click the icon for the Local Area Connection being used in the application s Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Qa gt E JO search f Folders Fiz Address Network Connections Network Tasks a Create anew connection Change Windows Firewall se
327. smatch Output will be activated when the number of mismatches equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers No Read Output will be activated when the number of No Reads equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Decodes per Trigger Output will be activated when the number of decodes equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Bad Symbol Output will be activated when the number of Bad Symbol occurrences equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers No Symbol Output will be activated when the number of No Symbol occurrences equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 137 I O Parameters Number of Triggers The number of triggers to examine for the trend analysis condition Output 1 Parameters Mutoue On utpuk State Pulse Width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Number of Triggers Number to Output On Decodes per Trigger Number to Output On Mismatch or Wo Read Normally Open i Pulse Mo Read D 0 255 O T Example lf Number to Output On is set to 3 and Trend Analysis Mode is set to No Read then the output will not be ac
328. sted Pair Media 2364F Regen Bus Supply via 1203 EN1 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Port on DriveLogixS 730 Generic EtherMet IP CIP Bridge Generic Ethernet Module EthernetjIP Panelview SoftLogixS800 EtherketsIP PowerFlex 4 Drive via 22 COMM E PowerFlex 40 Drive via 22 COMM E PowerFlex 40P Drive via 22 COMM E PowerFlex 70 EC Drive via 20 COMM E PowerFlex 70 Drive via 20 COMM E he F Find Add Favorite coed e A 105 Allen Bradley Version 16 PLC Setup 4 Configure the following fields Name A useful name to remember the unit IP Address The IP Address of QX 830 Comm Format Data DINT Input Assembly Instance Choose either 100 Small or 101 Big Input Size 21 Small or 44 Big Output Assembly Instance 198 Output Size 3 Configuration Assembly Instance 1 Configuration Size 0 none 5 Click OK when done Example For Small IN Instance 100 Size 21 W Module Properties eip ETHERMET MODULE 1 1 General Connention Module Info Type ETHERNET MOOQULE Generic Ethernet Module Vendor Allen Bradley Parent gip Name T Connection Parameters Description ize Input 32 bit 32 bit Dukpa CommEomat Data DINT aretom ot pi See Configuration 1 0 Sy bit Address s Host Mame IF Address C Host Name Sere irae Cancel Apply Help A 106
329. ster Symbol 2 Master Symbol 3 Master Symbol 4 mM F bi Pa Master 5 Symbol Data Enter master symbol data in this field Cancel 7 12 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Utilities Request Master Symbol Data Returns master symbol data for any enabled master symbols from 1 to 10 1 Click the Utilities button and the Master Database tab 2 Click the Receive Reader s Database button Master Symbal Database Size W KMatchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index 5 Receve Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Read Next Symbol as Master Symbol After the size of the database is set the scanner can read the next symbol as the master symbol for any given master symbol number lt Gmaster symbol number gt To store the next symbol decoded as master symbol 1 send lt G gt or lt G1 gt To store the next symbol decoded as the master symbol for any other master symbol database number send lt Gmaster symbol number 1 10 gt For example lt G5 gt will cause the next symbol read to be entered as master symbol 5 In the Master Database tab 1 Select the master symbol index number in which new symbol data will be stored 2 Click the Read Symbol into Selected Index button Master Symbol l Database Size W Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index 5 Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Caution If an index with existing
330. t Trigger Filter Duration Leading Edge Used to ignore accidental triggers when Trigger Mode is set to External Edge or External Level To consider a change in state on the trigger input the level must be stable for the trigger filter duration In an edge mode the scanner will trigger a read cycle if the active state has been uninterrupted for the entire trigger filter duration In a level mode the leading edge is filtered such that on an active edge the state must be held interrupted for the trigger filter duration before a trigger will occur Trigger Mode Continuous Read Trigger Filter Duration Leading Edge on 004s a Seconds Trailing Edge 313 External Trigger State Active Closed QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 49 Read Cycle Trailing Edge Used to ignore accidental triggers when Trigger Mode is set to External Edge or External Level To consider a change in state on the trigger input the level must be stable for the trigger filter duration In an edge mode the scanner will trigger a read cycle if the active state has been uninterrupted for the entire trigger filter duration In a level mode the trailing edge is filtered such that on the falling edge the state must be held for the trigger filter duration before the trigger will be deemed inactive Trigger Mode Continuous Read Trigger Filter Duration Leading Edge 313 Trailing Edge on 004s Seconds External Trigger State Active Closed E
331. t Master Symbol Loads the next symbol decoded Database Size here into the selected index Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Digital Bar Code Firmware Master Symbol Database Size W Matcheode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index p5 Send Database to Reader ma Master Symbol 1 Master Symbol 2 Master Symbol 3 Master Symbol 4 Master Symbol 5 Receive Reader s Database Saves the database to the scanner Loads the scanner s saved master symbols into ESP I P to Pa Double click a row to enter data into popup text box Caution Since the total number of characters available for the master symbol database limited changes to the Master Symbol Database Size will re allocate the number of characters available for each master symbol and could cause existing master symbols to be deleted See manual for details 7 10 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Utilities Master Symbol Database Size Master Symbol Database Size allows the user to select 1 to 10 master symbols for the master symbol database Master Symbol l Database Size iW Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index s I z Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Header Set Master Symbol Database Size here Important Since the total number of characters available for the master symbol database is
332. t and stop characters are the same When enabled the scanner will not decode Codabar symbols unless the start and stop characters are the same Start and Stop Match Status Enabled Disabled Enabled Start and Stop Output Status When disabled the start and stop characters will not be present in the data output of the decoded symbol When enabled the start and stop characters will be present in the data output of the decoded symbol Note Because the start and stop characters are included as part of the data the characters must be included as part of the length in a fixed length mode of operation Start and Stop Output Status Enabled Disabled Enabled 5 80 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Large Intercharacter Gap When disabled the spaces between characters or the intercharacter gap are ignored during the decode process Note If the intercharacter space is large enough to be considered a margin the symbol will not decode regardless of this parameter s setting Large Intercharacter Gap Disabled izabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status When disabled the scanner will accept any Codabar symbol provided it doesn t exceed the system s maximum capabilities When enabled the scanner will reject any Codabar symbol that doesn t match the fixed length Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Dizabled Enabled Fixed S
333. t external source processing mode gt Ethernet TCP Port 1 Data Type lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Ethernet TCP Port 2 Data Type lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt EtherNet IP Data Type lt K136 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Preamble lt K141 status oreamble gt Postamble lt K142 status postamble gt Response Timeout lt K143 response timeout gt LRC Status lt K145 status gt ACK NAK Options lt K147 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt Polling Mode Options lt K148 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt Autoconfiguration Daisy Chain lt K150DAIS Y gt Protocol Selection lt K160 protocol address protocol port gt External Data Routing lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Array Communication Modes RS 232A Baud Rate RS 232 A lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 8 115 2K Options 0 600 3 4800 6 38 4K 9 230K 1 1200 2 2400 4 9600 5 19 2K T 57 6K 8 115 2K QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 23 Serial Commands Parity RS 232 A
334. t from the scanner Extra Symbol Information Enables or disables extra symbol information output from the scanner Diagnostics Output Enables or disables diagnostics output from the scanner External Source Processing Mode Enables or disables processing of commands or data from sources external to the scanner Command Command enables command processing in the scanner Data Data enables Ethernet TCP Port 1 as a data source port Note The data path between in the source port and out the source port is always two way Data is copied from source data ports and all those source ports data is transmitted to the destination port and from the destination port to the source port QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 21 Communication TCP Port 2 One of two TCP ports for Ethernet communication with the scanner The default setting is 2003 Ethernet Enabled IF Address 192 166 0 100 Subnet foo 2c 0 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 IP Address Mode DHCP TCP Port 1 U1 Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Oukput Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command Se TCF Port 2 2003 1024 65535 Symbol Data Gukput Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Gutpuk Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command Symbol Data Output Enables or disables decoded symbol data output from the scanner Extra Symbol Information Enables or disables extra symbol information output from
335. t to change Product specifications are given for typical performance at 25 C 77 F using grade A labels Performance characteristics may vary at high temperatures or other environmental extremes Warranty One year limited warranty on parts and labor Extended warranty available QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 5 Electrical Specifications Appendix B Electrical Specifications Power Requirement 7 5 Watts max at 28VDC 10 28VDC 200 mV p p max ripple 180mA at 24VDC typ QX 830 Connectors Output 2 New Master 4 44 3 Default 2 Power Output 1 E Y RS 232 Output 3 6 Se TxD _ PN X Input Common 8 9 RS 232 RxD Output ne Connector A All Models M12 12 pin Plug 1 Trigger Pin Function Wire Color 1 Trigger White 2 Power Brown 3 Default Green 4 New Master Yellow 5 Output 1 Gray 6 Output 3 Pink 7 Ground Blue 8 Input Common Red 9 RS 232 Host RxD Black 10 RS 232 Host TxD Violet 11 Output 2 Gray Pink 12 Output Common Red Blue 7 Terminated on Ain 5 fs oc RX mS A a 4 TX 3 Terminated Connector B Ethernet Models M12 8 pin Socket A 6 RS me RxD Input 9 RS 232 TxD RS 232 RTS Common ot i Trigger a RS 232 RxD RS 232 CTS Ground RS 422 485 RxD s t RS 5 TAX Input 1 4 RS ae TxD Connector B Serial Models M12 12 pin Socket we Power i Termin
336. t whenever the system detects that the service timer s limit has been reached The service timer is reset at power on meaning that the service timer s limit is the amount of time since last reset Service timer increments can be set in seconds or minutes Diagnostics Service Unik Disabled Disabled Enabled Laser Current High Activates output when the laser current exceeds factory defined upper limits Output 1 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Mo Read Output State Normally Open Pulse Width 50 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Ho Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Gukpuk On 0 Decodes per Trigger j Diagnostics High Temperature Disabled Service Unit Disabled Laser Current High Disabled Laser Current Low Disabled Low Temperature Enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 141 I O Parameters Laser Current Low Activates output when the laser current drops below factory defined lower limits Output 1 Parameters Output On Output State Pulse Width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Number of Triggers Number to Output On Decodes per Trigger Diagnostics High Temperature Service Unit Laser Current High Laser Current Low Low Temperature Low Temperature Mismatch or No Read Normally Open 5 Pulse No Read O 0 T Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled E l fa b E d x Enabled Activates o
337. ta Fields in the QX 830 EtherNet IP CIP Interface Object Appendix J Operating the Serial Gateway Data Fields in the QX 830 EtherNet IP CIP Interface Object This appendix outlines a rough pseudo code description of how to operate the serial gateway data fields in the QX 830 EtherNet IP CIP interface object Service Code All EtherNet IP CIP data com transactions with the QX 830 both send and receive are performed with Service Code 0x45 Class ID 0x68 Instance 1 Attribute ID Ox6A Each transaction can send data receive data or both Attribute Ox6A has a variable size with a minimum of 16 bytes and the maximum 486 bytes The first 16 bytes are a header with several fields that enable serial gateway style functionality The remainder of the data packet can be 0 to 470 bytes and contains the serial data The usage of these fields and the serial data is described below To send a command to the QX 830 1 Populate the Serial Data field with a serial command 2 Populate the Send Length field with the string length of the serial command 3 If only sending a command and not waiting for a response in the same transaction e Populate the Receive Timeout field with 0 e Populate the Receive Length field with 0 lf sending a command and waiting for a response in the same transaction e If sending a serial trigger and expecting symbol data output Populate the Receive Timeout with a value equal to the device s read cycle timeout
338. tatus laser on position laser off position laser power background color gt Default 95 Options 15 to 95 Laser Power Serial Cmd lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking unused unused unused framing status laser on position laser off position laser power background color gt Default 1 Medium Options 0 Low 1 Medium 2 High Background Color Serial Cmd lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking unused unused unused framing status laser on position laser off position laser power background color gt Default 0 White Options 0 White 1 Black Switch Timing Switch Mode Serial Cmd lt K254 switch mode time gt Default 0 Time Options 0 Time Time Serial Cmd lt K254 switch mode time gt Default 10 100 ms Options 1 to 65535 in 10 ms increments QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 43 Serial Commands Symbologies Quiet Zone lt K450 qguiet zone status gt Background Color lt K451 background color gt Symbol Ratios lt K452 Code 39 Codabar Interleaved 2 of 5 gt Composite lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt lt K454 status D1 status1 D2 status2 D3 status3 D4 status4 AIAG ID5a ID5b ID5c status5 ID6 status6 ID7 status7 ID8 status8 ID9 status9 ID10 status10 1D11 status11 ID12 status12 gt Depth of Field Enhance lt K456 DOF Enhance mode gt lt K470 status check character status check character output status Code
339. tem to stall on the present data as it attempts to decode all possibilities 5 104 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Symbol Ratio Mode Symbol Ratio Mode is useful for determining how much quality and data security validation will be applied when decoding a Code 39 Codabar or Interleaved 2 of 5 symbol Tight ratios will only decode a high quality symbol Standard ratios will decode most symbols Aggressive ratios will not validate the entire symbol before decoding The ratios are loosened to read poor quality symbols This setting is not recommended unless users understand the potential ramifications character substitution rate may increase dramatically when Symbol Ratio Mode is set to Aggressive Symbol Ratio Mode Code 39 Standard Codabar Standard Interleaved 2 of 5 Standard Code 39 Symbol Fatio Mode Standard Codabar Interleaved 2 of 5 Standard Aqgrmssve Tight Maximum ratio is set to 3 6 1 A Validate function which compares the ratio between the maximum and minimum bars in the symbol is used for additional security A Validate Bars function minimizes the acceptance of skewed symbols Standard Maximum ratio is set to 4 0 1 A Validate function which compares the ratio between the maximum and minimum bars in the symbol is used for additional security Aggressive Maximum ratio is set at 5 5 1 A Validate function is not used in this mode Th
340. th it and the position will be skipped over Read Rate Read Rate is initiated when the associated button position is selected Read Rate will perform decodes second and is the same as sending a lt C gt from ESP s Terminal To exit Read Rate quickly press and release the EZ Button Calibration Calibration is initiated when the associated button position is selected To cancel Calibration quickly press and release the EZ Button Save for Power On All scanner settings will be saved to non volatile memory to be recalled on power on whenever the associated button position is selected This is the same as sending a lt Z gt from ESP s Terminal Auto Framing Auto Framing is initiated when this button position is selected To cancel Auto Framing quickly press and release the EZ Button Load New Master Functions in the same way as New Master Pin input whenever the associated button position is selected Sleep Mode When Sleep Mode is selected the scanner will shut the motor and laser off when this button position is selected To cancel Sleep Mode quickly press and release the EZ Button Bar Code Configuration Enables Bar Code Configuration Mode whenever the associated button position is selected When enabled the scanner can accept configuration commands from symbols To cancel Bar Code Configuration quickly press and release the EZ Button 5 122 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters
341. th Instance 1 Max Recy Delay amp 3 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 164265 Sent pkts 208195 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay O msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 244216 Sent pkts 30663 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay 9msec Max Send Delay 6 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 6124 Sent pkts 7759 Open Connection Failed for Instance 1 Invalid Segnert Type or Segment Value in Path EIPScan Setup 12 Change the first byte to non zero The first byte User Tag echo in the blue area IN will change to the same value Ba ElIPScan ElPscan yx viplest asn1025biz cly File View Request I O Stack Device JO Moduke Help Daa Target M EIPScan TestTool Network Path 10 10 5 294 S Adapter 10 10 4 130 Request fall fields are in hex Host 10 10 4 130 Predefined None Connection APIs 20 20 Cyclic a poggggaga g gge az Service hex le Class hex js 15 14 13 1t 11 10 9 6 7 5 4 3 2 eeccccaa E lc E Instance hex fjor Attribute hes j3 10 10 5 234 Member hex Symbol Tag Request Data Each byte is a 2 char hex value sepaiated by a space i e 0a 26 f9 D Response Response Size decimal 260 aS OD 00 DO OO OO OD OO DO OO OO OD OO DO OO OO OD OO DO OO OO OD OO DO O1 OO OD OO D1 OO OO OD Oi DO OO OO OD 00 DO 00 OD OO DO OO Oc OD OO DO 31 32
342. th its own color which may be entered in decimal or binary format with a 1 represented by a thick bar and a 0 represented by a thin bar Bar width is independent of height In decimal format each part can be up to 999 999 In binary format each input can have up to 19 ones and Zeros Pharmacode Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 10 Minimum Bars 4 Bar Width Status Mixed Direction Forward Fixed Threshold Value 400 Important When Pharmacode is enabled other linear symbologies will not decode properly Disable Pharmacode before reading other linear symbologies Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled the scanner will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered valid Disabled Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Specifies the exact number of bars that must be present for the scanner to recognize and decode the Pharmacode symbol Fixed Symbol Length 1 128 Minimum Bars Sets the minimum number of bars that a Pharmacode symbol must have to be considered valid Minimum Bars 4 4 16 Note The minimum allowed bar count is 4 5 88 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Bar Width Status If set to Mixed the scanner will autodiscriminate between narrow bars and wide bars If set to All Narrow all bars will be considered as narrow
343. the remainder of this document the big assembly set is demonstrated The system is now configured enough to test communication with QX 830 QxX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 113 Allen Bradley Version 16 PLC Setup 17 Select the control button next to Offline and select Download fa RSLuyix 5000 MsvanLuvix3561 1756 161 File Edit Yew Search Logic Communications Tools Window Hep Blea S xBlelo j a ds BS TC alal Offline J E AUN me A Path AB_ETHIP 1510 10 5 233 Bachplane S gt l No Forces Go Onine No Edis Upload 4 H f alajo gt Redundancy Download lil 4 K Favoritee Bit TimerCounter E E Controle program Mode A Controller Tags MscanLogix5561 controller aini Run Mode Contr oie ttpr as Powe Test Mode E MainProgram MainRoutine H 6 Tasks S fa Han Clear Faults En iB 3 Go To Faults Unscheduled Progra H 6 Motion Groups Ungrouped Axes Add On Instructions H 8 Data Types Sq User Defined A qx_command i ta Qx_device _status 8 qk_extemal_inputs te qx_extemal_outputs E qx_IN_big_udt i 9 _IN_small_udt i a qx_IO_big_udt A qx_IO_small_udt E qx_OUT_udt bar Strings E striza A strag R STRING E E Controller Properties ik MamRoutine 4AP A tainProgram a gt Monitor Tags se Downbad using currert communications path choose one CPS for IN
344. the scanner transmits symbol data whenever a symbol matches a master symbol However if Matchcode Type is Disabled it transmits on any good read Note A No Read can still be transmitted if Enabled Mismatch Mismatch is typically used as a flag within the host system to prevent an item from being routed in the wrong container With Mismatch enabled the scanner transmits symbol data whenever the symbol data information does NOT match the master symbol Note A No Read can still be transmitted if Enabled Good Read Good Read is used when an application requires all symbol data to be transmitted It s typically used in tracking applications in which each object is uniquely identified With Good Read enabled the scanner transmits symbol data on any good read regardless of Matchcode Type setting Note A No Read can still be transmitted if Enabled 5 108 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters When to Output Symbol Data This command allows the user to choose when symbol data can be sent to the host Symbol Data Output When to Output Symbol Data As Soon As Possible 5 5 oor fan Prozsible End of Read Cycle As Soon As Possible As Soon As Possible is useful in applications in which symbol data needs to be moved quickly to the host typically when the host is making decisions based on symbol data Note More than one decode might in fact be required to qualify as a good read
345. the trend condition Mismatch No Read Decodes per Trigger Bad Symbol or No Symbol that will activate the output Output 3 Parameters Output On Mismatch Output State Normally Open Pulse width S00 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Mo Read Number of Triggers Number to Qutput On Ho Read Decodes per Trigger Decodes per Trigger Mismatch Output will be activated when the number of mismatches equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers No Read Output will be activated when the number of No Reads equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Decodes per Trigger Output will be activated when the number of decodes equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Bad Symbol Output will be activated when the number of Bad Symbol occurrences equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers No Symbol Output will be activated when the number of No Symbol occurrences equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 159 I O Parameters Number of Triggers The number of triggers to examine for the trend analysis condition Output 3 Parameters
346. tions 0 to 65535 Trend Analysis Output 2 Serial Cmd lt K781 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on gt Trend Analysis Output 3 Serial Cmd lt K782 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on gt Diagnostics Output 1 High Temperature Serial Cmd lt K790 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 65 Serial Commands Service Unit Serial Cmd lt K790 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Laser Current High Serial Cmd lt K790 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Laser Current Low Serial Cmd lt K790 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Low Temperature Serial Cmd lt K790 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Diagnostics Output 2 Serial Cmd lt K791 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Diagnostics Out
347. tivated until 3 No Reads have occurred Sets the number of Trend Analysis Mode events mismatches No Reads or reads trigger as configured by Trend Analysis Mode to occur within the trigger evaluation period before activating the associated output Output 1 Parameters Mutou On Mutpuk State Pulse Width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Number of Triggers Number to Qutpuk On Decodes per Trigger 5 138 Mismatch or Wo Read Normally Open SUL Pulse No Read 0 255 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Decodes per Trigger When set to this mode and when the appropriate output is set to output on trend analysis the scanner will function in a Decodes per Trigger mode during the read cycle and the trend analysis operation Output will be activated based on whether or not the symbol decode count at the end of the read cycle is less than the decodes per trigger threshold Note Although this setup causes the scanner to function in a Decodes per Trigger mode the decode count will only be appended to the symbol data if the status of the Decodes per Trigger command is enabled Output 1 Parameters Gukput On Mismatch or Wo Read Gutput State Normally Open Pulse Width s00 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On 9 Decodes per Trigger D L 65535 Example Decodes per Trigger threshold
348. tively distant from the scanner and the signal to noise ratio and optical focus are not ideal In such cases using a combination of Gain Level and Tracking can improve decode performance by rejecting noise and correctly recognizing the bars of the candidate symbol Transition Counter Transition Counter is an integral part of the AGC system Transition Counter determines the number of black bars that will be counted before an AGC sample is taken Setting a Transition Counter value lower than the default of 14 gives the scanner less integration time for the candidate symbol and makes the scanner more susceptible to false objects A Transition Counter value greater than 14 requires more bars to be present for the symbol even to qualify as an object When setting the Transition Counter value it is important to keep in mind what occurs when the symbol is first presented to the scanner before gain is applied to the symbol A few bars are usually missed due to distortion at first Setting Transition Counter to the same value as the number of bars contained in the symbol can cause the scanner not to take an AGC sample at all The value of 14 is optimal except in the case of low bar count due to e Symbols that are tilted so that only 10 bars or fewer are available in a single scan line See Symbol Reconstruction e Symbologies with typically low bar counts such as Pharmacode Applications using symbols with fewer than 10 bars should use Fixe
349. tput 1 Programmable Output 2 Programmable Output 3 lt Disable Scanner PSHE Enable Scanner Store Next Symbol Read to Database Index 1 O ae Store Next Symbol Read to Database Index n lt NEWM gt New Master Load Status Display All Firmware Part Numbers Display Application Code Part Number Display Boot Code Part Number Display FPGA Code Part Number Display All Available Firmware Checksums Display Application Code Code Checksum Display Boot Code Checksum Display FPGA Code Checksum Save Current Settings for Power On Save Current Settings as Customer Default Parameters lt Ze gt for Power On Recall Customer Default Settings and Save for epee Power On lt Zrd gt Recall Microscan Default Settings and Save for Power On Will not default sticky settings lt Z7rdall gt Recall Microscan Default Settings and Save for Power On Will also default sticky settings lt A gt Reset Will not save for power on lt Arp gt Reset and Recall Power On Parameters QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices lt Arc gt Reset and Recall Customer Default Parameters pPeuneseunave lt Ard gt Reset and Recall Microscan Default Parameters All Status Request lt K gt All Descriptor Status Request All Range Status Request Scanner Status ands Knnn gt Singe Status Request Request Commands Single Descriptor Status Request Single Range Status Request lt Knnnd gt Default
350. tput when the laser current exceeds factory defined upper limits output 2 Parameters Qutpuek On Qutpuk Stake Pulse Width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Number of Triggers Number to Output On Decodes per Trigger Diagnostics High Temperature Service Unik Laser Current High Laser Current Low Low Temperature 5 152 Mismatch or No Read Normally Open 50 Pulse Ho Read 0 0 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Laser Current Low Scanner Parameters Activates output when the laser current drops below factory defined lower limits Output 2 Parameters Mutpur On Mutpuk State Pulse width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Number of Triggers Number to Output On Decodes per Trigger Diagnostics High Temperature Service Unit Laser Current High Laser Current Low Low Temperature Low Temperature Mismatch or Wo Read Normally Open o0 Pulse Mo Read T T 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled B i fa b d x Enabled Activates output when the temperature drops below factory defined lower limits Output 2 Parameters Output on Output State Pulse Width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Humber of Triggers Humber to Output On Decodes per Trigger Diagnostics High Temperature Service Unit Laser Current High Laser Current Low Low Temperature
351. transaction Error Condition 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data SCANNER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached SCANNER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached SCANNER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached SCANNER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached SCANNER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 data is flushed QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 87 Protocol Commands Error Condition 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data SCANNER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached SCANNER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again HOST TX NAK Host rejects data frame Retry Event SCANNER_TX 0x1C STX lt T O0000 gt ETX LRC Unit sends again HOST TX ACK Host receives data SCANNER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 Error Condition 3 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data SCANNER_TX 0Ox1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX BAD LRC HOST_TX NAK Host rejects bad LRC data Retry Event SCANNER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX GOOD LRC Unit sends again HOST_TX ACK Host receives data SCANNER_TX
352. trial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Laser Off Position The duration of Laser On time Laser Off Position is a ratio of the total scan width with increments equal to 1 100th of the total scan width Laser Setup Laser On CFF Disabled Laser Framing Status Disabled Laser On Position 10 Laser OFF Position E Es 15 95 Laser Power Medium Laser Power Allows the user to select the Laser Power setting as follows Low Laser Power 0 6mW Typically only needed for decoding high density symbols located close to the scanner Medium Laser Power 1 0mW High Laser Power 1 5mW Typically used for decoding lower density symbols located far from the scanner Laser Setup Laser On OrF Disabled Laser Framing Status Disabled Laser On Position 10 Laser OFF Position a5 Laser Power Medium Medium High QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 69 Symbologies Symbologies d the tree control tabs _ 7 i Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display App Mode Then click the Symbologies tab to display the Symbologies tree control To open nested options Parameters i Communication Read Cycle Symbologies 1 0 Matchcode Diagnostics Parameters ESP Values Symbologies 10 Sy mbologies Code 39 Enabled Code 128 Both Standard or Edge single click the Interl
353. trial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters UPC EAN Used primarily in point of sale applications in the retail industry It is commonly used with Microscan scanners in applications in combination with Matchcode when there is a need to verify that the right product is being placed in the right packaging UPC Universal Product Code is a fixed length numeric continuous symbology UPC can have two or five digit supplemental bar code data following the normal code The UPC Version A UPC A symbol is used to encode a 12 digit number The first digit is the number system character the next five are the manufacturer number the next five are the product number and the last digit is the checksum character When enabled the scanner will read UPC Version A and UPC Version E only UPCIE AN Both Standard or Edge EAN Status Enabled Supplementals Status Disabled Separator Status Disabled Separator Character i Supplementals Type Both UPC E as UPC 4 Disabled EAN Status EAN is the European version of the UPC symbology and is used in European retail applications Note UPC must be enabled for EAN to take effect EAN is a subset of UPC When enabled the scanner will read UPC Version A UPC Version E EAN 13 and EAN 8 It also appends a leading zero to UPC Version A symbol information and transmits 13 digits If transmitting 13 digits when reading UPC Version A symbols is not desired disable EAN EAN Status Enabled
354. trigger input options are disabled the scanner is always in the read cycle and it will attempt to decode and transmit data for every symbol If a single symbol stays within read range for multiple read cycles its data will be transmitted repeatedly until it leaves the read range The scanner sends replies to serial commands that require responses when symbol data is transmitted or read cycle timeout is enabled and a timeout occurs Depending on the combination of enabled symbologies and the Threshold Mode setting the scanner may take longer than the timeout to process symbol data Trigger ee Continuous Read Trigger Filter Curation Continuous Read Leading Edge Continuous Read 1 Output Trailing Edge External Level External Edge Serial Data Serial Data and Edge External Trigger State Note When to Output and No Read options have no affect on Continuous Read 5 46 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Continuous Read 1 Output Continuous Read 1 Output can be useful in applications where it is not feasible to use a trigger and all succeeding symbols contain different information It is also effective in applications where the objects are presented by hand In Continuous Read 1 Output the scanner self triggers whenever it decodes a new symbol or a timeout occurs lf End of Read Cycle Mode is set to Timeout and the symbol doesn t change the output is repeated at the end of each timeo
355. ts in the data field is even or odd Picket Fence Orientation A linear symbol orientation in which the bars are perpendicular to the symbol s direction of travel Pitch Rotation of a symbol around an axis parallel to the symbol length on the substrate PLC See Programmable Logic Controller Port Logical circuit for data entry and exit One or more ports may be included within a single connector Programmable Logic Controller PLC An electronic device used in industrial automation environments such as factory assembly lines and automotive manufacturing facilities Protocol The rules for communication between devices providing a means to control the orderly flow of information between linked devices Read Cycle A programmed period of time or condition during which a scanner will accept symbol input Skew Rotation of a symbol around an axis parallel to the symbol height on the substrate Substrate The surface upon which a symbol is printed stamped or etched Symbol Transitions The transition of bars and spaces on a symbol used to detect the presence of a symbol on an object QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 133 Glossary of Terms Symbology A symbol type such as Code 39 or Code 128 with special rules to define the widths and positions of bars and spaces to represent specific numeric or alphanumeric information Tilt Rotation of a symbol around an axis perpendicu
356. ts power up RER GREEN Self test testing the module status indicator will Per requirement be flashing GREEN RED NET Network Indicator State Summary Requirement nueTosean Implementation Steady OFF Flashing GREEN No power no IP address No connections If the device does not have an IP address or is powered off the network status indicator will be steady OFF If the device has no established connections but has obtained an IP address the network status indicator will be flashing GREEN Per requirement Before device has acquired an IP address via DHCP Per requirement After device has acquired an IP address static or DHCP If the device has at least one established connection even to the Message indicator will be flashing GREEN RED Steady GREEN Connected Router the network status indicator will Per requirement be steady GREEN Connection If one or more of the connections in timeout which the device is the target has timed FASNNg RED out the network status indicator will be Per requirement flashing RED If the device has detected that its IP Steady RED Duplicate IP address is already in use the network Not implemented status indicator will be steady RED l While the device is performing its TE GREEN Self test power up testing the module status Per requirement QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 101 Operating the Serial Gateway Da
357. ttings See Also 4 Network Troubleshooter Other Places Control Panel amp My Network Places My Documents 4 My Computer Details Network Connections 3 S F Cs Ch Ch Cp 1394 Connection Local Area Connection Local Area Connection 2 Local Area Connection 3 Wireless Network Connection QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 13 Communication Ethernet cont 3 The Local Area Connection Status dialog will appear To check the host computer s connection settings click Details on the Support tab To verify connection status 4 Local Area Connection Status a On the Support tab click the Details General Support button to bring up a list of Network Connection Details Connection status ZAN Address Type Assigned by DHCP IP Address 162 148 88 35 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Network Connection Details Network Connection Details Property Value Default Gateway 162 148 26 1 Physical Address 00 0C F1 EC 61 D5 IP Address 162 148 88 35 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Default Gateway 162 148 26 1 DHCP Server 162 148 25 71 Lease Obtained 11 3 2008 10 53 03 AM Lease Expires 2 1 2009 10 53 03 AM Windows did not detect problems with this connection If you cannot connect click Repair DNS Servers 162 148 25 71 162 148 25 70 198 6 1 3 WINS Server Close 4 A connected QX 830 s default address information can be verified in ESP by clicking the Search button in the Conne
358. uence is not 0 STRING 32 U32 U8 64 Read Cycle Report Decoded Data Up to 64 8 bit chars The first U32 is the length of the bar code data in the U8 64 field Total 84 U8 or 21 U32 This is a small lightweight input assembly It is a subset of the Big IN Assembly 0x65 It provides feedback of the output assembly and the text of any bar codes decoded by the reader See Big IN Assembly 0x65 for a description of the data fields A 94 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices QX 830 Big IN Assembly 0x65 101 decimal IN QX 830 gt PLC Field Data Type mane eee Field Name User Defined Tag Echo A l Echo from asm OUT 0xC6 U32 Command Echo 32 bit flags Echo from asm OUT OxC6 2 U32 Output Control Echo 32 bit flags Echo from asm OUT 0xC6 3 ne flags 1 External Input Status Physical Pin State 4 oe 1 External Output Status Physical Pin State 32 bit flags U32 5 32 bit flags 1 Device Status Read Cycle Sequence Counter When this value changes it indicates the following read cycle report fields have changed 6 U32 1 0 Read cycle report has been reset to empty Read cycle report data is only valid when Sequence is not 0 7 U32 1 Read cycle report Trigger count lt T gt 8 j U32 1 Read cycle report Decode Match count lt V gt 9 jU32 1 Read cycle report Mismatch count lt X gt 10
359. us fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Normal Options 0 Normal 1 High 2 Highest Code 93 Serial Cmd lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length gt Default 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge Options 0 Disabled 1 Standard 2 Edge to Edge 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 93 Serial Cmd lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Length Code 93 Serial Cmd lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length gt Default 10 Options 1 to 128 PDF417 Serial Cmd lt K476 status scan line limit fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused decode at end of read cycle gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Scan Line Limit Serial Cmd lt K476 status scan line limit fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused decode at end of read cycle gt Default 65535 Disabled Options 1 to 65535 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 53 Serial Commands Fixed Symbol Length Status PDF417 Serial Cmd lt K476 status scan line limit fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused decode at end of read cycle gt Default 0 Disabled Options
360. use the cursor to scroll through the options Note Read Cycle settings can also be sent to the scanner from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format Refer to the Read Cycle section of Appendix E 5 43 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Read Cycle Read Cycle Setup Setting up read cycle and triggering parameters involves a series of decisions based on the particular application as follows 1 Select the number of symbols to be read in a single cycle 2 Decide on the trigger type to be used if serial choose a serial character if external choose either External Level or External Edge 3 Designate how the read cycle should end Timeout New Trigger 5 44 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Multisymbol Multisymbol is commonly used in shipping applications where a shipping symbol contains individual symbols for part number quantity etc This feature allows one trigger to pick up all the symbols Multisymbol allows the user to define up to 100 symbols that can be read in a single read cycle The following conditions apply e The maximum number of characters in a read cycle is 3 000 for all symbols e All No Read messages are posted at the end of the data string unless output filtering is enabled e If more than one symbol is within the field of view at the same time symbol data may not be displayed in the order of appearance If Matchcode Type is set to
361. ut T gt Input T gt Input A 10 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices PNP Output for External Load Camera QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 11 Electrical Specifications Optoisolated Inputs All discrete inputs are optoisolated Inputs can be configured as either NPN or PNP but NPN and PNP cannot be mixed in a system because the input common is shared by all inputs NPN Source NPN Camera CLC Current Limiting Circuit A 12 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices PNP Source PNP Camera Input Common CLC Current Limiting Circuit QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 13 Ground and Shield Considerations Appendix C Ground and Shield Considerations Proper grounding is necessary for operator safety noise reduction and the protection of equipment from voltage transients Buildings including any steelwork all circuits and all junction boxes must be grounded directly to an earth ground in compliance with local and national electrical codes hr pate Ee Ae Fao CNT wut Tin oe Mine Srey oth SRS Ge ps Per a Be OE Pt Po Mare Sn AR whe RY ud ET HERNET F i i i o gm Ste thy oe oS o OS w a a de o et er eee a GS o oa wegs ar g DEVICE 5 F eo we oe a POWERS V seus oo Bi eo we 6 Oi Bie ews et ok OO oe ee ae oe a ee SUPPLY amp i a amp am e a ween WA Al ve wah es ROA e
362. ut Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Pulse Number of Triggers Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition Murmber te Output On Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re Enter Read Cycle Decodes per Trigger T Diagnostics High Temperature Disabled Service Unit Disabled Laser Current High Disabled Laser Current Low Disabled Low Temperature Disabled Pulse This is the default mode of operation in which the programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active for the duration of the selected pulse width Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the Input 1 Pin transitions Note Input 1 must be set to Unlatch Output for Latch Mode 1 to function Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the opposite condition selected under Output On has been met For example if No Read is enabled under Output On the programmable output will go active on a No Read and remain active until the opposite condition a good read occurs Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re enter Read Cycle The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until a new read cycle begins Note All of the Output On modes are inhibited when any Diagnostic Warning is active for Output 1 QX 830 Compact Industrial Sca
363. ut at timeout gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output at End of Read Cycle Serial Cmd lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output at ETX Serial Cmd lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default CR 0x0D Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Output at Timeout Serial Cmd lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default 200 x10 ms 2 seconds Options 0 65535 Array Communication Modes Mode Serial Cmd lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Daisy Chain QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual A 35 Serial Commands Source Serial Cmd lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Default 1 RS 232 on QX 830 Connector B Options 0 RS 232 on QX 830 Connector A 1 RS 232 on QX 830 Connector B 2 RS 422 on QX 830 Connector B 4 Ethernet TCP Port 1 5 Ethernet TCP Port 2 Daisy Chain ID Status Serial Cmd lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Daisy Chain ID Serial Cmd lt K162 mod
364. ut period For example if Timeout is set to one second the scanner sends the symbol data immediately and repeats the output at intervals of one second for as long as the symbol remains in the field of view lf End of Read Cycle Mode is set to New Trigger the scanner will send the current symbol data immediately but only once A new symbol appearing in the scanner s range will be read and sent immediately provided it is not identical to the previous symbol Caution In automated environments Continuous Read 1 Output is not recommended because there is typically no reliable way to verify that a symbol was missed Note If Trigger Mode is set to Continuous Read 1 Output the scanner will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 47 Read Cycle External Level Initiate Read Cycle lt q Object 1 moving in front of the i A Ta causes a change in the trigger state Object N which initiates the read cycle End Read Cycle The same object moving out of the detector beam causes another change in the trigger state which ends the read cycle This mode is effective in an application where the speeds of the conveying apparatus are variable and the time the scanner spends reading each object is not predictable It also allows the user to determine if a No Read has occurred External Level allows the read cycle active state to
365. utput index start location length gt lt K741 output index length hex string gt Format Assign lt K742 symbol number status gt Output Format Status lt K743 output format status gt Output Filter Configuration lt K744 filter number symbology length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Output Filter Enable A 20 lt K745 number of filters gt QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Serial Command Format Microscan readers are controlled by two types of serial commands configuration commands and utility commands Rules that apply to both configuration and utility commands e Less than lt and greater than gt angle bracket characters enclose the commands e Commands and data are case sensitive Characters must be entered as upper or lower case as specified Serial Utility Commands Serial Utility Commands are sent during operations and are not followed by lt A gt or lt Z gt Serial Configuration Commands K Commands Microscan s serial configuration commands begin with a single K character followed by a 3 digit numeric character comma separated command fields and an initializing command as follows lt Knumeric character data data etc gt lt initializing command gt An initializing command lt Z gt or lt A gt may follow the command e lt Z gt initializes the scanner s memory and saves for power on e
366. utput when the temperature drops below factory defined lower limits Output 1 Parameters Output On Output State Pulse Width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Humber of Triggers Humber to Output On Decodes per Trigger Diagnostics High Temperature Service Unit Laser Current High Laser Current Low Low Temperature 5 142 Mismatch or No Read Normally Open SU Pulse Mo Read T T T Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled isabled Enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Output 2 Parameters Output 2 has the same parameters and default settings as Output 1 Gukpuk 2 Parameters Qutpue On Qutpur State Pulse Width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Number of Triggers Number to Output On Decodes per Trigger Diagnostics High Temperature Service Unit Laser Current High Laser Current Low Low Temperature Mismatch or Wo Read Normally Open ot Pulse No Read T j j Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Output On Scanner Parameters Output On provides discrete signalling to host software to control external devices such as PLCs and relays It is useful for routing sorting and to prevent mis packaging and mis routing Sets the discrete output functions for specific user selected conditions Allows the user to set the conditions under which an output or outputs will be activated Note
367. vice Unit Allows the user to set up the output to toggle to active when the service timer has expired This condition will only be held for one service timer click Note This feature cannot be used if the scanner is in Continuous Read When Service Unit is enabled a message of up to 10 ASCII characters is sent whenever the system detects that the service timer s limit has been reached The service timer is reset at power on meaning that the service timer s limit is the amount of time since last reset Service timer increments can be set in seconds or minutes Oukpue 3 Parameters GurpuUeE On Mismatch Output State Normally Open Pulse Width 50 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On 0 Decodes per Trigger T Diagnostics High Temperature Disabled Service Unit Disabled Laser Current High mee Laser Current Low Enabled Low Temperature Disabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 163 I O Parameters Laser Current High Activates output when the laser current exceeds factory defined upper limits Output 3 Parameters MurpuE On Mutpur State Pulse Width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Number of Triggers Number to Qutpuk On Decodes per Trigger Diagnostics High Temperature Service Unit Laser Current High Laser Current Low Low Temperature Laser Current Low Mismatch Normally Open ol Pulse
368. wed in RSLogix with a CompactLogix 5332E as the processor though the final program was not tested with a CompactLogix processor 1 Create the I O Configuration for the base system including the system s Ethernet interface f RSLogix 5000 MscanLogix5561 1756 161 File Edit Yiew Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help alsia S elel oll elele Il Ala Offline J E RUN EE EA ath AB_ETHIP 1 10 105 232 Backplone v Sl No Forces b M OK No Edits PHN 4 a al gt R By D AA Favorites A Add O Alart Bit Timer Counter AE Controller MscanLogix5561 Controller Tags MscanLogix5561 controller I IA Controller Tags OOS O lt r ae Controller adi Handler Scope fa MscanLogix5561_v Show Show All Power 9p Handler 3 6 Tasks MainTask amp MainProgram Unscheduled Programs amp Motion Groups E Ungrouped Axes GQ Add On Instructions Data Types User Defined E Strings i Add On Defined Ge Predefined a Module Defined Gi Trends amp 1 0 Configuration amp 1756 Backplane 1756 44 fa 0 1756 L61 MscanLogix5561 3 1756 ENBT A eip Ethernet 4 gt Monitor Tags AEdit Tags JCE Enter a tag name A 104 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Appendices Add QX 830 by right clicking on the Ethernet interface and select New Module f RSLogix 5000 MscanLogix5561 1756 161 File Edit Yiew Search L
369. wide and three narrow representing numbers O through 9 with the bars representing the first character and the interleaved spaces representing the second character A check character is highly recommended Interleaved 2 of 5 Disabled Check Character Status Disabled Check Character Output Status Disabled Symbol Length 1 10 Symbol Length 2 6 Guard Bar Disabled Range Mode Status Disabled Check Character Status This option is not typically used but it can be enabled for additional security in applications where the host requires redundant check character verification An error correcting routine in which the check character character is added Check Character Status Disabled DO jsabled Enabled Check Character Output Status When enabled a check character character is sent along with the symbol data for added data security Check Character Qutpuk Status Disabled izabled Enabled QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 77 Symbologies Symbol Length 1 Useful in applications where Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols of a specific length are required The Symbol Length 1 field is one of two fields against which the decoded symbol is compared before accepting it as valid or rejecting it Important If Range Mode Status is set to Disabled the length of the symbol must match either Symbol Length 1 or Symbol Length 2 to be considered a valid symbol lf Range Mode Status is set to En
370. will start the read cycle ey F2 Clear Key Clear All Keys Alt Shift Ctrl Note The F1 key is reserved for opening ESP Help and the F3 key is reserved for the Find Next function Change Font Allows the user to modify the font used for decode data received from the scanner on the Terminal Change Echo Font Allows the user to modify the font used for command characters typed into the Terminal Enable Echo Allows the user to enter command characters in Terminal Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus When Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus is enabled data from the scanner will continue to appear in the Terminal even when ESP is not the top window QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 2 7 Menu Toolbar Preferences gt Bar Code Options Tab Preferences General Terminal Gar Code Options Advanced Sizing Information Caption Bar Height 0 500 Inches Caption Font Bar Width 13 Mils Alignment No Caption Default Settings Sizing Information Sets the bar height in inches and bar width in mils or thousandths of an inch of user created symbols Example A bar width of 13 mils is 0 013 inches Caption Allows the user to define a caption for the symbol and to determine the alignment of the caption in relation to the symbol 2 8 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Using ESP Preferences gt Advanced Tab Preferences G
371. xt to speech and for speech recognition if installed See information about your computer system and change settings for hardware performance and automatic updates Customize the Start Menu and the taskbar such as the types of items to be displayed and how they should appear Change user account settings and passwords For people who share this computer Configure the Windows Firewall Set up or add to a wireless network For your home or office Connects to other computers networks and the Internet 2 The Network Connections dialog will appear Double click the icon for the Local Area Connection being used in the application Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Qx gt i JO Search E gt Folders FF Address Network Connections Network Tasks E Create a new connection Change Windows Firewall settings Disable this network device amp Repair this connection il Rename this connection View status of this connection Change settings of this connection LAN or High Speed Internet Other Places C Lih Ue gt Control Panel My Network Places G My Documents 4 My Computer 2 Local Area Connection 3 Local Area Conng Wireless Network Connection Create Shortcut Details Rename 4 View or change settings for this connection such as adapter protocol or modem configuration settings Local Area Connection A 90 QX 830 Compact Industrial Sc
372. xternal Trigger State Allows users to select the trigger polarity that will be used in their application Determines the active state of the trigger signal applied to the cable input of the scanner Trigger Mode Continuous Read Trigger Filter Duration Leading Edge 313 Trailing Edge 313 External Trigger State Active Closed Acte Closed 5 50 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Serial Trigger Allows the user to define the trigger character and delimiters that start and stop the read cycle A serial trigger is considered an online host command and requires the same command format as all host commands It must be entered within angle bracket delimiters lt and gt or in the case of non delimited triggers it must define individual start and stop characters Serial Trigger Character Delimited SP Start Character Mon Delimited 0x00 NUL Stop Character Mon Delimited 0x00 NUL Character Delimited Allows the user to define the trigger character that initiates the read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that initiates the read cycle A delimited trigger character is one that either starts or ends the read cycle and is enclosed by delimiters such as lt and gt Serial Trigger Character Delimited Start Character Mon Delimite AP Stop Character Mon Delimite 50H STY ETX EOT ENG ACK BEL EEn HT a a FF cn 50 _s1 DLE De1 oc
373. xtra Symbol Information RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K131 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Diagnostic Output RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K131 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Source Processing Mode RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K131 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Command Options 0 Disabled 1 Command 2 Data RS 422 Data Type Symbol Data Output RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Extra Symbol Information RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Diagnostic Output RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Source Processing Mode RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Defau
374. xtra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt RS 422 Data Type lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Ethernet TCP Port 1 Data Type lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Ethernet TCP Port 2 Data Type lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt EtherNet IP Data Type lt K136 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Preamble lt K141 status oreamble gt Postamble lt K142 status postamble gt Response Timeout lt K143 response timeout gt LRC Status lt K145 status gt ACK NAK Options lt K147 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt Polling Mode Options lt K148 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt Autoconfiguration Daisy Chain lt K150DAIS Y gt Protocol Selection lt K160 protocol address protoco l port gt External Data Routing lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Array Communication Modes lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Read Cycle Trigger Mode Trigger Filter Duration Serial Trigger Character lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter duration t
375. ymbol Length This is the value against which all Codabar symbol lengths will be compared Fixed Symbol Length 1 128 Check Character Type When disabled the scanner will not perform any character checking calculations on decoded Codabar symbols When set to Mod 16 the scanner will perform a modulus 16 check character calculation on the symbol If the symbol does not pass this calculation it will not be decoded When set to NW 7 the scanner will perform an NW7 modulus 11 check character calculation on the symbol If the symbol does not pass this calculation it will not be decoded When set to Both the scanner will perform both the Mod 16 and NW7 modulus 11 check character calculations on the symbol If the symbol does not pass either calculation it will not be decoded Check Character Type Disabled Disabled Mod 16 Hat T Both QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 81 Symbologies Check Character Output Status When this field is disabled and a check character calculation is enabled the scanner will strip the verified check character from the symbol data output This condition must be accounted for if a fixed length is also being used When enabled the scanner will output the check character as part of the symbol data This condition must be accounted for if a fixed length is also being used Check Character Output Status Disabled DO jsabled Enabled 5 82 QX 830 Compact Indus
376. ymbols in their encoded 6 character format When enabled the scanner will format the symbol as either a 12 character UPC A symbol or an EAN 13 symbol depending on the state of the EAN status parameter This formatting reverses the zero suppression that is used to generate the symbol in the UPC specification UFPC E as UPC A Disabled D i 2g b E d x Enabled 5 86 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual Scanner Parameters Code 93 Used in some clinical applications Code 93 is a variable length continuous symbology employing four element widths Each Code 93 character has nine modules that may be either black or white Each character contains three bars and three spaces Code 93 Both Standard or Edge Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 10 Fixed Symbol Length Status When disabled the scanner will accept any Code 93 symbol provided is doesn t exceed the system s maximum capabilities When enabled the scanner will reject any Code 93 symbol that doesn t match the fixed symbol length Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled i ig b l E d x Enabled Fixed Symbol Length This is the symbol length value against which all Code 93 symbols will be compared Fixed Symbol Length i 0 1 128 QX 830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual 5 87 Symbologies Pharmacode Used mostly in pharmaceutical packaging Encodes up to five different numbers each wi

QX-830 Compact Industrial Scanner User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents